OPTICAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (OMS) | … MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (OMS) | RELEASE 6.3.2 PROVISIONING GUIDE FOR...

OPTICAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (OMS) | RELEASE 6.3.2PROVISIONING GUIDE FOR 1655 ACCESS MULTIPLEXER UNIVERSAL, RELEASE 5.0 (FORMERLYMETROPOLIS® AMU)

365-312-854R5.0CC109663732

ISSUE 1MARCH 2008

Alcatel-Lucent - ProprietaryThis document contains proprietary information of Alcatel-Lucent andis not to be disclosed or used except in accordance with applicableagreements.

See notice on first age

Alcatel, Lucent, Alcatel-Lucent and the Alcatel-Lucent logo are trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent. All other trademarks are the property of theirrespective owners.

The information presented is subject to change without notice. Alcatel-Lucent assumes no responsibility for inaccuracies contained herein.

Copyright © 2008 Alcatel-Lucent. Unpublished and Not for Publication. All Rights Reserved.

See notice on first age

Alcatel-Lucent - ProprietarySee notice on first page

Contents

About this document

Purpose.......................................................................................................................................................................................... xiiixiii

Safety information.................................................................................................................................................................... xiiixiii

Conventions used...................................................................................................................................................................... xiiixiii

Orientation aids.......................................................................................................................................................................... xivxiv

Related information................................................................................................................................................................... xvxv

Document support..................................................................................................................................................................... xvixvi

Technical support...................................................................................................................................................................... xvixvi

How to order............................................................................................................................................................................... xvixvi

How to comment....................................................................................................................................................................... xvixvi

1 Safety

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-11-1

General notes on safety

Structure of hazard statements............................................................................................................................................ 1-31-3

Symbols used in hazard statements................................................................................................................................... 1-41-4

Basic safety aspects................................................................................................................................................................. 1-51-5

Specific safety areas

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-81-8

Laser safety................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-81-8

Electrostatic discharge.......................................................................................................................................................... 1-111-11

2 Security administration tasks

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-12-1

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


iii

To view a list of ITM-CIT accesses................................................................................................................................. 2-22-2

To log out ITM-CIT user(s)................................................................................................................................................. 2-32-3

To view a list of ITM-CIT access control profiles..................................................................................................... 2-42-4

To modify ITM-CIT access control profile(s).............................................................................................................. 2-52-5

3 Management communication setup concepts

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-13-1

Basic DCN principles............................................................................................................................................................. 3-23-2

DCN configurations................................................................................................................................................................. 3-43-4

DCN addresses........................................................................................................................................................................... 3-73-7

NSAP address structure.......................................................................................................................................................... 3-83-8

Data communication channels (DCC)........................................................................................................................... 3-103-10

Dual stack with tunneling (DSwT)................................................................................................................................. 3-133-13

DSwT tunnel auto provisioning (TAP)......................................................................................................................... 3-173-17

DSwT connecting areas with manual TAP tunnels.................................................................................................. 3-183-18

Partition repair......................................................................................................................................................................... 3-193-19

Partition repair guidelines................................................................................................................................................... 3-203-20

OMS-to-NE connections concepts.................................................................................................................................. 3-223-22

Auto-discovery concepts (subnetworks)....................................................................................................................... 3-243-24

4 Management communication setup tasks

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-14-1

Tasks related to OMS-to-NE connections

To view a list of OMS-to-NE connections.................................................................................................................... 4-34-3

To add an OMS-to-NE connection.................................................................................................................................... 4-44-4

To modify an OMS-to-NE connection............................................................................................................................. 4-74-7

To deactivate an OMS-to-NE connection.................................................................................................................... 4-104-10

To activate an OMS-to-NE connection......................................................................................................................... 4-124-12

To test the communication with an NE........................................................................................................................ 4-144-14

To delete an OMS-to-NE connection............................................................................................................................. 4-154-15

Contents

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

iv Alcatel-Lucent - ProprietarySee notice on first page

365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

To delete an NE...................................................................................................................................................................... 4-174-17

Tasks related to DCC

To view a list of DCC/EOW status for the port overheads................................................................................. 4-194-19

To modify the DCC/EOW status for a selected port overhead........................................................................... 4-204-20

To modify DCN parameters.............................................................................................................................................. 4-214-21

To view the DCC in MSP mode...................................................................................................................................... 4-234-23

To set the DCC in MSP mode to slave or to independent................................................................................... 4-244-24

To view a list of overhead access ports........................................................................................................................ 4-264-26

To view a list of transparent DCC cross-connections............................................................................................. 4-274-27

To add a transparent DCC cross-connection............................................................................................................... 4-284-28

To delete a transparent DCC cross-connection.......................................................................................................... 4-304-30

To view a list of P12sDCC Inband E1 Management Channels........................................................................ 4-324-32

To modify P12sDCC Inband E1 Management Channel parameters............................................................... 4-334-33

5 Equipment provisioning concepts

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-15-1

1655 Access Multiplexer Universal configuration possibilities............................................................................. 5-15-1

NE hardware components and their identifiers............................................................................................................ 5-35-3

Node creation............................................................................................................................................................................. 5-65-6

Miscellaneous discrete inputs and outputs..................................................................................................................... 5-85-8

Equipment protection groups............................................................................................................................................... 5-95-9

6 Equipment provisioning tasks

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-16-1

Provisioning of slots and SFP modules

To view a list of slots............................................................................................................................................................. 6-36-3

To modify a slot........................................................................................................................................................................ 6-56-5

To select reset options for a slot........................................................................................................................................ 6-86-8

To view a list of SFP modules......................................................................................................................................... 6-106-10

To view SFP module information................................................................................................................................... 6-126-12

Contents

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


v

To set the SFP module assignment state...................................................................................................................... 6-156-15

USB provisioning

View USB interface information..................................................................................................................................... 6-176-17

View USB device information ........................................................................................................................................ 6-186-18

Set the USB interface assignment state...................................................................................................................... 6-196-19

Port provisioning

To view a list of physical ports........................................................................................................................................ 6-206-20

To view a list of logical ports........................................................................................................................................... 6-216-21

To view a list of contained logical ports...................................................................................................................... 6-226-22

To view a list of loopback-enabled ports..................................................................................................................... 6-236-23

To provision or deprovision a loopback on a port................................................................................................... 6-246-24

To modify the parameters of a physical or logical port........................................................................................ 6-266-26

Parameters for SDH/PDH ports....................................................................................................................................... 6-286-28

Parameters for Ethernet ports............................................................................................................................................ 6-336-33

Parameters for VCG ports.................................................................................................................................................. 6-376-37

Data service

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-436-43

To view Ethernet card information................................................................................................................................. 6-446-44

To modify Ethernet card information............................................................................................................................ 6-456-45

To configure IEEE 802.3ah OAM................................................................................................................................. 6-476-47

To view virtual concatenation groups............................................................................................................................ 6-486-48

To modify virtual concatenation groups....................................................................................................................... 6-506-50

To view VC TTPs .................................................................................................................................................................. 6-526-52

To reset the wait to restore timer for VC TTPs........................................................................................................ 6-536-53

MIB management

To upload the MIB into the management system..................................................................................................... 6-556-55

To download the MIB to an NE...................................................................................................................................... 6-566-56

To update the MIB image................................................................................................................................................... 6-576-57

To enable the association with an NE........................................................................................................................... 6-586-58

Contents

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

vi Alcatel-Lucent - ProprietarySee notice on first page

365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

To disable the association with an NE.......................................................................................................................... 6-596-59

Provisioning of NE event controls

To modify NE event controls............................................................................................................................................ 6-616-61

To view NE event parameter settings.......................................................................................................................... 6-636-63

To modify NE event parameter settings..................................................................................................................... 6-646-64

Provisioning of MDIs and MDOs

To view a list of MDOs ...................................................................................................................................................... 6-666-66

To view alarms associated with an MDO.................................................................................................................... 6-676-67

To modify an MDO .............................................................................................................................................................. 6-686-68

To view a list of MDIs ........................................................................................................................................................ 6-706-70

To modify an MDI ................................................................................................................................................................ 6-716-71

Equipment protection

To view a list of equipment protection groups.......................................................................................................... 6-736-73

To add an equipment protection group......................................................................................................................... 6-746-74

To modify an equipment protection group.................................................................................................................. 6-766-76

To delete an equipment protection group..................................................................................................................... 6-786-78

To execute an equipment protection switch................................................................................................................ 6-796-79

7 Alarm management concepts

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-17-1

Alarm Severity Assignment Profile (ASAP) concepts.............................................................................................. 7-17-1

8 Alarm management tasks

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-18-1

To create a new Alarm Severity Assignment Profile (ASAP)............................................................................... 8-28-2

To modify an existing ASAP............................................................................................................................................... 8-38-3

To delete an ASAP................................................................................................................................................................... 8-58-5

To view ASAP information.................................................................................................................................................. 8-68-6

To view an assignment list for a specified ASAP...................................................................................................... 8-78-7

To assign an ASAP to one or several managed objects........................................................................................... 8-98-9

Contents

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


vii

To view assigned ASAPs for a specified managed object.................................................................................... 8-128-12

To assign one or more ASAPs in different groups to one or several managed objects........................... 8-158-15

To assign one or several NE resources to an ASAP............................................................................................... 8-188-18

9 Timing provisioning concepts

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-19-1

Network element timing........................................................................................................................................................ 9-19-1

Network synchronization....................................................................................................................................................... 9-49-4

Timing quality levels............................................................................................................................................................... 9-69-6

Priorities ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-79-7

Retiming ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-89-8

Parameters for provisioning timing sources.................................................................................................................. 9-99-9

Parameters for provisioning system timing................................................................................................................. 9-139-13

Parameters for provisioning station clock output..................................................................................................... 9-179-17

Parameters for provisioning output port timing........................................................................................................ 9-209-20

10 Timing provisioning tasks

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-110-1

To view a list of NE timing ports................................................................................................................................... 10-210-2

To modify an NE timing port........................................................................................................................................... 10-310-3

To view a list of NE system timing sources............................................................................................................... 10-510-5

To modify an NE system timing source....................................................................................................................... 10-610-6

To modify NE system timing status details................................................................................................................ 10-710-7

To view a list of NE timing sources.............................................................................................................................. 10-910-9

To modify an NE timing source.................................................................................................................................... 10-1010-10

To view a list of station clock output timing sources.......................................................................................... 10-1210-12

To modify a station clock output timing source..................................................................................................... 10-1310-13

To modify NE station clock output timing status.................................................................................................. 10-1410-14

11 Traffic provisioning concepts

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 11-111-1

Contents

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

viii Alcatel-Lucent - ProprietarySee notice on first page

365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

SDH traffic provisioning concepts

Transmission plan................................................................................................................................................................... 11-211-2

Cross-connections................................................................................................................................................................... 11-311-3

VC-n concatenation............................................................................................................................................................... 11-811-8

Subnetwork Connection Protection (SNCP)............................................................................................................... 11-911-9

Multiplex Section Protection (MSP)............................................................................................................................ 11-1111-11

Cascaded SNC..................................................................................................................................................................... 11-1311-13

12 Traffic provisioning tasks

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 12-112-1

Provisioning of cross-connections

To view cross-connections.................................................................................................................................................. 12-212-2

To add an uncorrelated cross-connection..................................................................................................................... 12-512-5

To convert a cross-connection.......................................................................................................................................... 12-712-7

To delete a cross-connection............................................................................................................................................. 12-812-8

Provisioning of MSP protection groups

To view a list of MSP protection groups..................................................................................................................... 12-912-9

To add an MSP protection group.................................................................................................................................. 12-1112-11

To modify an MSP protection group........................................................................................................................... 12-1312-13

To delete an MSP protection group............................................................................................................................. 12-1412-14

To operate an MSP protection switch......................................................................................................................... 12-1512-15

Provisioning of SNC/Cascading/DNI protection groups

View a list of SNC/Cascading/DNI protection groups........................................................................................ 12-1612-16

Modify a protection group ............................................................................................................................................. 12-1812-18

13 Ethernet traffic provisioning concepts

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 13-113-1

TransLAN® Ethernet over SDH implementation...................................................................................................... 13-113-1

Virtual concatenation............................................................................................................................................................ 13-513-5

Ethernet port provisioning.................................................................................................................................................. 13-813-8

Contents

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


ix

TPID (Ethertype) translation......................................................................................................................................... 13-1213-12

Auto negotiation and flow control................................................................................................................................ 13-1313-13

Link pass through .............................................................................................................................................................. 13-1513-15

Link aggregation ................................................................................................................................................................. 13-1513-15

Quality of Service (QoS) overview.............................................................................................................................. 13-1613-16

Ethernet performance monitoring................................................................................................................................. 13-1813-18

14 Ethernet traffic provisioning tasks

Provisioning ethernet over SDH

To view spanning tree parameters................................................................................................................................. 14-114-1

To provision a virtual switch in spanning tree mode............................................................................................ 14-314-3

View layer 2 access control list...................................................................................................................................... 14-514-5

To define an ethernet service route for round trip delay measurements......................................................... 14-614-6

To delete an Ethernet service route.............................................................................................................................. 14-1014-10

View a list of Link Aggregation Groups (LAGs)................................................................................................. 14-1114-11

View the details of a Link Aggregation Group..................................................................................................... 14-1214-12

Add a Link Aggregation Group................................................................................................................................... 14-1314-13

Delete a Link Aggregation Group................................................................................................................................ 14-1514-15

15 Traffic maintenance concepts

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-115-1

Port types................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-115-1

Trail termination points (TTP).......................................................................................................................................... 15-515-5

16 Performance monitoring (PM) concepts

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 16-116-1

The performance monitoring process............................................................................................................................. 16-116-1

Performance measurements................................................................................................................................................ 16-316-3

Available PM data............................................................................................................................................................... 16-1016-10

Thresholding.......................................................................................................................................................................... 16-1516-15

Ethernet performance monitoring................................................................................................................................. 16-2116-21

Contents

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

x Alcatel-Lucent - ProprietarySee notice on first page

365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Configuration of the OMS............................................................................................................................................... 16-2716-27

Data storage and recovery................................................................................................................................................ 16-2816-28

17 Performance monitoring (PM) tasks

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 17-117-1

To enable/disable performance monitoring and history binning........................................................................ 17-217-2

To set PM counter thresholds........................................................................................................................................... 17-417-4

To view PM data.................................................................................................................................................................... 17-817-8

To define filter criteria for the presentation of PM information...................................................................... 17-1017-10

To modify traffic classes.................................................................................................................................................. 17-1217-12

To perform a one-time round trip delay measurement for test purposes..................................................... 17-1417-14

To start a cyclic round trip delay measurement...................................................................................................... 17-1617-16

18 Software and NE database management concepts

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 18-118-1

Functionality description..................................................................................................................................................... 18-118-1

Software upgrade.................................................................................................................................................................... 18-418-4

19 Software and NE database management tasks

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 19-119-1

Tasks related to NE generics

To view a list of NE generics stored on the management system.................................................................... 19-219-2

To add an NE generic to the management system................................................................................................... 19-319-3

To delete an NE generic from the management system........................................................................................ 19-419-4

To transfer an NE generic from the management system to an NE................................................................. 19-519-5

To schedule the transfer of an NE generic from the management system to an NE................................ 19-719-7

To view a list of in-progress transfers of NE generics.......................................................................................... 19-919-9

To abort an in-progress NE generic transfer............................................................................................................ 19-1019-10

To view a list of NE generics stored on an NE..................................................................................................... 19-1319-13

To activate an NE generic on an NE.......................................................................................................................... 19-1519-15

To schedule NE generic activation............................................................................................................................... 19-1819-18

Contents

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


xi

Tasks related to NE databases

To view a list of NE database versions stored on the management system............................................... 19-2119-21

To view a list of NE database versions stored on an NE................................................................................... 19-2319-23

To back up NE database versions onto the management system.................................................................... 19-2419-24

To schedule the backup of an NE database version onto the management system................................. 19-2919-29

To restore an NE database version from the management system to an NE............................................. 19-3119-31

Glossary

Index

Contents

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

xii Alcatel-Lucent - ProprietarySee notice on first page

365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

About this documentAbout this document

Purpose

This information product provides information specific to the 1655 Access MultiplexerUniversal network element managed with Optical Management System (OMS). It isdesigned to cover mainly the OMS tasks that are traditionally related to the elementmanagement level.

Safety information

This information product contains hazard statements for your safety. Hazard statementsare given at points where safety consequences to personnel, equipment, and operationmay exist. Failure to follow these statements may result in serious consequences.

Conventions used

These conventions are used in this document:

Numbering

The chapters of this document are numbered consecutively. The page numberingrestarts at “1” in each chapter. To facilitate identifying pages in different chapters, thepage numbers are prefixed with the chapter number. For example, page 2-3 is the thirdpage in chapter 2.

Cross-references

Cross-reference conventions and numbering conventions are identical. The first numberin a reference to a particular page refers to the corresponding chapter.

Keyword blocks

This document contains so-called keyword blocks to facilitate the location of specifictext passages. The keyword blocks are placed to the left of the main text and indicatethe contents of a paragraph or group of paragraphs.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


xiii

Typographical conventions

Special typographical conventions apply to elements of the graphical user interface(GUI), file names and system path information, keyboard entries, alarm messages, andso on

• Examples of text that appears on a graphical user interface (GUI), such as menuoptions, window titles or push buttons:

– Provision , Delete , Apply , Close , OK (push-button)

– Provision Timing/Sync (window title)

– View Equipment Details (menu option)

– Administration → Security → User Provisioning (path for invoking awindow)

• Examples for file names and system path information:

– console

– /usr/local/bin/

• Examples for keyboard entries:

– F1, Esc X , Alt-F , Ctrl-D , Ctrl-Alt-Del (simple keyboard entries)A hyphen between two keys means that both keys have to be pressedsimultaneously. Otherwise, press a single key or a number of keys in sequence.

Abbreviations

Abbreviations used in this document can be found in the “Glossary” unless it can beassumed that the reader is familiar with the abbreviation.

Orientation aids

This document contains the following orientation aids:

• Overall TOC

• Chapter TOCs

• Index

The following graphic depicts the principle structure of this document:

Overall TOC

Chapter TOC

Index

About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

xiv Alcatel-Lucent - ProprietarySee notice on first page

365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Overall TOC

The overall table of contents (TOC) provides a structural overview of the entiredocument. It lists the content of each chapter and the associated page number wherethe respective information can be found.

The overall table of contents can be found after the legal page, before the “About thisinformation product” preface.

Chapter TOCs

Each chapter contains a table of contents (TOC) in its “Overview” section. The scopeof each chapter TOC is limited to the corresponding chapter. As in the overall TOC,page numbers indicate where the respective information can be found.

Index

This manual also contains an alphabetical index, which can be found at the end of thedocument, after the “Glossary”.

The index helps users to find specific information quickly by providing an alphabeticallist of key words with associated page numbers.

Related information

The manuals related to 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal are shown in the followingtable:

Document title Document code

1655 Access Multiplexer Universal Applications and Planning Guide

Presents a detailed overview of the system, describes its applications, givesplanning requirements, engineering rules, ordering information, andtechnical specifications.

365-312-847R5.0 (109663724)

1655 Access Multiplexer Universal User Operations Guide

Provides step-by-step information for use in daily system operations. Themanual demonstrates how to perform system provisioning, operations, andadministrative tasks by use of ITM-CIT.

365-312-850R5.0 (109663765)

1655 Access Multiplexer Universal Alarm Messages and Trouble ClearingGuide

Gives detailed information on each possible alarm message. Furthermore, itprovides procedures for routine maintenance, troubleshooting, diagnostics,and component replacement.

365-312-849R5.0 (109663716)

1655 Access Multiplexer Universal Installation Guide

A step-by-step guide to system installation and setup. It also includesinformation needed for pre-installation site planning and post-installationacceptance testing.

365-312-848R5.0 (109663757)

Documentation CD-ROM 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal(all manualson a CD-ROM)

365-312-853R5.0 (109663708)

The documentation set related to OMS is shown in the following table:

About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


xv

Document title Document code

OMS Getting Started Guide

Instructs new users how to use OMS. This document contains a glossary ofterms.

365-315-145R6.3.2

OMS Connection Management Guide

Instructs users how to use OMS to provision and manage networkconnections.

365-315-150R6.3.2

OMS Network Element Management Guide

Instructs users how to use OMS to provision and manage networkelements.

365-315-146R6.3.2

OMS Ethernet Management Guide

Instructs users on how to use the Ethernet Management feature to provisionand manage Ethernet connections in a network.

365-315-147R6.3.2

OMS Service Assurance Guide

Instructs users on how to manage and interpret fault information collectedfrom the network.

365-315-148R6.3.2

OMS Administration Guide

Instructs users on how to administer and maintain OMS and the network.

365-315-149R6.3.2

In addition, it is highly recommended to consult the TransLAN® Ethernet SDHTransport Solution Applications and Planning Guide,365-377-002 (109608364) whenplanning to use 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal for Ethernet applications.

Document support

The document support telephone numbers are:

• 1 630 713 5000 (for all countries)

• 1 888 727 3615 (for the continental United States)

Technical support

For technical support, contact your local customer support team. Reach themvia theweb (https://support.lucent.com/) or the telephone number listed under theTechnicalAssistance Center menu(http://www.lucent.com/contact/).

How to order

The order number of this document is 365-312-854R5.0

How to comment

To comment on this information product, go to theOnline Comment Form(http://www.lucent-info.com/comments/enus/) or e-mail your comments to theComments Hotline ([email protected]).

About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

xvi Alcatel-Lucent - ProprietarySee notice on first page

365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

https://support.lucent.com/



http://www.lucent.com/contact/



http://www.lucent-info.com/comments/enus/

http://www.lucent-info.com/comments/enus/

1 1Safety

Overview

Purpose

The aim of this chapter on safety is to provide users of 1655 Access MultiplexerUniversal systems with the basic safety information.

Potential sources of danger

The 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal equipment has been developed in line with thepresent state-of-the-art and fulfils the current national and international safetyrequirements. It is provided with a high degree of operational safety resulting frommany years of development experience and continuous stringent quality checks in ourcompany.

The equipment is safe in normal operation. There are, however, some potential sourcesof danger that cannot be completely eliminated. In particular, these arise during the:

• Opening of housings or equipment covers

• Manipulation of any kind within the equipment, even if it has been disconnectedfrom the power supply

• Disconnection of optical or electrical connections

through possible contact with the following:

• Live parts

• Laser light

• Hot surfaces

• Sharp edges

Contents

General notes on safety 1-3

Structure of hazard statements 1-3

Symbols used in hazard statements 1-4

Basic safety aspects 1-5

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


1-1

Specific safety areas 1-8

Laser safety 1-8

Electrostatic discharge 1-11

Safety Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1-2 Alcatel-Lucent - ProprietarySee notice on first page

365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

General notes on safety

Structure of hazard statements

Overview

Hazard statements describe the safety risks relevant while performing tasks onAlcatel-Lucent products during deployment and/or use. Failure to avoid the hazardsmay have serious consequences.

General structure

Hazard statements include the following structural elements:

Item Structure element Purpose

1 Personal-injury symbol Indicates the potential for personal injury(optional)

2 Hazard-type symbol Indicates hazard type (optional)

3 Signal word Indicates the severity of the hazard

4 Hazard type Describes the source of the risk of damage orinjury

5 Damage statement Consequences if protective measures fail

6 Avoidance message Protective measures to take to avoid the hazard

7 Identifier The reference ID of the hazard statement(optional)

Safety General notes on safetyStructure of hazard statements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


1-3

Signal words

The signal words identify the hazard severity levels as follows:

Signal word Meaning

DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation (high risk) which, ifnot avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation (medium risk) which,if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION When used with the personal injury symbol:

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation (low risk) which, ifnot avoided, may result in personal injury.

When used without the personal injury symbol:

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation (low risk) which, ifnot avoided, may result in property damage, such as serviceinterruption or damage to equipment or other materials.

Symbols used in hazard statements

Symbol table

The following symbols are defined for hazard statements:

1

2 3 4 5 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15

16 17 18 19 20 21 22

6

Safety General notes on safetyStructure of hazard statements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Legend:

1 Personal injury symbol 12 Heavy overhead load

2 Electric shock 13 Noxious substance

3 Hazard of laser radiation 14 Explosion hazard

4 Components sensitive to electrostaticdischarge (ESD)

15 Falling object hazard

5 Electromagnetic radiation 16 Risk of suffocation

6 Flammable material / risk of fire 17 Pinch hazard

7 Service disruption hazard 18 Lifting hazard, heavy object

8 Laceration hazard 19 Inhalation hazard

9 Corrosive substance 20 Slip hazard

10 Hazard caused by batteries 21 Trip hazard

11 Hot surface 22 Hazard of falling

Basic safety aspects

General safety requirements

In order to keep the technically unavoidable residual risk to a minimum, it isimperative to observe the following rules:

• Transport, storage and operation of the system must be under thepermissibleconditions only.See accompanying documentation and information on the system.

• Installation, configuration, and disassembly must be carried out only byexpertpersonnelandwith reference to the respective documentation.Due to the complexity of the system, the personnel requirespecial training.

• The system must be operated byexpert and authorized users only.The user must operate the system only after havingread and understoodthischapter on safety and the parts of the documentation relevant to operation. Forcomplex systems, additional training is recommended. Any obligatory training foroperating and service personnel must be carried out and documented.

• The system must not be operated unless it is in perfect working order.Any faults and errors that might affect safety must be reportedimmediatelyby theuser to a person in responsibility.

• The system must be operated only with the connections and under theenvironmental conditions as described in the documentation.

Safety General notes on safetySymbols used in hazard statements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


1-5

• Any conversions or changes to the system or parts of the system (including thesoftware) must be carried out by qualified Alcatel-Lucent personnel or by expertpersonnel authorized by Alcatel-Lucent.All changes carried out by other persons lead to acomplete exemption fromliability .No components/spare parts must be used other than those recommended by themanufacturer and those listed in the procurement documents.

• The removal or disabling of safety facilities, the clearing of faults and errors, andthe maintenance of the equipment must be carried out byspecially qualifiedpersonnel only.The respective parts of the documentation must be strictly observed. Thedocumentation must also be consulted during the selection of measuring and testequipment.

• Calibrations, special tests after repairs, and regular safety checks must be carriedout, documented, and archived.

• Non-system software is used at one’sown risk. The use/installation of non-systemsoftware can adversely affect the normal functioning of the system.

• Only usetested and virus-freedata carriers (CD, DVD, floppy disks, streamertapes,).

Summary of important safety instructions

Especially observe the following safety instructions, they are of particular importancefor 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal systems:

• This equipment is to be installed only inRestricted Access Areasin business andcustomer premises.Applications in accordance with Articles 110-16, 110-17 and 110-18 of the NationalElectrical Code, ANSI/NFPA No. 70. Other installations exempt from theenforcement of the National Electrical Code may be engineered according to theaccepted practices of the local telecommunications utility.

• This product should only be operated from the type of power source indicated onthe marking label.

• This equipment must be provided with a readily accessible disconnect device aspart of the building installation.

• Installation must include an independent frame ground drop to the building ground.Refer to the1655 Access Multiplexer Universal Installation Guide.

• For information on proper mounting instructions, consult the1655 AccessMultiplexer Universal Installation Guide.

• Install only equipment identified in the1655 Access Multiplexer UniversalInstallation Guideprovided with this product. Use of other equipment may result inimproper connection of circuitry leading to fire or injury to persons.

• To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not disassemble this product. Installationand service should be performed by trained personnel only. Opening or removingcovers and/or circuit boards may expose you to dangerous voltages or other risks.Incorrect re-assembly can cause electrical shock when the unit is subsequentlyused.

Safety General notes on safetyBasic safety aspects

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

• Slots and openings in this product are provided for ventilation. To protect theproduct from overheating, these openings must not be blocked or covered. Thisproduct should not be placed in a built-in installation unless proper ventilation isprovided.

• Never push objects of any kind into this product through slots as they may touchdangerous voltage points or short-cut parts that could result in a risk of fire orelectrical shock. Never spill liquids of any kind on the product.

Safety General notes on safetyBasic safety aspects

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


1-7

Specific safety areas

Overview

Purpose

The aspects of “laser safety” and “handling of components sensitive to electrostaticdischarge (ESD)” are of vital importance for the 1655 Access Multiplexer Universalequipment. Therefore, the key safety instructions for these subjects are summarized inthe following.

Contents

Laser safety 1-8

Electrostatic discharge 1-11

Laser safety

Basics

Optical fiber telecommunication systems, their associated test sets, and similaroperating systems use semiconductor laser transmitters that emit infrared (IR) light atwavelengths between approximately 800 nanometers and 1600 nanometers. The emittedlight is above the red end of the visible spectrum, which is normally not visible to thehuman eye. Although radiant energy at near-IR wavelengths is officially designatedinvisible, some people can see the shorter wavelength energy even at power levelsseveral orders of magnitude below any that have been shown to cause injury to theeye.

Conventional lasers can produce an intense beam of monochromatic light. The termmonochromaticity means a single wavelength output of pure color that may be visibleor invisible to the eye. A conventional laser produces a small-size beam of light, andbecause the beam size is small the power density (also called irradiance) is very high.Consequently, lasers and laser products are subject to federal and applicable stateregulations as well as international standards for their safe operation.

A conventional laser beam expands very little over distance, or is said to be very wellcollimated. Thus, conventional laser irradiance remains relatively constant overdistance. However, lasers used in lightwave systems have a large beam divergence,typically 10 to 20 degrees. Here, irradiance obeys the inverse square law (doubling thedistance reduces the irradiance by a factor of 4) and rapidly decreases over distance.

Safety Specific safety areasOverview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

System design

The 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal system complies with the Food and DrugAdministration’s Center for Devices and Radiological Health (FDA/CDRH) regulationsFDA/CDRH 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 as a Class I and with IEC 60825-1 as aClass 1 Optical Fiber Telecommunication laser product.

The system has been designed to ensure that the operating personnel is not endangeredby laser radiation during normal system operation. The safety measures specified in theFDA/CDRH regulations and the international standards IEC 60825 and DIN/EN 60825respectively are met.

Optical safety declaration (if laser modules used)

Alcatel-Lucent declares that this product is compliant with all essential safetyrequirements as stated in IEC 60825-Part 1 and 2 “Safety of laser products” and“Safety of optical fibre telecommunication systems”. Futhermore Alcatel-Lucentdeclares that the warning statements on labels on this equipment are in accordancewith the specified laser radiation class.

Laser safety precautions for optical fiber telecommunication systems

In its normal operating mode, an optical fiber telecommunication system is totallyenclosed and presents no risk of eye injury. It is a class I/1 system under the FDA andIEC classifications.

The fiber optic cables that interconnect various components of an optical fibertelecommunication system can disconnect or break, and may expose people to laseremissions. Also, certain measures and maintenance procedures may expose thetechnician to emission from the semiconductor laser during installation and servicing.Unlike more familiar laser devices such as solid-state and gas lasers, the emissionpattern of a semiconductor laser results in a highly divergent beam. In a divergentbeam, the irradiance (power density) decreases rapidly with distance. The greater thedistance, the less energy will enter the eye, and the less potential risk for eye injury.Inadvertently viewing an un-terminated fiber or damaged fiber with the unaided eye atdistances greater than 130 to 160 mm (5 to 6 in) normally will not cause eye injury,provided the power in the fiber is less than a few milliwatts at the near IR wavelengthsand a few tens of milliwatts at the far IR wavelengths. However, damage may occur ifan optical instrument such as a microscope, magnifying glass, or eye loupe is used tostare at the energized fiber end.

Safety Specific safety areasLaser safety

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


1-9

CAUTION

Laser hazard

Use of controls, adjustments, and procedures other than those specified herein mayresult in hazardous laser radiation exposure.

Laser safety precautions for enclosed systems

Under normal operating conditions, optical fiber telecommunication systems arecompletely enclosed; nonetheless, the following precautions shall be observed:

1. Because of the potential for eye damage, technicians should not stare into opticalconnectors or broken fibers

2. Under no circumstance shall laser/fiber optic operations be performed by atechnician before satisfactorily completing an approved training course

3. Since viewing laser emissions directly in excess of class I/1 limits with an opticalinstrument such as an eye loupe greatly increases the risk of eye damage,appropriate labels must appear in plain view, in close proximity to the optical porton the protective housing/access panel of the terminal equipment.

Laser safety precautions for unenclosed systems

During service, maintenance, or restoration, an optical fiber telecommunication systemis considered unenclosed. Under these conditions, follow these practices:

1. Only authorized, trained personnel shall be permitted to do service, maintenanceand restoration. Avoid exposing the eye to emissions from unterminated, energizedoptical connectors at close distances. Laser modules associated with the opticalports of laser circuit packs are typically recessed, which limits the exposuredistance. Optical port shutters, automatic power reduction (APR), and automaticpower shut down (APSD) are engineering controls that are also used to limit theemissions. However, technicians removing or replacing laser circuit packs shouldnot stare or look directly into the optical port with optical instruments ormagnifying lenses. (Normal eyewear or indirect viewing instruments such asFind-R-Scopes are not considered magnifying lenses or optical instruments).

2. Only authorized, trained personnel shall use optical test equipment duringinstallation or servicing since this equipment contains semiconductor lasers. (Someexamples of optical test equipment are optical time domain reflectometers(OTDRs), hand-held loss test sets).

3. Under no circumstances shall any personnel scan a fiber with an optical test setwithout verifying that all laser sources on the fiber are turned off.

4. All unauthorized personnel shall be excluded from the immediate area of theoptical fiber telecommunication systems during installation and service.

Consult ANSI Z136.2 American National Standard for Safe Use of Lasers in the U.S.or outside the U.S., IEC-60825, Part 2 for guidance on the safe use of optical fiberoptic communication systems in the workplace.

Safety Specific safety areasLaser safety

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Electrostatic discharge

Introduction

Electrostatic discharge (ESD), caused by touching with the hand for example, candestroy semiconductor components. The correct operation of the complete system isthen no longer assured.

Industry experience has shown thatall semiconductor components can be damaged bystatic electricity that builds up on work surfaces and personnel. The electrostaticdischarge can also affect the components indirectly via contacts or conductor tracks.The electrostatic charges are produced by various charging effects of movement andcontact with other objects. Dry air allows greater static charges to accumulate. Higherpotentials are measured in areas with low relative humidity, but potentials high enoughto cause damage can occur anywhere.

The barred-hand symbol

Circuit packs containing components that are especially sensitive to electrostaticdischarge are identified by warning labels bearing the barred-hand symbol.

ESD instructions

Observe the following ESD instructions to avoid damage to electrostatic-sensitivecomponents:

• Wear working garment made of 100% cotton to avoid electrostatic charging.

• Touch the circuit packs at the edges or the insertion and removal facilities only.

• Ensure that the rack is grounded.

• Wear conductively connected wrist straps and connect them to the rack ESPbonding point.

• Work in an area which is protected against electrostatic discharge. Use conductingfloor and bench mats which are conductively connected to the rack ESP bondingpoint.

• Conductively connect all test equipment and trolleys to the rack ESP bonding point.

• Store and ship circuit packs and components in their shipping packing. Circuitpacks and components must be packed and unpacked only at workplaces suitablyprotected against build-up of charge.

• Whenever possible, maintain the relative humidity of air above 20%.

Safety Specific safety areasElectrostatic discharge

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


1-11

2 2Security administrationtasks

Overview

Purpose

This chapter informs how to perform the most common tasks related to securityadministration.

Contents

To view a list of ITM-CIT accesses 2-2

To log out ITM-CIT user(s) 2-3

To view a list of ITM-CIT access control profiles 2-4

To modify ITM-CIT access control profile(s) 2-5

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


2-1

To view a list of ITM-CIT accesses

When to use

Use this task to view a list of ITM-CIT accesses, that is, a list of ITM-CITs that arelogged into the NE.

Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Do one of the following:

• Use the object links to follow this path:Network Elements → NE ManagementFunctions .

• On the Network Map, right-click the NE upon which you wish to execute amanagement function. From theNode menu, selectSession → NE ManagementFunctions .

Result: The NE Management Functions page is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:

1. In theNE type field, select a type of NE (if not already present).

2. In theNE name field, select the name of the target NE (if not already present).

3. In theCategory field, selectUsers .

4. In theFunction field, selectRetrieve CIT Access List .

5. Click Go.

Result: The CIT Accesses page is displayed. It includes a list of ITM-CITs thatare logged into the NE.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Security administration tasks To view a list of ITM-CIT accesses

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

To log out ITM-CIT user(s)

When to use

Use this task to log out one or more users who are logged into a ITM-CIT.

Important! Forcing a logout will terminate the selected session and may interruptanother user’s work.

Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:




4. In theFunction field, selectRetrieve CIT Access List .

5. Click Go.

Result: The CIT Accesses page is displayed. It includes a list of ITM-CITs thatare logged into the NE.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click one or more radio buttons next to the ITM-CITs you wish to log out of the NE.From theGo menu, selectForce Logout and clickGo.

Result: The CIT user is logged out of the NE.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Security administration tasks To log out ITM-CIT user(s)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


2-3

To view a list of ITM-CIT access control profiles

When to use

Use this task to view a list of ITM-CIT access control profiles.

Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:




4. In theFunction field, selectRetrieve/Set CIT Access Control Info .

5. Click Go.

Result: The CIT Access Control Profiles page is displayed. It includes a list ofITM-CIT access control profiles.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Security administration tasks To view a list of ITM-CIT access control profiles

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

To modify ITM-CIT access control profile(s)

When to use

Use this task to modify ITM-CIT access control profile(s).

Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:




4. In theFunction field, selectRetrieve/Set CIT Access Control Info .

5. Click Go.

Result: The CIT Access Control Profiles page is displayed. It includes a list ofITM-CIT access control profiles.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click the radio button next to the ITM-CIT access control profile you wish to modify.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 From theGo menu, selectModify selected , or Modify all and clickGo.

Result: The Cit Access Control Profile parameters page is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Change the entries or selections for any modifiable fields that you wish to update.

The page contains three sections, one for each ITM-CIT user role. The user roles aredefined as shown in the following table:

Capability Description

Admin The user can perform all ITM-CIT administrationtasks and configure a network element.

Security administration tasks To modify ITM-CIT access control profile(s)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


2-5

Capability Description

Config The user can perform all transmission related tasksand retrieve and edit all network element relateddata.

View The user can only view the network elementconfiguration, but cannot alter it.

Each section contains the following parameters:

• Lock-out state – indicates whether a ITM-CIT can connect to the networkelement. Possible values are:

– No request: no change to existing lock-out state.

– Locked: a ITM-CIT cannot connect to the NE.

– Not Locked: a ITM-CIT can connect to the NE.

• Password – enter the password for the capability in question. The password mustconsist of at least six characters, it must contain at least two alphabetic, and at leasttwo numeric characters. The maximum length is eight characters.

• Password confirm – repeat the password for the capability in question.

• Clear password – select this option to clear the current password for the capabilityin question.

• Inactivity timer – enter the time threshold (length of time, in seconds) for theinactivity timer. When a period of inactivity between the NE and ITM-CIT reachesthe threshold, the connection to the ITM-CIT is dropped. Possible values are 0 to60 seconds. If zero is entered, the inactivity timer is disabled, that means the userwill never be logged out.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click Submit .

Result: If you have selectedModify Selected , the selected ITM-CIT access controlprofile is modified.

If you have selectedModify All , all ITM-CIT access control profiles are modified.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Security administration tasks To modify ITM-CIT access control profile(s)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

3 3Managementcommunication setupconcepts

Overview

Purpose

This chapter presents concept information related to management communication setupon 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal network elements using OMS.

Contents

Basic DCN principles 3-2

DCN configurations 3-4

DCN addresses 3-7

NSAP address structure 3-8

Data communication channels (DCC) 3-10

Dual stack with tunneling (DSwT) 3-13

DSwT tunnel auto provisioning (TAP) 3-17

DSwT connecting areas with manual TAP tunnels 3-18

Partition repair 3-19

Partition repair guidelines 3-20

OMS-to-NE connections concepts 3-22

Auto-discovery concepts (subnetworks) 3-24

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


3-1

Basic DCN principles

Purpose

A Data Communication Network (DCN)is used for the exchange of management data.This section provides an overview of the data communication network and describesthe type of communication between the nodes in the network and the protocols used.

SDH management network

The SDH management network is an overlay of the transmission network. Themanagement system (for example OMS) and the network elements (NEs) together arethe nodes of this network. The 10/100BASE-T interface andData CommunicationChannel (DCC)provide the physical connection between the nodes.

DCN physical components

The figure below illustrates a data communication network (DCN) as defined by theOpen Systems Interconnection (OSI) model. This figure refers to the physicalcomponents and connections in the DCN. It does not give information about the logicalconfiguration of the DCN.

The figure shows three LANs and a number of DCC channels in an SDH transmissionnetwork with point-to-point configuration and two rings connected to a managementsystem, for example OMS. The management system is connected to the transmissionnetwork viaGateway Network Elements (GNE)by the LAN. The network elements areconnected to each other by DCC channels.

Management communication setup concepts Basic DCN principles

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Local Communications Network (LCN)

In the case where there is no DCC connectivity between nodes, aLocalCommunications Network (LCN)can be used to connect the nodes to each other. Seethe LCN on the right side of the figure.

DCN communication protocols

Communication protocols used in the Data Communication Network (DCN) betweenthe nodes include:

• Ethernet (on the 10BASE-T) LAPD (on the DCC channels)

• OSI network protocol (DCN wide)

The OSI network protocol (OSI-DCN) is used for routing management data betweennodes in the DCN.

ISO-OSI network protocol

The network protocol used between nodes is the ISO-OSI network protocol (ISO/IEC8648). According to this protocol a node in the network can behave as an end system(ES) or as an Intermediate System (IS), sometimes called a router.

End Systems (ES)

Nodes behaving asEnd Systems (ES)perform no forwarding of data packets. Theycommunicate with each other on an end-to-end basis via intermediate systems.

Intermediate Systems (IS)

Intermediate Systems (IS)are used for routing data between nodes and (sub) networks.The End System to Intermediate System (ES-IS)protocol is responsible for theexchange of data between an end system and intermediate system. A network elementcan act both as an end system as well as an intermediate system. However, an OMS,for example, can only act as end system.

IS-IS protocol

The Intermediate System to Intermediate System (IS-IS)protocol is used betweenintermediate systems in the DCN. The IS-IS protocol maintains theIS RoutingInformation Base (RIB). The information in this information base is used for therouting of management data packets in the DCN by the intermediate systems.

Routing Information Base and LSPs

Each RIB comprises a number of tables. These tables contain information onNetworkService Access Point (NSAP)addresses of nodes in the network and ports of the ISthrough which these nodes can be reached. Intermediate systems exchange routinginformation regularly with one another as part of the IS-IS protocol by the use ofLinkState Protocol Data (LSP)units.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


3-3

The LSPs contain the information on the NSAP addresses of nodes used in the tablesof the RIBs.

DCN configurations

Hierarchical routing

Hierarchical routing is used for large networks when the number of NSAP entries inthe RIB databases of the intermediate systems is too large. When this happens, itcauses an exponential increase of exchanged LSPs between intermediate systems. Thisin turn causes the performance of the DCN to decrease due to the computation of theshortest path first algorithm.

Hierarchical routing definition

In hierarchical routing, the DCN addressing domain is divided into a number of areas.Each area is assigned a unique identifier. The value of the area identifier of eachnode’s NSAP address is set according to the area the node is part of.

Level 1, level 2 definition

Each area contains a number of:

• End systems

• First level (level 1) intermediate systems

• Second level (level 2) intermediate systems

Level 1 intermediate systems provide interconnectivity between nodes within the samearea. Level 2 intermediate systems provide interconnectivity between nodes belongingto different areas.

Level 2 subdomain

The complete set of level 2 intermediate systems is also referred to as the level 2subdomain. All areas in a network are connected via the level 2 subdomain.

Area-divisioning of a DCN

Partitioning is configuration of the DCN in such a way that the exchange of LSPsbetween intermediate systems is limited.

When networks are partitioned into areas, the RIB database(s) in the systems are muchsmaller and hence the routing overhead is significantly reduced. Intermediate systemsin an area only exchange information (LSPs) on nodes with other systems in their ownarea. Information on other areas is exchanged by level 2 intermediate systems only andmaintained by the level 2 intermediate systems of the area.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

In this way, the data management load in the network is strongly reduced, whilekeeping the dynamic re-routing capabilities of intermediate systems in case of failuresintact. It is important to notice that although the DCN is divided into areas, ES-EScommunication between all nodes in the DCN is still possible.

The figure below illustrates how a network can be partitioned into areas, connected bylevel 2 intermediate systems. Each area has at least one level 2 intermediate systemassigned and can have a number of level 1 intermediate systems and end systems.

Routing management data

The following scenario describes routing management data in a divisioned network.Suppose a node A wants to send messages to another node. If this node is in its ownarea (determined by the area ID part in the area address field), the messages from A tothis particular node (B) are routed directly using the level 1 intermediate system (seeprevious figure).

Alternatively, if the required destination is in a different area (C), the messages are sentto a second, higher level (level 2) intermediate system. This intermediate system routesthe messages coming from node A to other level 2 intermediate systems until theyreach a level 2 intermediate system attached to the destination area of C. From there itis routed within the area using level 1 intermediate systems to node C.

Notice that in both of the above cases the ES-ES communication between nodes in thesame or in different areas is still possible.

OSI-DCN networks types

In general, the OSI-DCN network can be classified in three types:

• Undivided

• IS-IS clustered

• IS-IS area divided network

ES

Level 1 IS

Level 2 IS

Level 2 subdomain

A

B

C

Area 4

Area 3

Area 2

Area 1

Management communication setup concepts DCN configurations

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


3-5

Undivided network definition

An undivided network consists of a single routing domain. There is no divisionbetween the nodes at the network protocol level. All nodes in the network andespecially the intermediate systems can exchange routing information with each other.Although a network element can only be managed by one OMS at a time, the IS-ISprotocol is running between all nodes in the network. This leads to the exchange ofLSPs between all intermediate systems of the network.

IS-IS clustered DCN

In order to avoid the decrease of performance, the exchange of LSPs over a certainport can be disabled in some nodes. A node can exchange LSPs over its DCC or LAN(10BASE-T) ports. The exchange of LSPs over the DCC channel can be disabled.However, this also prevents the exchange of management data over this port andprevents the use of this DCC port for re-routing in case of a failure of another port.

Disabling exchange of LSPs

Another option is to disable the exchange of LSPs over the LAN (10BASE-T) port.This can be done by choosing the IS to have a NO-IS-IS port. This node is alsoreferred to as a NO-IS-IS (gateway) node. If this is done for all intermediate systemson a LAN, the LAN becomes a NO-IS-IS LAN. In NO-IS-IS LANs, the IS-IS protocolis not run on the 10BASE-T. This prevents the exchange of LSPs between intermediatesystems on a 10BASE-T. This results in a network which comprises several clusters ofnodes. Between the clusters there is no IS-IS traffic.

LCN

ManagementSystem

ManagementSystem

RemoteCluster

ManagementSystem

LCN


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

ES-ES communication

Within a cluster the ES-ES, ES-IS and IS-IS communication is still possible. There ishowever no communication possible between nodes in different clusters. For example aITM-CIT can be connected to a node in a cluster for maintenance activities on nodeswithin a cluster. However, it is then not possible to do a remote login from this node toa node of another cluster.

Management system connections

The management system connected to the 10BASE-T can still communicate with allnodes in the clusters since the ES-IS protocol on the 10BASE-T is not disabled.Important to notice is that the nodes in a remote cluster lose their association with themanagement system when NO-IS-IS is chosen on the gateway node of the remotecluster. It is advised to connect the management system to the 10BASE-T that connectsthe clusters to each other and to assign NO-IS-IS only to nodes on this LAN.

IS-IS area divided DCN

The division of the DCN in areas by introducing level 2 intermediate systems issimilar to disabling the IS-IS protocol over the 10BASE-T port of nodes, as describedearlier.

Similar to clustering, the exchange of level 1 LSPs between intermediate systems indifferent areas is prevented. However, level 2 LSPs are still exchanged between level 2intermediate systems.

DCN addresses

DCN addresses

The system has two addresses in the DCN:

• Ethernet address

• NSAP address

Ethernet address

The Ethernet addressis the unique 6-byte address of a network element. Sometimes itis also referred to as the hardware or physical address of the node. The Ethernetaddress has only local meaning on the LAN and cannot be used for routing purposes.It does not contain the information on where the node is in the data communicationsnetwork.

NSAP address

The Network Service Access Point (NSAP)address is used by the network protocol forlocation information. The NSAP address of a node is its DCN wide identifier whichuniquely identifies the node in the network.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


3-7

NSAP address structure

Background

The following three NSAP structures can be distinguished:

• ISO DCC NSAP address format (fixed 20-byte address structure). This format isused by most Alcatel-Lucent network element types in the network.

• Local Alcatel-Lucent NSAP address format (fixed 10-byte address structure). Thisformat is also used by a number of Alcatel-Lucent network element types.

• Flexible NSAP address structure. An alternative to the previous two formats.

Although different NSAP address formats exist, preferably all nodes in a networkshould use the same address format.

1655 Access Multiplexer Universal supports the ISO DCC NSAP address format (fixed20-byte address structure), the local Alcatel-Lucent NSAP address format (fixed10-byte address structure), and the flexible address structure.

Fixed 20-byte address structure

The fixed 20-byte address structure (ISO DCC NSAP address format, in accordancewith ISO 8348) is shown in the following figure:

Address fields

The meaning of the NSAP address fields is described in the following table:

Field Meaning Description

Initial domain part (IDP):

AFI Authority and format identifier specifying theNSAP address format.

The predefined value is 0x39 (hex.), indicating thatthe ISO Data Country Code (ISO-DCC) is theaddress format.

IDI Initial domain identifier specifying the countrycode. The designation “IDI+pad” indicates that thefield is padded to its maximum length

The predefined value is 0x0000 (hex.).

Domain specific part (DSP):

1 Byte

AFI Area

2 Bytes

System ID

6 Bytes 1 Byte

SEL

DSP

20 Bytes

IDP

IDI(+pad)

2 Bytes 1 Byte

DFIOrganization/

Operator

3 Bytes

Spare

2 Bytes

RD

2 Bytes

Management communication setup concepts NSAP address structure

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


DFI DSP format identifier specifying the DSP format. The predefined value is 0x80 (hex.).

Operator Organization or operator identifier representing thenetwork service provider (NSP).


Spare Reserved portion of the NSAP. The predefined value is 0x0000 (hex.).

RD Routing domain. The predefined value is 0x0000 (hex.).

Area Area identifier indicating the routing area to whicha node belongs.


System ID System identifier representing the node. The IEEE802.3 MAC address.

A IEEE-MAC number is reserved and physicallystored on every NE.

SEL Selector field used to direct the protocol data units(PDU) to the correct destination.


Fixed 10-byte address structure

The fixed 10-byte address structure (local Alcatel-Lucent NSAP address format) isshown in the following figure:

Address fields

The meaning of the NSAP address fields is described in the following table:




Area Area identifier indicating the routing area to whicha node belongs.






Flexible NSAP address structure

The flexible NSAP address format is shown in the following figure:

1 Byte

AFI Area

2 Bytes

System ID

6 Bytes 1 Byte

SEL

10 Bytes


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


3-9

Address fields

The flexible NSAP address has the following fields:




Flexible part May vary from 0 bytes to 12 bytes.





In this way, the length of the flexible NSAP address can vary from 8 bytes to 20 bytes.

Data communication channels (DCC)

Data communication channels (DCC)

The Data Communication Channels (DCC)are part of the Data CommunicationNetwork (DCN). The channels are used to exchange management data between themanagement system and the network elements. The channels are also used forcommunication between the different network elements (for example remote logins).The DCC connection is achieved by means of layer 2 protocol High Level Data LinkControl (HDLC) Frame bridging (at the data link layer level). HDLC Frame bridgingalways applies to two ports (labeled TTP1 and TTP2); more than two ports (that is,broadcasting) is not supported. The DCC connection is implemented via Layerbridging.

DCC channel selection

The following DCC channels exist on an STM-n connection:

• DCC bytes of the RSOH (bytes D1-D3) termed RS-DCC.

• DCC bytes of the MSOH (bytes D4-D12) termed MS-DCC.

1 Byte

AFI Flexible Part

0 to 12 Bytes

System ID

6 Bytes 1 Byte

SEL

Node Address

8 to 20 Bytes

Area Address

1 to 13 Bytes


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Transparent DCC cross-connections

The transparent DCC cross-connectfeature allows to transparently pass-through certainDCC channels which cannot or should not be processed by the system.

Transparent DCC cross-connections are to be used when there is a router on one sideof the SDH/SONET network which uses the DCC to transport some IP-based protocolto a router on the other side of the network. This feature can be used to avoidinterworking with equipment from a different vendor in a common routing domain.

The transparent DCC cross-connection path is transparent. This means that noprocessing at all will be done as the data travels along the path. Therefore, the entiretransparent DCC cross-connection path counts as a single hop for the network elementsat the ends of the path.

The transparent DCC cross-connections are completely independent from thetransmission cross-connections. There is no relation between the number of “normal”(terminated) DCC channels and the number of transparent DCC channels. They aretaken from different pools.

Therefore, enabling a “normal” (terminated) DCC channel does not reduce the numberof available transparent DCC channels, and vice versa.

For each DCC channel, transparent DCC cross-connection and traditional DCCprocessing are mutually exclusive.

Functional requirements

The following are the functional requirements of the transparent DCC channels:

• The system can support a maximum of 8 (20) bi-directional connections fortransparent DCC. Each of the defined bi-directional connection can support atransparent link for the DCC-RS or DCC-MS or both DCC channels associatedwith a single STM-N interface. It maybe noted that the number 8 (20) is based ona combination of the MI-14/4 (MI-16/4) unit and the SI-14/8 unit.

• It is possible to use transparent DCC cross-connections for RS-DCC and MS-DCC.

Establishing transparent DCC cross-connections

Transparent DCC cross-connections are to be established by identification of the twoports of an NE that are to be cross-connected and the DCC type (RS-DCC orMS-DCC).

LAPD protocol

The LAPD protocol, which controls communication between the network elements,operates in either of the following modes:

• Network sideThe LAPD is assigned as network. This mode complies with the standards andinteroperates successfully with other LAPDs operating in user_side mode.

• User sideThe LAPD is assigned as user. This mode complies with the standards andinteroperates successfully with other LAPDs operating in network_side mode.

Management communication setup concepts Data communication channels (DCC)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


3-11

Please note that the DCCs work according to the master/slave principle, that is theLAPD modes of two interconnected SDH ports must be set differently. Acorresponding “user-network side failure” alarm will be generated if the LAPD mode isthe same at both ends of a DCC.

AITS and UITS supported

1655 Access Multiplexer Universal network elements support the AcknowledgedInformation Transfer Service (AITS) and the Unacknowledged Information TransferService (UITS) as the basis for the LAPD or LinkID protocol with the UITS modebeing the default mode of operation. AITS should only be used if required by other NEtypes. UITS is furthermore used for link protocol at the same time when AITS ischosen.

AITS and UITS functional principles

In the LAPD protocol, all PDUs are sent with a checksum to verify that the data hasnot been corrupted during the transmission over the DCC link. If a PDU is receivedwith a bad checksum, it is not acknowledged and will be resent:

• In the Unacknowledged Information Transfer Service (UITS)(default), corruptedPDUs are ignored and no further actions taken. Upper layers of the OSI stack areresponsible for recovery actions.

• In the Acknowledged Information Transfer Service (AITS), PDUs are numbered andtransmitted sequentially, and acknowledgment PDUs are sent back from thereceiver to the sender. If a PDU is lost, that is, if the sender gets noacknowledgment, the PDU is retransmitted.

Functional principle of the AITS

1Node A Node B23

Ack. 1 Ack. 2no Ack. 3 !

3retransmission of

Ack. 3

PDU 3 corrupted


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

DCC support over 1+1 MSP protected interfaces

To support DCC communication over 1+1 MSP protected STM-n links, the RS-DCCand MS-DCC channels can only be set to independent or slaved at a given time.

1. MSP DCC Independent ModeIn this mode the DCC channels over the working and protection STM-n interfaceoperate independently from the MSP protocol and can individually beenabled/disabled. DCC protection is performed at the IS-IS protocol level.

2. MSP DCC Slave ModeIn this case the DCC information in the transmit direction is bridged over both theworking and the protection part of the MSP connection. At the receive end theDCC is retrieved from the service (= active) part.

Dual stack with tunneling (DSwT)

Introduction

The Dual Stack with Tunneling (DSwT)feature provides a way to manage IP devicesthrough the DCN network.

A management system (for example, OMS) is used to manage NEs which use IP basedmanagement protocols (IP NEs).

Dual stack

Dual stack means adding an IP router stack to an existing OSI stack.

Tunnel

A tunnel is a unidirectional path through the OSI domain capable of transporting IPpackets. The tunnel consists of an endpoint in the OSI domain (NSAP) and theencapsulation/decapsulation mechanism to transport an IP packet in an OSI network.The actual path taken by the encapsulated IP packet is completely determined by thenormal OSI routing mechanisms.

TCP/IP tunnelling

This feature is intended to forward IP traffic between IP managed equipment at theborders of the SDH network and their IP-based management system.

In order to use the tunneling feature it is necessary to provision the following usingOMS or ITM-CIT:

• Map a “tunnel far-end” to each (masked) IP-destination, where all IP-addresses areimplied that fulfil the most significant bits (non-masked) part of the IP-destination.Only the far-end of a tunnel is required to be identified through its NSAP address(the near-end is implicitly this NE). The NE can support up to 150 tunnels(″far-ends″), however degradations can occur due to the network load performance.

• Provision its own IP-address in the NE.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


3-13

• Enable IP routing.

• Add routing information for forwarding towards an external IP router, when theIP-destination is not connected to the Q-LAN of the NE.

• Enable (when desired) automatic creation of tunnels, towards all other NEs in thisarea that have automatic creation enabled. Note that manual provisioning of tunnelsas in “1” is needed for a tunnel that spans a number of areas, while subsequenttunneling within the destination area can make use of automatically created tunnels.

Network architecture

The network architecture in the figure is used in this example.

IP tunnel architecture

The IP tunnel architecture in the figure is used in this example.

Tunnel configuration

A tunnel can be seen as a set of two static routing entries in nodes on the edge of theOSI network and the corresponding static entries in the routing table. The term tunnelmay be misleading because it is often associated with connections which must be setup in advance. In this case, only some routing and mapping information is required tobe provisioned and no communication between two systems is needed to set up the

DS NE DS NE

NE

NE

DCN

LAN

IP Host

LAN (IP & OSI)

IPRouter

LAN (IP & OSI)

ManagementSystem

IP-basedManagement

System

other IP-managedEquipment

IP Host

IP Network

DS NE DS NE

DCN

LAN

IPRouter

IP-basedManagement

Systemother IP-managed

Equipment

IP Network LAN

IP IPIP tunnel

Management communication setup concepts Dual stack with tunneling (DSwT)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

“tunnel” between them. To avoid confusion, it is better to speak of encapsulation andto think of the OSI network as a non broadcast multiple access (NBMA) subnetworkwithin the IP network.

The NEs need to be configured with one IP address on the LAN side, connected to theIP subnet with the IP NEs. The LAN can be used for both OSI and IP traffic. Thesame Ethernet address will be used for both protocols.

IP encapsulation

The IP packets are encapsulated in Connectionless Network Protocol (CLNP) packetswhich are routed through the OSI-only node which routes the CLNP packets asnormal, totally oblivious of the CLNP packets contents.

IP and DCC

A benefit of the tunneling approach, is that IP need not to be carried on the DCC. Onlythe CLNP packets (possibly carrying IP) go on to the DCC.

IP routing

In the dual stack with tunnelling configuration, a second network layer entity (the IProuter) is added alongside the existing OSI network layer entity (CLNP). The CLNPentity has the routing tables and the mechanisms to automatically populate them –namely the IS-IS and ES-IS dynamic routing protocols.

This is not the case for the IP routing tables since there is no IP dynamic routingprotocol to populate the IP routing tables. IP routing tables have to be manuallyprovisioned by the operator.

DSwT routing table

A routing table, IP or OSI, is divided into 2 columns:

• “Final destinations” of each network node,

• for each final destination, the identity of the “next hop” which is the next networknode in the path towards the final destination.

The table below shows a simplified IP routing table for IP router in a DSwT stack. Itis divided into 2 main columns. These two parts of the routing table will be discussedseparately.

Final destination Next hop

Subnetwork Node

130.44.5.0/24 LAN 0 <local>

120.23.4.0 / 24 LAN 0 130.44.5.8

150.35.10.0 / 24 DCC 1 -

150.35.20.0 / 24 DCC 2 -


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


3-15

Final destination Next hop

Subnetwork Node

160.22.0.0 / 16 CLNP-Tunnel NSAP (node X)

Final destination

This column of the routing table is a list of all the final destination nodes. When apacket is received at this node, then the destination address in that packet is checkedagainst the list of destinations in the destination column of the routing table. If there isno entry in the table for the packet destination, then the node won’t know how to routethe packet and will execute the error procedure (which involves discarding the packetand trying to send an error message packet back to the source). If a match is found,the next hop towards the destination can be looked up in he “Next hop” column.

IP prefixes

An IP prefix is a mechanism of identifying a collection of IP addresses with somecommon root. The general principle is to choose a mask which identifies a suitablefirst part of the IP address which summarizes a number of addresses. For example, theaddresses 120.10.2.1, 120.10.2.5 and 120.10.2.13 can be summarized by the IP prefix:120.10.2.0 / 24. The 24 identifies the first 24 bits of the address. Summarizing IPprefixes is a very powerful way to reduce the number of entries in a routing table.

Next hop

Two pieces of information are needed in order to identify the next hop node:

• On which subnetwork (for example on which exit port) is the next hop node,

• Which node on that subnetwork is the next hop

To send a packet to the destination “Dest”, the source must identify the node next hop.This is identified by the subnetwork (on port 2 of source) and then the node on thatsubnetwork (identified by B). In OSI terminology the address B is known as aSubnetwork Point of Attachment (SNPA), which is the point that the node is attached tothe subnetwork.

The second column in the routing table is the next hop and is divided into 2 parts:

• The next hop subnetwork

• The next hop node

Next hop subnetwork

A router, by its nature, must be connected to multiple subnetworks. Each subnetwork isconnected to a separate port on that router. The next hop port identifies the subnetworkto exit this node for the next hop towards the destination.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

For the DSwT IP router entity, there are 2 types of port/subnetwork:

1. LAN: this is the Ethernet (common subnetwork type for IP routers).

2. CLNP tunnel: this is a logical subnetwork created by the OSI CLNP network itself.From the IP router perspective, this subnetwork is seen as aNon-BroadcastMultiple Access (NBMA)subnetwork. The IP router simply sees all the neighbor IProuter entities connected together to this NBMA. It does not see any of the OSICLNP nodes inside this network.

Next hop node

Once the correct exit port (subnetwork) has been identified, the correct node on thatsubnetwork must be identified by its SNPA. This could be an Ethernet address (for aLAN), or a X.121 address for a X.25 subnetwork. When the subnetwork is apoint-to-point link then there is no need to identify the next hop. There are variousways to identify the next hop node, and they depend on the type of subnetwork thatnode is attached to. An overview is provided in the following table:

Subnetwork type Next hop node (identity type)

LAN IP address or none if the destination is actually on this LAN (there isno next hop node).

CLPN tunnel NSAP

DSwT tunnel auto provisioning (TAP)

Introduction

Provisioning all the entries in the routing tables of all the nodes can be a considerableeffort and is error prone, particularly when networks comprise hundreds of nodes. Itwould be desirable to have a mechanism which reduces some of the necessaryprovisioning to alleviate this problem. Such a mechanism has been designed. It is anAlcatel-Lucent proprietary mechanism calledTunnel Auto Provisioning (TAP).

TAP principle

The principle behind TAP is that IP routes known by DSwT nodes at the edge of theOSI network are advertised across the OSI network to the other DSwT nodes whichcan then insert these routes into their own routing tables.

This basic principle is illustrated in the following figure:


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


3-17

Example of two DSwT nodes advertising the IP networks they can reach. Each nodelearns the others advertised routes it hears and places them in its routing table.

Notice that the advertising node is not limited to giving one IP prefix but couldprovide a list of all the IP prefixes it can reach, if appropriate, each one resulting in arouting table entry.

DSwT connecting areas with manual TAP tunnels

Introduction

The TAP mechanism does not work across IS-IS areas because it distributesinformation using IS-IS level 1 LSPs. However, it is likely to have a considerablenumber of nodes in the OSI network and multiple areas.

Connecting areas

To allow DSwT nodes to communicate across IS-IS areas enjoying the benefits of theauto-provisioning, a pair of “tunnels” must be manually configured between the areas.This principle is illustrated in the following figure.

A pair of provisioned “tunnels” connecting any two nodes, one from each area,provides bidirectional communication between the areas.

120.40.10.0/24

Destination

CLPN-Tunnel

Subnetwork

NSAP(A)

Node

Next Hop

120.40.20.0/24

Destination

CLPN-Tunnel

Subnetwork

NSAP(B)

Node

Next Hop

Routing Table in A Routing Table in B

NSAP A

120.

40.1

0.0/

24

NSAP B

120.

40.2

0.0/

24

CLNP Subnetwork

"I am NSAP(B). I canreach IP prefix

120.40.20.0 / 24"

"I am NSAP(A). I canreach IP prefix

120.40.10.0 / 24"

"If I want to reach120.40.20.0 / 24, thenI send to NSAP(B)"

"If I want to reach120.40.10.0 / 24, thenI send to NSAP(A)"

Management communication setup concepts DSwT tunnel auto provisioning (TAP)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Note: TAP “tunnels” are not transitive. That is, a “tunnel” connecting areas A and B,and a “tunnel” connecting areas B and C doesnot connect areas A and C. A separate“tunnel” between areas A and C is needed.

Partition repair

Partition repair

The partition repair is needed to allow management DCNs for large multi-ringnetworks to be designed such that single points of failure are avoided. The use ofpartition-repair is restricted to those cases where the current mechanisms cannot avoida single point of failure, even though a physical backup route is available.

Partition repair provides a way to enhance the robustness of the DCN by providing thecapability to repair intra-area routing using connections via nodes outside the area. Thisis done by creating a path outside the area, between two level 2 nodes (which areprovisioned to be partition capable level 2 nodes) that belong to distinct partitions ofthe same IS-IS area. Level 1 IS-IS PDUs and CLNP PDUs are encapsulated andtransferred over the level 2 path.

Note that network element types that do not support partition-repair, can exist in the“repaired” areas; however, these network element types cannot be part of the level 2repair path (they cannot be part of the level 1 tunnel through the level 2 domain).

A network element (NE) is a physical box that contains a physical piece of equipment.A network element can contain one or more nodes. A node is a logical part of theDCN and is the basic building block of the DCN. Both intermediate systems and endsystems are considered to be nodes. Each node is identified by exactly one NSAP. AnNSAP, or network service access point, is the address of a node. Each node has exactlyone NSAP that is unique in the entire network (usually the NSAP is even globallyunique). Routing and forwarding in each node of a network is done using the targetNSAP.

Area A Area C

Area B

Management communication setup concepts DSwT connecting areas with manual TAP tunnels

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


3-19

The terminology that is used in relation to partition-repair requires some explanation. Anode can be partition-repair capable, partition-repair compatible, and partition-repairdesignated. These terms are described below:

• A node is partition-repair capable if it is provisioned as such. Only possible endpoints of partition-repair tunnels need to be provisioned as partition-repair capable.Such possible end points must be attached level 2 nodes. (A level 2 node isattached if it can forward packets to a different area, even if the level 2 node itselfis not on an area boundary).

• A node is partition-repair compatible if a partition-repair path can pass through thenode. No provisioning is needed or required to make a node partitionrepair-compatible. Many of the older network element types, arenot partition-repaircompatible.

• A node is partition-repair designated if it is selected as such by all the other nodesin its area that are still connected to it via a level 1 path. The election is done bychoosing one node from the set of still-connected nodes that are partition-repaircapable. If a partition-repair designated node of a certain area learns (by listeningto level 2 communication) that there is another partition repair designated node inthe same area, both of these nodes conclude that their area is partitioned. Thesenodes will then establish a partition-repair path between them. The partition-repairpath is a virtual level 1 connection between the two partition-repair designatednodes that runs through the level 2 domain. Level 1 packets are tunnelled throughthis virtual connection; this removes the area partitioning.

Partition repair guidelines

When to use partition repair

Only provision nodes to bepartition repair capablein an area, since asingle point offailure otherwise cannot be avoided for that area. If more than one level 2 entry intoan area is used, partition repair is a valid mechanism.

How to use partition repair

To allow the healing of a partitioned area, two nodes must be provisioned as “partitionrepair capable” as follows:

• At the area boundary, connecting level 2 nodes in other areas

• The potential virtual link (tunnel) should reduce the SPFs in the area to aminimum.

In case an area is partitioned due to a single failure, the two partition repair capablelevel-2 nodes in each partition establish a level-1 tunnel through the level-2 subdomain,to repair level-1 connectivity between all nodes in the two related partitions.

Management communication setup concepts Partition repair

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

NE type restrictions

Observe the following NE type restrictions:

• All NE types, managers, and other OSI nodes (like external OSI routers) areallowed as level 1 IS nodes or as ES-only nodes, in an area with partition repaircapable NEs.When a repair tunnel is established, the partition repair designated NEs advertiseinformation such, that the tunnel is identified as a normal level-1 route within thearea.

• All NE types and other OSI nodes (like external OSI-routers) are allowed as level2 nodes in the level 2 subdomain, as long as they are not part of the shortestinter-area path between two partition repair capable NEs in an area.The network is expected to be designed for full management connectivity in caseof a single failure. In case of two failures, including a partitioned area and a failurein the shortest potential tunnel route, the network is allowed to drop managementconnections. Therefore not all OSI nodes in the level 2 subdomain need to bepartition compatible.

Large network restrictions

Observe the following restrictions regarding large networks:

• The manager connections that are tunnelled through a level 2 node in case of asingle failure, are counted as connections and must therefore be subtracted (like allother rerouted connections through this node) from the maximum number asspecified in S-111 in order to identify the maximum number of acceptableconnections in the case that the network is in its normal (failure-free) state.If 50 manager connections can be tunneled in case of a failure, and 150 managerconnections are forwarded in a failure-free network, through one of the nodes inthe potential tunnel, the related node must be capable of forwarding 200 managerconnections.The total number of managed NEs in an area can be tunneled through the level 2subdomain with regard to the maximum number of manager connections that canbe forwarded by a node. Only the shortest inter-area route between two partitionrepair capable nodes in an area has to be taken into account.

• The manager connections that are received, encapsulated and forwarded into apartition-repair tunnel, are counted as normal connections. If 100 managerconnections can be tunneled in case of a failure, the related partition designatednode must be capable of forwarding 100 manager connections.

• All areas can be provisioned to have one or more partition repair capable nodes.Each area with one or more partition repair capable nodes requires an extra entry inthe routing table (RIB), because of initial selection of a partition repair designatednode per area.

Management communication setup concepts Partition repair guidelines

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


3-21

• Avoid the use of partition repair capable NEs in large areas.A DCN network design that selects small level-1 areas to use partition repair, whilethe large areas are rings that need no partition repair, will be easier to understand.Also it is easier to check that all rules are obeyed.

• The maximum number of partition repair capable NEs in a network is49.All partition designated nodes in the level 2 subdomain require an additional entryin the routing table of the other partition designated nodes. Up to 49 additionalentries are available, which are all used after a single failure when all 8 areas havepartition repair capable nodes and one of those areas is partitioned.

Partitioning restrictions

A maximum of nine partition repair capable NEs per area is allowed. This implies thatthe partition repair capable NEs can terminate a maximum of eight partition repairtunnels. A single cable cut may imply many fiber cuts, of which more than 7 of thosefiber cuts may imply partitioning of the same area. A fiber cut between two DWDMnodes may imply a cut of many DCC channels. The network design shall not usepartition repair to cover such topologies.

OMS-to-NE connections concepts

Definition: OMS-to-NE connection

An OMS-to-NE connection is the communications connection between themanagement system and an NE. This connection is established when the NE is addedto the management system. OMS-to-NE connections exist only in the managementsystem; the addition of an OMS-to-NE connection has no influence on an NE.

Functionality description

The management system is used to establish and manage OMS-to-NE connections. AnOMS-to-NE connection is established when an NE is added to the management system.When an OMS-to-NE connection is established, the communications interface that willbe used for communication from the NE to the management system is selected.

In a High Availability configuration, if any NE is manually added to the primarymanagement system using the management system’s graphical user interface, in thesame way, the NE must also be manually added to the secondary management system.Similarly, any NE that is auto-discovered by the primary management system will beauto-discovered by the secondary management system.

Preconditions

A minimum subset of provisioning must be done before NEs can be added to themanagement system The craft interface terminal (ITM-CIT) must be used to provisioncertain information when the NE is set up.

Management communication setup concepts Partition repair guidelines

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Consult the1655 Access Multiplexer Universal User Operations Guidefor instructionson how to provision an NE so it is ready to be managed by a management system suchas an OMS.

For 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal NEs that use OSI communications, the NSAPaddress of the management system must be added to the access list of the NE so theNE can communicate with the management system.

Supported communications interfaces

The communications interface is used to communicate between the managementsystem and the NE. For 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal, theOSI communicationsinterface applies.

Supported communications interfaces

1655 Access Multiplexer Universal supports the following types of communicationsinterfaces:

• OSI: Communication occurs via a direct connection between the managementsystem and each of the NEs.

• TCP/IP GNE: The management system communicates with a subnetwork of NEsthrough one NE that has been designated as the gateway. An NE using acommunications interface of TCP/IP GNE has been designated as thegateway NE(GNE), which means it is the gateway for communications between themanagement system and the other NEs in a network communications group. TheGNE is used by the management system to communicate with all NEs in a networkcommunications group.

• TCP/IP RNE: The management system communicates with a subnetwork of NEsthrough one NE that has been designated as the gateway. An NE using acommunications interface of TCP/IP RNE is has been designated as aremote NE(RNE), which means it is not the gateway for communications with the subnetwork.An RNE is an NE in a network communications group that the management systemaccesses through a GNE.

The management system communicates with a GNE using TCP/IP, while the managedNEs in a network communications group communicate with each other using OSI.

Reference

For more detailed explanations related to the concepts of OMS-to-NE connections,refer to theOMS Network Element Management Guide.

Management communication setup concepts OMS-to-NE connections concepts

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


3-23

Auto-discovery concepts (subnetworks)

Overview

This section describes the auto-discovery process for subnetworks.

Important! CMISE NEs are not automatically discovered via auto-discovery.CMISE NEs must be manually added to the management system.

Note: CMISE NEs can be automatically discovered via auto-discovery if the NE isfibered to a TL1 NE that has already been added to the management system.

Auto-discovery process

Auto-discovery is the process by which the management system “discovers” thetopology of a subnetwork, and ultimately a network.

When the auto-discovery process is run, the management system logs into the first NEin the subnetwork, which is the GNE, inventories the GNE, and discovers its neighborsin the subnetwork. The management system then logs into the neighbor NEs andinventories them. The management system continues to log into neighbor NEs until allof the NEs in the subnetwork are discovered and inventoried. The auto-discoveryprocess also “discovers” the physical network connections connected to the NEs in thesubnetwork.

This process is repeated for each of the subnetworks in the network.

The management system consolidates the discovered network topology into a workingview that is presented to users throughout the pages of the management system, mostobviously in theNetwork Map . The ability of the management system to “discover”network information, instead of having it be manually entered, is significant because itminimizes effort for the network operator and reduces the risk of errors.

Auto-discovery can only be run on NEs that are connected to the other NEs in thenetwork communications group by the data communication channel (DCC). For someNE types, the DCC is called the supervisory channel.

To log into an NE, the management system uses the default login/passwords that areset up for each NE type. The management system assumes that neighbors of an NE arethe same NE type as the NE through which they were discovered.

Once a number of NEs within a ring are auto-discovered, the management systemautomatically determines that they comprise a ring. For more information on theauto-discovery of rings, see theOMS Connection Management Guide.

When auto-discovery runs

Auto-discovery is initiated whenever a full database synchronization is run. Adding anNE to the management system initiates a full database synchronization, which in turninvokes auto-discovery.

Management communication setup concepts Auto-discovery concepts (subnetworks)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

When auto-discovery is blocked

When the management system cannot log into an NE, any further auto-discovery onthat NE is blocked. The management system may be blocked from logging in to an NEfor the following reasons:

• The NE is a non-managed NE. The management system cannot log intonon-managed NEs. Non-managed NEs are also known as black boxes.

• The NE is a unmanageable device. The management system cannot log intounmanageable devices.

• The management system cannot log into a managed NE because some of its NEinformation is incorrect (typically the NE login/password information).

Auto-discovery of NEs

When an NE is discovered, the NE type is assumed to be “unknown.” Themanagement system attempts to login to the discovered NE using the login andpassword associated with the NE type of the NE through which the NE wasdiscovered.

If that is not successful, one of the following happens:

• If the discovered NEis of the same NE type as the NE through which it wasdiscovered, the login and password are valid and the management system is able tolog into the discovered NE. When the management system begins to communicatewith the NE, the correct NE type is reported and the management system updatesthe NE type from “unknown” to the correct NE type.

• If the discovered NEis not of the same NE type as the NE through which it wasdiscovered, the login and password are not valid and the management system is notable to log into the discovered NE.One of the following happens:

– If the NE is of a supported NE type, the user can manually provide themanagement system with the correct login and password for this NE using thetask“To modify an OMS-to-NE connection” (p. 4-7). Once this is done, themanagement system can log in to the discovered NE. When the managementsystem begins to communicate with the NE, the correct NE type is reported andthe management system updates the NE type from “unknown” to the correctNE type.

– If the NE is not of a supported NE type, the user can change the NE type toeither “non-managed NE” or “unmanageable device.” Non-managed NEs arealso known as black boxes.

Note that when an NE type is “unknown,” an alarm condition occurs because themanagement system is attempting to communicate with the NE, but cannot because itcannot log into the NE. Once the NE type is changed from “unknown,” the problem isresolved and the host alarm is cleared. This situation can be avoided if the usermanually enters all non-managed devices (supported only in the SDH environment)and unmanageable devices in the subnetwork before auto-discovery is initiated.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


3-25

Auto-discovery of supported NEs

During auto-discovery, NEs are discovered and added to the management system.

As each NE is discovered, it is inventoried, and the following information about eachNE is gathered and added to the management system.Note: This is full list of possibleinformation that may be discovered. The type of information discovered for each NEdepends on the NE type.

• Cross-connections

• Equipment

• Network Connections – ONNS

• Optical Connections

• Port parameters

• Protection groups

• System parameters

• Subnetwork Discovery

• Fault – Alarms and Events

Auto-discovery of non-managed NEs and unmanageable devices

The management system discovers non-managed NEs (supported only in the SDHenvironment) and unmanageable devices during the auto-discovery process. However,the management system cannot log into them during auto-discovery, so they arediscovered with an NE type of “unknown.” The user must use the management systemto change the NE type to “non-managed NE” or “unmanageable device”, via the task“To modify an OMS-to-NE connection” (p. 4-7). Non-managed NEs display on theNetwork Map , but unmanageable devices do not display on theNetwork Map .

Auto-discovery of physical network connections

During auto-discovery, physical network connections between NEs are discovered andadded to the management system.

For NEs that return the following information, the management system can constructthe physical network connection without having to query its neighbor(s):

• Local Port AID

• TID of the terminating neighbor

• Neighbor Port AID

Although the management system does not have to query the neighbor NE to constructthe physical network connection, the management system verifies the neighbor’sphysical network connection port ID by conducting a database synchronization on theneighbor NE in order to auto-discover the physical network connection port ID if theport ID is not already in the management system database.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Scheduling subnetwork discovery

The management system allows searching for and scheduling subnetwork discoveryusing the Scheduled Tasks function.

Auto-discovery of VCGs

The Connection Auto Discoverycommand-line tool is used to auto discover VirtualConcatenation Groups (VCGs), along with their server connections, in the network.The Connection Auto Discoverycommand-line tool allows the management system todiscover the connections used for Ethernet transport even if they are provisioned with atool other than OMS.

For more information about theConnection Auto Discoverycommand-line tool, see theOMS Administration Guide.

Auto-discovery of CMISE NEs

CMISE NEs may be automatically discovered when a CMISE NE is reported as aneighbor of a TL1 NE in the TL1 response used by the management system forsubnetwork discovery. Through this TL1 response, the management system cannotdetermine that the reported NE is a CMISE NE, therefore the management systemassumes that the NE has a TL1 interface and attempts to log into it by sending TL1commands. Since the CMISE NE does not understand TL1 commands, themanagement system never successfully logs into the CMISE NE and the NE remainsan unknown NE in the management system database for an indefinite period of time.

Use the following procedures to prevent the management system from auto-discoveryof CMISE NEs.

• If CMISE NEs are connected to a TL1 NE with DCC connectivity and will bemanaged by the management system, these CMISE NEs should be manually addedto the management system before running subnetwork discovery. This will ensurethat the management system does not attempt to add these CMISE NEs since themanagement system will recognize the NE name as belonging to a managedCMISE NE.

• If these CMISE NEs will not be managed by the management system, turn offDCC connectivity between any TL1 NEs neighbors of these CMISE NEs beforerunning subnetwork discovery. This ensures that the TL1 NEs managed by themanagement system, do not report the CMISE NEs as neighbors in the TL1response.

If the management system does auto-discover a CMISE NE, the CMISE NE willappear as an unknown NE and will remain as an unknown NE indefinitely since themanagement system will never be able to log into the CMISE to discover its NE type.If this occurs, and the CMISE NE will be managed by the management system, deletethe unknown NE representing the CMISE NE and add it to the management system asa managed CMISE NE. If the CMISE NE will not be managed by the managementsystem, modify the NE type from unknown to either non-managed NE orunmanageable device so that the management system will not auto-discover theCMISE NE at a later time.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


3-27

4 4Managementcommunication setuptasks

Overview

Purpose

This chapter informs how to perform the most common tasks related to managementcommunication setup.

Contents

Tasks related to OMS-to-NE connections 4-3

To view a list of OMS-to-NE connections 4-3

To add an OMS-to-NE connection 4-4

To modify an OMS-to-NE connection 4-7

To deactivate an OMS-to-NE connection 4-10

To activate an OMS-to-NE connection 4-12

To test the communication with an NE 4-14

To delete an OMS-to-NE connection 4-15

To delete an NE 4-17

Tasks related to DCC 4-19

To view a list of DCC/EOW status for the port overheads 4-19

To modify the DCC/EOW status for a selected port overhead 4-20

To modify DCN parameters 4-21

To view the DCC in MSP mode 4-23

To set the DCC in MSP mode to slave or to independent 4-24

To view a list of overhead access ports 4-26

To view a list of transparent DCC cross-connections 4-27

To add a transparent DCC cross-connection 4-28

To delete a transparent DCC cross-connection 4-30

To view a list of P12sDCC Inband E1 Management Channels 4-32

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


4-1

To modify P12sDCC Inband E1 Management Channel parameters 4-33

Management communication setup tasks Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Tasks related to OMS-to-NE connections

To view a list of OMS-to-NE connections

When to use

Use this task to view a list of OMS-to-NE connections.

Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Use the object links to follow this path:Management Network → OMS to NE Con-nections .

Result: The Search section of theOMS to NE Connections page is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Make selections in one or more of the following fields in theSearch section of thewindow:

• In the NE type field, select a type of NE.

• In the NE name(s) field, theAvailable table contains all NEs of the selected NEtype available on the management system. TheSelected table contains the NEsthat are to be considered in the search. Click an NE and use the arrow buttons tomove one or more NEs from theAvailable table to theSelected table, or click thedouble arrows to move all the NEs to theAvailable table.

• In the Comm type field, select a type of communication interface between the NEand the management system.

• In the Net Comm Group field select the NCG name from the drop-down list. TheNCG names displayed depend on the selection in theComm type field.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click Search .

Result: The list at the bottom of theOMS to NE Connections page is populatedwith a list of the OMS-to-NE connections in the network that meet your searchcriteria.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Management communication setup tasks Tasks related to OMS-to-NE connectionsTo view a list of OMS-to-NE connections

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


4-3

To add an OMS-to-NE connection

When to use

Use this task to add an NE and establish an OMS-to-NE connection between themanagement system and the new NE.

Important! Indirectly managed NEs cannot be added using this task.

Before you begin

Gather the following information about the NE to be added:

• NE name

• NE type (here: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal)

• Communications type (here: OSI)

• Network communications group to which the NE will be assigned; ensure that itexists

• NSAP information (see also“NSAP address structure” (p. 3-8))

Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


• Use the object links to follow this path:Network . The Network Map is displayed.In the toolbar, click theNew tool and selectNetwork element from the drop-downlist.

• Use the object links to follow this path:Network Elements . In the toolbar, clickthe New tool in the toolbar.

• Use the object links to follow this path:Management Network → OMS-to-NEconnections . In the Search section of the window, click theNew tool.

Result: The Add OMS-to-NE connection page is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 In the NE name field, enter a name that will be used by the management system toidentify this NE. This field accepts a maximum of 20 characters. Alcatel-Lucentrecommends to use theTarget Identifier (TID)of the NE, which was provisionedduring installation of the NE asNE name. See theOMS Getting Started Guidefor alist of allowable characters.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 In the NE type field, select “1655 AMU”.

Management communication setup tasks Tasks related to OMS-to-NE connectionsTo add an OMS-to-NE connection

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Result: The Communications type box dynamically alters to reflect choices basedupon your selection.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 In the Communications type field, “OSI” is automatically selected as communicationsinterface to be used between the NE and the management system.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Move to theOMS-to-NE connections details panel by clicking the number 2 in thenavigation aid or by clickingNext .

Result: The OMS-to-NE connections details panel is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Set the fields of theOMS-to-NE connections details panel as required:

• Net Comm Grp – select the network communications group to which theOMS-to-NE connection belongs from the drop-down list.

• NSAP address – enter the possible NSAP format for the OMS-to-NE connection.Possible values are:Fixed 20-byte address structure, Fixed 10-byte addressstructure, Flexible address structure.If the fixed 20-byte address structureis selected, enter the NSAP address of theOMS-to-NE connection in the following text fields:

– Area – the area identifier indicating the routing area to which a node belongs(four hexadecimal digits).

– System ID – the system identifier representing the node. The IEEE 802.3 MACaddress (12 hexadecimal digits).

If the fixed 10-byte address structureis selected, enter the NSAP address of theOMS-to-NE connection in the following text fields:



If the flexible address structureis selected, enter the NSAP address of theOMS-to-NE connection in the following text fields:

– AFI – the authority and format identifier specifying the NSAP address format(four hexadecimal digits).

– Flexible part – up to 24 hexadecimal digits.


Result: The NSAP address is designated for the NE.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Click Next .


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


4-5

Result: The OMS-to-NE connection summary panel is displayed (note that theOMS-to-NE connection security information panel is skipped for 1655 AccessMultiplexer Universal NEs).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Review the summary for this OMS-to-NE connection.

Do one of the following:

• If you wish to return to a panel to change a selection, either click the panel numberon the navigation aid, or clickEdit for that panel, or click the hyperlink for thatpanel. Change the appropriate information, and then return to this step.

• If the selections are all correct, clickSubmit to complete the addition of theOMS-to-NE connection.

Result: A confirmation is issued in theMessage section of theOMS-to-NEconnection summary page, the NE is added to the management system and acommunications connection is established between the management system and thenew NE.

The addition of an NE to the management system initiates a full databasesynchronization. The NE is automatically added to theNetwork Map . The NE isadded to the remaining pages of the management system after a refresh is executed.

If the OMS-to-NE connection being added is a GNE, a message is displayed: “Thesystem will be unable to perform most management functions until the fulldatabase synchronization with the NE is completed. Do you want to activate theautomatic database synchronization after the NE is added?”. The user can choose“Yes” or “No”. If the user chooses “Yes”, the system initiates a full databasesynchronization after the OMS-to-NE connection is successfully added. If the userchooses “No”, the system does not initiate a full database synchronization after theOMS-to-NE connection is successfully added.

Initially, the color of the NE icon is magenta, which indicates a loss ofcommunications. Once the NE addition is complete, the color of the NE iconchanges to green, indicatingnormal status, or another color that indicates thepresence of an alarm.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

To modify an OMS-to-NE connection

When to use

Use this task to modify an OMS-to-NE connection.

Important! Changing OMS-to-NE connection details may result in a loss ofassociation. Incorrect values for the parameters may result in the NE becomingunmanageable.

Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Use the object links to follow this path:Management Network → OMS-to-NEConnections .

Result: The Search section of theOMS-to-NE Connections page is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................




• In the Communications Type field, select a type of communication interfacebetween the NE and the management system.

• In the Network communications group field select the NCG name from thedrop-down list. The NCG names displayed depend on the selection in theCommunications Type field.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click Search .

Result: The list at the bottom of theOMS-to-NE Connections page is populatedwith a list of the OMS-to-NE connections in the network that meet your searchcriteria.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 The NE name column of the table lists the names of the OMS-to-NE connections. Thename in this column is a hyperlink.


• Click the name of the OMS-to-NE connection you wish to view.

• Click the radio button next to the OMS-to-NE connection you wish to modify.From theGo menu, selectModify and clickGo.

Management communication setup tasks Tasks related to OMS-to-NE connectionsTo modify an OMS-to-NE connection

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


4-7

Result: The OMS-to-NE connections general information page is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 On theOMS-to-NE connections general information panel, no modifications arepossible.

Move to theOMS-to-NE connections details panel by clicking the number 2 in thenavigation aid.

Result: The OMS-to-NE connections details panel is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Modify the fields of theOMS-to-NE connections details panel as required:

• Net Comm Grp – modify the network communications group to which theOMS-to-NE connection belongs. Select a network communications group from thedrop-down list.

• NSAP address – modify the possible NSAP format for the OMS-to-NEconnection. Possible values are:Fixed 20-byte address structure, Fixed 10-byteaddress structure, Flexible address structure.If the fixed 20-byte address structureis selected, modify the NSAP address of theOMS-to-NE connection in the following text fields:



If the fixed 10-byte address structureis selected, modify the NSAP address of theOMS-to-NE connection in the following text fields:



If the flexible address structureis selected, modify the NSAP address of theOMS-to-NE connection in the following text fields:

– AFI – the authority and format identifier specifying the NSAP address format(four hexadecimal digits).

– Flexible part – up to 24 hexadecimal digits.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Move to theOMS-to-NE connection summary panel by clicking the number 3 ornumber 4 in the navigation aid (note that theOMS-to-NE connection securityinformation panel is skipped for 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal NEs).

Result: The OMS-to-NE connection summary panel is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Review the summary for this OMS-to-NE connection.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


• If you wish to return to a panel to change a selection, either click the panel numberon the navigation aid, or clickEdit for that panel, or click the hyperlink for thatpanel. Change the appropriate information, and then return to this step

• If the selections are all correct, clickSubmit to complete the modification of theOMS-to-NE connection.

Result: A confirmation is issued in theMessage section of theOMS-to-NEconnection summary page, and the OMS-to-NE connection is modified.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


4-9

To deactivate an OMS-to-NE connection

When to use

Use this task to deactivate the communications connection between the managementsystem and an NE. When you deactivate an OMS-to-NE connection, the NE is notcommunicating with the management system.

Before you begin

In order to deactivate an OMS-to-NE connection, the NE communications status mustbe eitherUp (the NE is communicating with the management system) orDown (theNE is not communicating with the management system and the management system isattempting to regain communications).

Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................




• In the Comm Type field, select a type of communication interface between the NEand the management system.

• In the Net Comm Grp field select the NCG name from the drop-down list. TheNCG names displayed depend on the selection in theComm Type field.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click Search .

Result: The list at the bottom of theOMS-to-NE Connections page is populatedwith a list of the OMS-to-NE connections in the network that meet your searchcriteria. TheNE name column of the table lists the names of the OMS-to-NEconnections.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click the radio button next to the OMS-to-NE connection you wish to deactivate.

Management communication setup tasks Tasks related to OMS-to-NE connectionsTo deactivate an OMS-to-NE connection

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 From theGo menu, selectDeactivate and clickGo.

Result: A confirmation is issued in theMessage section of theOMS to NEconnections page, the management system logs out of the NE and sets thecommunications status toDeactivated .

To update theOMS to NE connections page, click the refresh button.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Management communication setup tasks Tasks related to OMS-to-NE connectionsTo deactivate an OMS-to-NE connection

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


4-11

To activate an OMS-to-NE connection

When to use

Use this task to activate the communications connection between the managementsystem and an NE. When you activate an OMS-to-NE connection, the NE is notcommunicating with the management system.

Before you begin

In order to activate an OMS-to-NE connection, the NE communication status must beDeactivated . The NE is not communicating with the management system because theuser manually deactivated the OMS-to-NE connection.

Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................






...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click Search .


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click the radio button next to the OMS-to-NE connection you wish to activate.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 From theGo menu, selectActivate and clickGo.

Management communication setup tasks Tasks related to OMS-to-NE connectionsTo activate an OMS-to-NE connection

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Result: A confirmation is issued in theMessage section of theOMS to NEconnections page, the management system connects to the NE and sets thecommunications status toActivated .

To update theOMS to NE connections page, click the refresh button.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Management communication setup tasks Tasks related to OMS-to-NE connectionsTo activate an OMS-to-NE connection

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


4-13

To test the communication with an NE

When to use

Use this task to test the communication with an NE.

Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:

1. In theNE type field, select a type of NE. If you have selected the target NE in theprevious step, this field is already populated with your selection.

2. In theNE name field, select the name of the target NE. If you have selected thetarget NE in the previous step, this field is already populated with your selection.

3. In theCategory field, selectData Communications Networks .

4. In theFunction field, selectPerform Comms Test .

5. Click Go.

Result: The Comms Test page is displayed. It includes a list of DCC connectionstests for a selected NE.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click the radio button next to the NE name for which you would like to testcommunications.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 From theGo menu, selectPerform Comms Test and clickGo.

Result: A progress indication followed by a confirmation is issued in theMessagesection of theComms Test page that the communications between themanagement system and the NE are tested.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 To update theComms Test page, click the refresh button.

Result: The columnsLast Tested andTest Status show date and time and theresult of the latest test.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Management communication setup tasks Tasks related to OMS-to-NE connectionsTo test the communication with an NE

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

To delete an OMS-to-NE connection

When to use

Use this task to delete the communications connection between the managementsystem and an NE. When you delete an OMS-to-NE connection, its corresponding NEis also deleted from the management system’s database.

Before you begin

An NE and its corresponding OMS-to-NE connection cannot be deleted in thefollowing situations:

1. When the NE is a GNE for a Network Communications Group, and it has RNEsassigned to it

2. When the NE has cross-connections being used in network connections. Forinformation about how to delete a network connection, see theOMS ConnectionManagement Guide.

3. When the NE is being used as an FTP/FTAM gateway

4. When a database synchronization is in progress for that NE

5. When a software download is in progress for that NE

6. If the management system cannot delete the NE from the primary network adapter

7. When a backup or restore is in progress for that NE

Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................






Management communication setup tasks Tasks related to OMS-to-NE connectionsTo delete an OMS-to-NE connection

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


4-15

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click Search .


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click the radio button next to the OMS-to-NE connection you wish to delete.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 From theGo menu, selectDelete and clickGo.

Result: A confirmation window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click Yes.

Result: A progress indication followed by a confirmation is issued in theMessagesection of theNetwork Elements page, and the OMS-to-NE connection is deleted.The NE is automatically deleted from theNetwork Map . The NE is deleted fromthe remaining pages of the management system after a refresh is executed.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Management communication setup tasks Tasks related to OMS-to-NE connectionsTo delete an OMS-to-NE connection

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

To delete an NE

When to use

Use this task to delete an NE from the management system’s database. When youdelete an NE, its corresponding OMS-to-NE connection is also deleted.

There are two methods for this task.

Before you begin

An NE and its corresponding OMS-to-NE connection cannot be deleted in thefollowing situations:

1. When the NE is a GNE for a Network Communications Group, and it has RNEsassigned to it

2. When the NE has cross-connections being used in network connections. Forinformation about how to delete a network connection, see theOMS ConnectionManagement Guide.

3. When the NE is being used as an FTP/FTAM gateway

4. When a database synchronization is in progress for that NE

5. When a software download is in progress for that NE

6. If the management system cannot delete the NE from the primary network adapter

7. When a backup or restore is in progress for that NE

Task, method 1: from the Network Elements page

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Use the object links to follow this path:Network Elements .

Result: The Network Elements page is displayed. It includes a table that lists allNEs.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 The NE name column of the table lists the names of the NEs. Click the radio buttonnext to the NE you wish to delete. From theGo menu, selectDelete and clickGo.

Result: A confirmation window is displayed asking you to confirm the deletion.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click OK.

Result: A progress indication followed by a confirmation is issued in theMessagesection of theNetwork Elements page, and the NE is deleted.

If the management system finds that the NE to be deleted has cross-connections inthat NE that are being used in network connections, a failure notice is displayed.

Management communication setup tasks Tasks related to OMS-to-NE connectionsTo delete an NE

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


4-17

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Task, method 2: from the Network Map

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 On theNetwork Map , right-click the ODO_AREA and selectExpand all, thenright-click the NE icon that represents the NE you wish to delete.

Result: The Node menu is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 SelectDelete .


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click OK.

Result: A progress indication followed by a confirmation is issued in theMessagesection of theNetwork Map page, and the NE is deleted.

If the management system finds that the NE to be deleted has cross-connections inthat NE that are being used in network connections, a failure notice is displayed.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Management communication setup tasks Tasks related to OMS-to-NE connectionsTo delete an NE

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Tasks related to DCC

To view a list of DCC/EOW status for the port overheads

When to use

Use this task to view a list of DCC/EOW status for the port overheads.

If you want to view these settings just for a single port, it is recommended to followthe task“To modify the parameters of a physical or logical port” (p. 6-26).

Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:




4. In theFunction field, selectRetrieve/Set DCC/EOW .

5. Click Go.

Result: The DCC/EOW Status page is displayed. It includes a list of ports andtheir current DCC/EOW status for the port overheads.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Management communication setup tasks Tasks related to DCCOverview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


4-19

To modify the DCC/EOW status for a selected port overhead

When to use

Use this task to modify the DCC/EOW status for a selected port overhead.

If you want to view these settings just for a single port, complete the task“To modifythe parameters of a physical or logical port” (p. 6-26).

Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 View a list of DCCs using the task“To view a list of DCC/EOW status for the portoverheads” (p. 4-19).

Result: The DCC/EOW Status page is displayed. It includes a list of ports andtheir current DCC/EOW status for the port overheads.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Click the radio button next to the port overhead parameter you wish to modify. Fromthe Go menu, selectModify and clickGo.

Result: The Modify DCC/EOW page is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


• DCC – selectEnabledto enable the DCC termination for the respective port orDisabledto disable it.

• LAPD Mode – select eitherUITS (unacknowledged information transfer service,which is the default) orAITS (acknowledged information transfer service).

• LAPD Side – choose the LAPD role eitheruser (user side, which is the default) ornetwork(network side).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click Submit .

Result: A progress indication followed by a confirmation is issued in theMessagesection of theModify DCC/EOW page, and the DCC/EOW status for a selectedport overhead is modified.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Management communication setup tasks Tasks related to DCCTo modify the DCC/EOW status for a selected port

overhead....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

To modify DCN parameters

When to use

Use this task to modify DCN parameters that apply to a selected network element as awhole.

Related information

See also:

• “DCN configurations” (p. 3-4)

• “Data communication channels (DCC)” (p. 3-10)

Important! Changing DCN parameters on the NE may cause the NE to restart,resulting in a temporary loss of association. Incorrect values for the DCNparameters may result in the NE becoming unmanageable.

Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:



3. In theCategory field, selectData Communication Networks .

4. In theFunction field, selectRetrieve/Set DCN parameters .

5. Click Go.

Management communication setup tasks Tasks related to DCCTo modify DCN parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


4-21

Result: The Modify DCN Parameters page is displayed. It includes a series ofpanels from which to view or modify DCN parameters.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


• NE location – enter the user defined name for the location of the NE.

• IS-IS on NE – select one of the following radio buttons:

– Level 1: the NE is designated a level 1 intermediate system (IS). This NEroutes messages within an area.

– Level 1 + Level 2: the NE has both level 1 and level 2 capabilities. A level 2NE is able to route messages in between areas.

– Level 1 + Level 2 + Area Repair Access: allows a level 2 IS to become a“tunnel” entrance/exit in the case of an area becoming partitioned due to anetwork failure. This allows a level 1 “tunnel” to be built through the level 2subnetwork, rerouting the connection back to the level 1 area. Note that onlythe end nodes of the tunnel should be provisioned asLevel 1 + Level 2 + AreaRepair Access. All the other NEs in the repair path must support the partitionrepair feature, but need not be provisioned to provide area repair access.

• IS-IS on LAN – select one of the following radio buttons:

– Normal IS-IS: LAN IS-IS protocol follows the IS-IS setting on the NE.

– Level 2: LAN IS-IS protocol is set to level 2 (inter-area).

– No IS-IS: LAN IS-IS protocol is not supported.

• Designated router priority – enter the router priority. This is used by the IS-ISfunction to select which NE attached to the management LAN in an area willbecome the designated router.

• Additional Manual Area Address 1 , Additional Manual Area Address 2 – enterthe area address format used by equipment other than Alcatel-Lucent NEs. Thisenables the NEs in the area to be aware of the different area address formats usedwithin that area.

• Maximum LSP size – used to determine the maximum size of link state protocoldata units (LSP) that can be provisioned for each NE.

– Alcatel-Lucent: 512 bytes

– ISO8473: 1492 bytes

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click Submit .

Result: A progress indication followed by a confirmation is issued in theMessagesection of theModify DCN Parameters page, and the DCN parameters aremodified for the selected NE port.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Management communication setup tasks Tasks related to DCCTo modify DCN parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

To view the DCC in MSP mode

When to use

Use this task to view the settings of DCC in MSP mode for an NE.

If you want to view these settings just for a single port, it is recommended to followthe task“To modify the parameters of a physical or logical port” (p. 6-26).

Important! This task is supported for all CMISE NEs participating in an MSPscheme.

Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:




4. In theFunction field, selectRetrieve/Set DCC in MSP Mode .

5. Click Go.

Result: The DCC in MSP Mode page is displayed. It includes a list of “DCC inMSP mode settings” for an NE.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Management communication setup tasks Tasks related to DCCTo view the DCC in MSP mode

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


4-23

To set the DCC in MSP mode to slave or to independent

When to use

Use this task to set the DCC mode for a port overhead to slave or to independent.

If you want to change the settings just for a single port, it is recommended to followthe task“To modify the parameters of a physical or logical port” (p. 6-26).

Before you begin

Important! If you want to set the DCC mode for a port overhead to slave, theDCN parameters for the port to be used must have been set in advance, followingthe task“To modify the DCC/EOW status for a selected port overhead” (p. 4-20).

Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:




4. In theFunction field, selectRetrieve/Set DCC in MSP Mode .

5. Click Go.

Result: The DCC in MSP Mode page is displayed. It includes a list of “DCC inMSP mode settings” for an NE.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click the radio button next to the DCC in MSP mode setting that you wish to set toslave.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 From theGo menu, selectSet to Slave or Set to Independent , respectively, and clickGo.

Management communication setup tasks Tasks related to DCCTo set the DCC in MSP mode to slave or to independent

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Result: A progress indication followed by a confirmation is issued in theMessagesection of theDCC in MSP Mode page, and the DCC in MSP mode setting is setas requested. If the mode is set to slave, the DCC management traffic is carriedonly on the port carrying traffic. If the mode is set to independent, the DCCmanagement traffic is carried on both the worker and protection ports.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Management communication setup tasks Tasks related to DCCTo set the DCC in MSP mode to slave or to independent

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


4-25

To view a list of overhead access ports

When to use

Use this task to view a list of overhead access ports.

Related information

See also:


Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:



3. In theCategory field, selectData Communication Networks .

4. In theFunction field, selectRetrieve/Set overhead bytes information .

5. Click Go.

Result: The Overhead Access Ports page is displayed. It includes a list ofoverhead access ports.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Management communication setup tasks Tasks related to DCCTo view a list of overhead access ports

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

To view a list of transparent DCC cross-connections

When to use

Use this task to view a list of transparent DCC cross-connections for a selectednetwork element.

Related information

See also:

• “Transparent DCC cross-connections” (p. 3-11)

Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:




4. In theFunction field, selectRetrieve/Set DCC Connections .

5. Click Go.

Result: The DCC Connections page is displayed. It includes a list of transparentDCC cross-connections for the selected NE.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Management communication setup tasks Tasks related to DCCTo view a list of transparent DCC cross-connections

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


4-27

To add a transparent DCC cross-connection

When to use

Use this task to add a transparent DCC cross-connection between two port overheadsin a selected NE.

Related information

See also:


Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:





5. Click Go.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click on theNew tool in the toolbar.

Result: The Add DCC Connection page is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 In the TTP1 Port field, select side A of the transparent DCC cross-connection to becreated. The drop-down list contains all available ports that are able to terminate amultiplex section or regenerator section, respectively.

Management communication setup tasks Tasks related to DCCTo add a transparent DCC cross-connection

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Note that the specified port must not be used for “traditional” DCC processing. Thatmeans DCC must bedisabledfor that port overhead. Follow“To view a list ofoverhead access ports” (p. 4-26)to check the current setting.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 In the TTP1 overhead field, select whether the DCC cross-connection is to beestablished via the multiplex section overhead (MS-OH) or the regenerator sectionoverhead (RS-OH).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 In the TTP2 Port field, select side B of the transparent DCC cross-connection to becreated. The drop-down list contains all available ports that are able to terminate amultiplex section or regenerator section, respectively.

Note that the specified port must not be used for “traditional” DCC processing. Thatmeans DCC must bedisabledfor that port overhead. Follow“To view a list ofoverhead access ports” (p. 4-26)to check the current setting.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 In the TTP2 overhead field, select the same as in theTTP1 overhead field.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Click Submit .

Result: A progress indication followed by a confirmation is issued in theMessagesection of theAdd DCC Connection page, and the transparent DCCcross-connection is added.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Management communication setup tasks Tasks related to DCCTo add a transparent DCC cross-connection

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


4-29

To delete a transparent DCC cross-connection

When to use

Use this task to delete a transparent DCC cross-connection

Related information

See also:


Important! Disconnecting a transparent DCC cross-connection may lead to a lossof association with other network elements.

Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:





5. Click Go.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click the radio button next to the transparent DCC cross-connection you wish todelete.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 From theGo menu, selectDisconnect and clickGo.

Management communication setup tasks Tasks related to DCCTo delete a transparent DCC cross-connection

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Result: A progress indication followed by a confirmation is issued in theMessagesection of theDCC Connections page, and the transparent DCC cross-connectionis disconnected, that is, it is deleted.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Management communication setup tasks Tasks related to DCCTo delete a transparent DCC cross-connection

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


4-31

To view a list of P12sDCC Inband E1 Management Channels

When to use

Use this task to view a list of P12sDCC Inband E1 Management Channels for aselected network element.

Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:




4. In theFunction field, selectRetrieve/Set P12sDCC Inband E1 ManagementChannels .

5. Click Go.

Result: The Retrieve/Set P12sDCC Inband E1 Management Channels pageappears displaying a list of P12sDCC Inband E1 Management Channels for theselected NE.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Management communication setup tasks Tasks related to DCCTo view a list of P12sDCC Inband E1 Management

Channels....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

To modify P12sDCC Inband E1 Management Channelparameters

When to use

Use this task to modify P12sDCC Inband E1 Management Channel parameters.

Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:




4. In theFunction field, selectRetrieve/Set P12sDCC Inband E1 ManagementChannels .

5. Click Go.

Result: The Retrieve/Set P12sDCC Inband E1 Management Channels pageappears displaying a list of P12sDCC Inband E1 Management Channels for theselected NE.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Select the port for which modifications are required.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 From the drop down list, selectModify and clickGo.

Management communication setup tasks Tasks related to DCCTo modify P12sDCC Inband E1 Management Channel

parameters....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


4-33

Result: The P12sDCC Inband E1 Management Channel Parameters pageappears displaying the parameters for the P12sDCC Inband E1 ManagementChannel.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


• DCC: SelectEnabledor Disabledas required. If you disable DCC, theLAPDMode andLAPD Side fields are not available.

• LAPD Mode : SelectUITS or AITS.

• LAPD Side : SelectUser or Network.

• Degraded value selection : SelectValue 1 (300 Errored blocks/s for 7 secs)orValue 2 (300 Errored blocks/s for 7 secs)as required.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click Submit .

Result: A progress indication followed by a confirmation is issued in the messagesection of theP12sDCC Inband E1 Management Channel Parameters page.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Management communication setup tasks Tasks related to DCCTo modify P12sDCC Inband E1 Management Channel

parameters....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

5 5Equipment provisioningconcepts

Overview

Purpose

This chapter presents concept information related to equipment provisioning on 1655Access Multiplexer Universal network elements using OMS.

Contents

1655 Access Multiplexer Universal configuration possibilities 5-1

NE hardware components and their identifiers 5-3

Node creation 5-6

Miscellaneous discrete inputs and outputs 5-8

Equipment protection groups 5-9

1655 Access Multiplexer Universal configuration possibilities

Standard configuration

The 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal is a compact SDH multiplexer, enablingcost-effective STM-1, STM-4, multirate STM-4/16 and STM-16 add/drop multiplexersolutions. Several mechanical variants are defined to target specific applications. The1655 Access Multiplexer Universal 2m/4o has 6 slots (2 × main and 4 × tributary) andis optimized for high capacity and protected central office applications.

The 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal 1m/1o has 2 slots (1 × main and 1× tributary) and is targeted for Customer Premises Equipment (CPE) and unprotectedapplications.

The 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal start-up configuration (shelf plus one mainunit) already supports 2 cages for hot-pluggable STM-1 or STM-4 multirate interfacesand 2 cages for hot-pluggable STM-4 or STM-16 single rate interfaces. In the 1655Access Multiplexer Universal 2m/4o configuration, a second main unit can be fitted forhigh-availability configurations or to increase the amount of interfaces.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


5-1

SDH interfaces

1655 Access Multiplexer Universal supports the synchronous transmission rates155 Mbps (STM-1), 622 Mbps (STM-4), and 2.5 Gbps (STM-16).

In the present release STM-1, STM-4, and STM-16 optical as well as STM-1 electricalinterface types can be realized in a modular way by only changing thesmallform-factor pluggable optics (SFP). Four ports – also referred to as “cages” – on onemain unit are available to plug-in an SFP.

PDH interfaces

The following PDH interfaces can be configured via an option card:

• 16 × 1.5 Mbps

• 2 × 34 Mbps

• 2 × 45 Mbps

• 63 × 2 Mbps

• 4 × 2 Mbps

• 32 × 2 Mbps

• 3 × 34 Mbps

• 3 × 45 Mbps

LAN interfaces

1655 Access Multiplexer Universal supports a variety of Ethernet interfaces, dependingon the option cards in use:

• Up to four 10/100BASE-T LAN interfaces, as part of theTransLAN® EthernetSDH Transport Solution

• Up to eight Ethernet interfaces in Private Line mode

• Up to two Ethernet / Fast Ethernet interfaces and two Ethernet / Fast Ethernet /Gigabit Ethernet interfaces with optional SFP usage for Gigabit Ethernet

• Up to four Ethernet / Fast Ethernet interfaces

Transmission architecture

The principle of the transmission architecture is shown in the following figure.

Equipment provisioning concepts 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal configurationpossibilities

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Possible configurations

Possible configurations are described in more detail in the1655 Access MultiplexerUniversal Application and Planning Guide.

NE hardware components and their identifiers

Component table

Orderable hardware components are shown in the following table. Software needs to beordered together with the network element. To get the ordering information foravailable software versions please contact your local customer team.

Description Item code Shortdescription /Unit type

Comcode

1655 Access Multiplexer Universal main card with 2× multirate STM-1/4 and 2 × STM-1 DC powersupply, one power connector with each main card(CC: 408887883) with strain relief (CC: 408887875)will be delivered.

ASC101B AMU MI-14/4 109555516

1655 Access Multiplexer Universal subrack with 2main and 4 option card slots for vertical mounting

ASH101 AMU Subrack6V (2m/4o)

109509752

Line Ports

LO-Matrix

Tributary Slot(s)

HO-Matrix

Control & Timing

Equipment provisioning concepts 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal configurationpossibilities

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


5-3


Comcode

1655 Access Multiplexer Universal subrack with 1main and 1 option card slot for vertical mounting; nolegacy card is supported. This rack is being replacedby ASH102B.

ASH102 AMU Subrack2V (1m/1o)

109509760

1655 Access Multiplexer Universal subrack, 1 mainand 1 option card slot, vertical and horizontalmounting; no legacy card is supported. For verticalmounting, follow the procedure provided in the1655Access Multiplexer Universal Installation Guide.

ASH102B AMU Subrack2V (1m/1o)

109509778

Adapter card for 1655 Access Multiplexer UniversalFans

ASH104 Fans 109509786

Adapter card for 1655 Access Multiplexer Universalsubrack 6H (2m/4o), horizontal mount

ASH111 horizontalmount,subrack 6H(2m/4o)

109667824

Adapter card for 1655 Access Multiplexer Universalsubrack 2H (1m/1o), horizontal mount

ASH112 horizontalmount,subrack 2H(1m/1o)

109667832

Adapter card for 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal2m/4o subrack for usage of a legacy option board in1655 Access Multiplexer Universal 2m/4o subracks(occupies two slots in subrack)

ASC103 AMU AC-1 109509653

1655 Access Multiplexer Universal E1 option card;63 × E1 (2 Mbit/s), 120Ω

ASC102 AMUPI-E1/63

109509679

1655 Access Multiplexer Universal E1 option card;63 × E1 (2 Mbit/s), 75Ω

ASC104 AMUPI-E1/63-75

109535468

1655 Access Multiplexer Universal Ethernet privateline and E1 option card; 2 × E/FE, 2 × FE/GE, 4× E1 (75 or 120Ω)

ASC105 AMUDI-EPL_E14

109543504

1655 Access Multiplexer Universal Ethernet PL andE1 - 4 E/FE and 32 E1 (120Ω) - EPL4_E132 optioncard

ASC106 E14 E/FE 109543512

1655 Access Multiplexer Universal Ethernet privateline (PL) and E1 option card; 4 × E/FE, 32 × E1(75 Ω)

ASC107 AMUDI-EPL_E13_75

109543520

1655 Access Multiplexer Universal switched Ethernetand E1 option card; 2 × E/FE, 2 × E/FE/GE, 4 × E1(75 or 120 Ω); 8 WAN ports

ASC108 AMUDI-ESW4_E14

109579896

1655 Access Multiplexer Universal STM-1/4 optioncard; switchable 2 × STM-4 or 8 × STM-1

ASC109 AMU SI-14/8 109579904

1655 Access Multiplexer Universal Ethernet PL andE1 - 4 E/FE and 32 E1 (120 W) - EPL4_E132 optioncard

ASC110 AMUMI-16/4 109588954

1655 Access Multiplexer Universal E3/DS3_E14option card

ASC111 AMUE3/DS3_E14

109655225

1655 Access Multiplexer Universal 1 multi-rateSTM-4/STM-16 SFP port

ASC114 AMUMI-16/1 109671149

Equipment provisioning concepts NE hardware components and their identifiers

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


Comcode

1655 Access Multiplexer Universal basic verticalmounting kit ETSI B

ASX001B AMUMountKitETSIB

849029335

1655 Access Multiplexer Universal 1m/1o basicvertical mounting kit 19B for 19 in. racks

ASX002B AMUMountKit19B

849029343

1655 Access Multiplexer Universal 1m/1o horizontalmounting kit for ETSI racks

ASX005B AMUMountKitETSIH

849029350

1655 Access Multiplexer Universal 1m/1o horizontalmounting kit for 19 in. racks

ASX006B AMUMountKit19H

849029368

1655 Access Multiplexer Universal basic mounting kit19B2 for 19 in., 40 mm recessed racks

ASX007B AMUMountKit19B2

849029376

1655 Access Multiplexer Universal fan kit for 6V(2m/4o) subrack, includes 2 × AMU fan

ASX008 AMU Fan Kit 849029384

1655 Access Multiplexer Universal 1m/1o subrackhorizontal mounting kit 19”

ASX009 AMUhorizontalmounting kit19”

849035456

1655 Access Multiplexer Universal fan for 2V(1m/1o) subrack and spare

ASH104 AMU Fan 109509786

1655 Access Multiplexer Universal blank face plate40 mm; to cover unused main slot positions

ASX004 AMUBlankFace40

109509802

1655 Access Multiplexer Universal blank face platefor 32mm; to cover unused option slot positions

ASX003 AMUBlankFace32

109509794

1655 Access Multiplexer Universal fan for 6Hsubrack

ASF101 AMU fan for6H subrack

109667840

1655 Access Multiplexer Universal fan for 2Hsubrack

ASF102 AMU fan for2H subrack

109667857

1655 Access Multiplexer Universal legacy option cards

1655 Access Multiplexer Universal – 8 Ethernetprivate line option card; AMU AC-1 adapter cardrequired to operate in 1655 Access MultiplexerUniversal

X8PL CMC418 109480707

1655 Access Multiplexer Universal – 410/100BASE-T LAN interfaces (TransLAN®) optioncard; AMU AC-1 adapter card required to operate in1655 Access Multiplexer Universal

X4IP-V2 CMC410 108865064

1655 Access Multiplexer Universal – 2 × E3 optioncard

X2E3-V2 CMC407 108756107

1655 Access Multiplexer Universal – 2 × DS3 optioncard; AMU AC-1 adapter card required to operate in1655 Access Multiplexer Universal.

X2DS3-V2 CMC408 108756099

1655 Access Multiplexer Universal – 16 × DS1option card; AMU AC-1 adapter card required tooperate in 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal.

X16DS1 CMC409 108756081

1655 Access Multiplexer Universal SFPs

1655 Access Multiplexer Universal STM-1 S1.1,1310 nm, 15 km

SFP S1.1 OM155T101 109469809


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


5-5


Comcode

1655 Access Multiplexer Universal STM-1 L1.1,1310 nm, 40 km

SFP L1.1 OM155T102 109469825


SFP L1.2 OM155T103 109469817

1655 Access Multiplexer Universal STM-4 S4.1,1310 nm, 15 km

SFP S4.1 OM622T101 109509687


SFP L4.1 OM622T102 109509695


SFP L4.2 OM622T103 109509703

1655 Access Multiplexer Universal STM-1 electrical SFP 155E OM155T104 109543561

1655 Access Multiplexer Universal STM-11500/1310 nm, single fiber bidirectional

SFP SWF1-2 OM155T105 109559492

1655 Access Multiplexer Universal STM-11310/1500 nm, single fiber bidirectional

SFP SWF1-1 OM155T106 109559500

1655 Access Multiplexer Universal Gigabit Ethernet,SX, 850 nm, multi mode, 550 m

SFP GE SX OMGBET101 109526483

1655 Access Multiplexer Universal Gigabit Ethernet,LX, 1300 nm, single mode, 5 to 10 km

SFP GE LX OMGBET102 109526491

1655 Access Multiplexer Universal Gigabit Ethernet,ZX, 1550 nm, single mode, 80 km

SFP GE ZX OMGBET103 109534347

Additional information

More detailed information related to components and other orderable items is availablein the following documents:

• 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal Applications and Planning Guide

• 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal Installation Guide

Node creation

Node

A node is literally “a point at which subsidiary parts originate or center.” So, in otherwords the NE or the node is the central collection point of its various parts. Creating anode means, then, identifying this central point (the NE name and address) andinputting the exact parts comprising the node. All of this information is compiled andstored in the Management Information Base (MIB).


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Management information base

The Management Information Base (MIB)is the provisioning information stored in thedatabase of the NE. This includes the configuration of the units within the NE, thename and type of the NE, as well as addressing information and network informationnecessary for management. In OMS, the MIB is also referred to asNE database.

Confirm MIB

Confirming the MIB will send all of the basic NE information that has been entered tothe system controller. This is an essential step in the creation of the NE.

Update MIB

The MIB can be updated rather than confirmed, if the MIB already exists and therehave been few changes made. This operation can be advantageous as it takesconsiderably less time than that of confirming the MIB.

Isolated state

Arriving from the factory, the 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal is in an isolatedstate. This means that communication via DCN is not possible. In other words, noassociation with the OMS can be established while the network element is in theisolated state.

To enable an association with the OMS, the network element must be brought out ofthe isolated state. To do so, use the ITM-CIT to either change or re-select any of the“Provisioned DCN Information” parameters. Once this is done, the network elementwill be removed from isolation.

MIB management

MIB management includes the following

• Association Management

• Synchronization – including MIB download, MIB upload, MIB image update

Association management

The management system attempts to maintain an association through a set ofassociation states with each NE in its management domain. This association runs overthe data communication network (DCN). The NE and the management system cancommunicate only when the association is active (connected).

The management system allows the user to enable or disable management of the NE.The effect of this command depends on the current association state.

Equipment provisioning concepts Node creation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


5-7

MIB synchronization

The management system can maintain images in its database of each managed NE’sMIB. The MIB is the database located in the NE which has all the configuration datarequired for management of the NE. During normal operations, the NE MIB andmanagement system MIB image of each NE both have the same information withinthem.

During the management of the NEs, communication may be lost between themanagement system and the managed NEs. In order to regain proper managementcontrol, the MIB and MIB image must be synchronized by performing one of thefollowing operations. On association recovery, the management system willautomatically perform the most appropriate option, or let the user decide which toperform.

• MIB upload– the current MIB in the NE is copied to the management system(similar to the process of backing up NE database to the management system)

• MIB download– the current MIB image in the management system is copied overthe MIB in the NE (similar to the process of restoring NE database to the NE).

• Update MIB Image– the management system checks which parts of the NE’s MIBdiffer from the MIB image. The management system then gets the latest copy ofthese parts which will resynchronize the MIB. This is normally quicker thanperforming a full MIB Upload.

• Enable association– make management association with the NE so that it can bemanaged.

• Disable association– release management association with the NE so the NE willno longer be managed.

Miscellaneous discrete inputs and outputs

MDIs and MDOs

A network element containsMiscellaneous Discrete Inputs (MDI)andMiscellaneousDiscrete Outputs (MDO)allowing the network provider to use the system to monitorand control other equipment co-located with the system.

• MDIs are inputs to a network element for external equipment. MDIs can bemonitored by the management system. An MDI can be connected to monitor atemperature sensor or a door contact, for example.

• MDOs are outputs from a network element used to drive external equipment.MDOs can be activated or deactivated by the management system. An MDO can beconnected to control a fan or a generator, for example.

Objective

MDIs can be used to collect status information from other transmission equipment orto monitor external events (for example a door contact).

Equipment provisioning concepts Node creation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

MDOs are used to drive external equipment or to influence the behavior of equipmentexternal to the system.

About

The 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal contains four MDIs and four MDOs.

To help with general purpose surveillance, each network element MDI and MDO canbe given a unique name, which is stored in the management system. The name can beno longer than 26 characters.

The 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal supports a specific alarm supervision via theMDI and MDO contacts which allows to supervise the MDI status of several NEs andsignal an alarm condition via the MDO contact of a dedicated 1655 Access MultiplexerUniversal in a central location without the intervention of a management system.

The user can select between three alarm signaling modes:

• Local alarms signaling

• Centralized alarms signaling

• Centralized MDI signaling.

Outcome

With the MDIs, external events are reported to the management system via the alarmrepresentation. If this event occurs, an alarm is raised. Also, the severity of thesealarms can be set. Once provisioned, MDOs can place external equipment under thecontrol of the system.

Equipment protection groups


1655 Access Multiplexer Universal supports revertive 1+1 equipment protection forfollowing functions of the main unit:

• Cross-connect

• Timing

• Power (that means that the load is shared between both main cards)

• SNCP, MSP

Equipment provisioning concepts Miscellaneous discrete inputs and outputs

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


5-9

1+1 equipment protection switch states

The protection switch states are defined by indicating whether the working orprotection slot is the standby slot and by the group condition (Forced Switched, UnitFailed, Manual Switched, or No Request). The following protection switch states aresupported:

• Forced Switched to Working– The working slot is the standby slot and the groupcondition isForced Switched.

• Unit Failed, Protection– The protection slot is the standby slot and the groupcondition isUnit Failed.

• Unit Failed, Working– The working slot is the standby slot and the groupcondition isUnit Failed.

• Manual Switched to Protection– The protection slot is the standby slot and thegroup condition isManual Switched.

• Manual Switched to Working– The working slot is the standby slot and the groupcondition isManual Switched.

• No Request, Protection– The protection slot is the standby slot and the groupcondition isNo Request.

• No Request, Working– The working slot is the standby slot and the groupcondition isNo Request.

1+1 equipment protection switch requests

The protection switch requests which can be performed by the management system are:

• Clear

• Forced Switch to Working

• Forced Switch to Protection

• Manual Switch to Working

• Manual Switch to Protection

Wait to restore timer

In the case of revertive switching, if the protection slot is active due to a failure in theworking slot and the failure condition clears, then the wait to restore timer is started.When the timer expires the selector is switched back to the preferred working state andthe working slot is made active. Each protection group is provided with its own wait torestore timer, which is provisionable in steps of one minute between 0 and 60 minutes.A newly provisioned value of the wait to restore timer does not take effect until anycurrent timer has expired.

Equipment provisioning concepts Equipment protection groups

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

6 6Equipment provisioningtasks

Overview

Purpose

This chapter informs how to perform the most common tasks related to equipmentprovisioning.

Contents

Provisioning of slots and SFP modules 6-3

To view a list of slots 6-3

To modify a slot 6-5

To select reset options for a slot 6-8

To view a list of SFP modules 6-10

To view SFP module information 6-12

To set the SFP module assignment state 6-15

USB provisioning 6-17

View USB interface information 6-17

View USB device information 6-18

Set the USB interface assignment state 6-19

Port provisioning 6-20

To view a list of physical ports 6-20

To view a list of logical ports 6-21

To view a list of contained logical ports 6-22

To view a list of loopback-enabled ports 6-23

To provision or deprovision a loopback on a port 6-24

To modify the parameters of a physical or logical port 6-26

Parameters for SDH/PDH ports 6-28

Parameters for Ethernet ports 6-33

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


6-1

Parameters for VCG ports 6-37

Data service 6-43

To view Ethernet card information 6-44

To modify Ethernet card information 6-45

To configure IEEE 802.3ah OAM 6-47

To view virtual concatenation groups 6-48

To modify virtual concatenation groups 6-50

To view VC TTPs 6-52

To reset the wait to restore timer for VC TTPs 6-53

MIB management 6-55

To upload the MIB into the management system 6-55

To download the MIB to an NE 6-56

To update the MIB image 6-57

To enable the association with an NE 6-58

To disable the association with an NE 6-59

Provisioning of NE event controls 6-61

To modify NE event controls 6-61

To view NE event parameter settings 6-63

To modify NE event parameter settings 6-64

Provisioning of MDIs and MDOs 6-66

To view a list of MDOs 6-66

To view alarms associated with an MDO 6-67

To modify an MDO 6-68

To view a list of MDIs 6-70

To modify an MDI 6-71

Equipment protection 6-73

To view a list of equipment protection groups 6-73

To add an equipment protection group 6-74

To modify an equipment protection group 6-76

To delete an equipment protection group 6-78

To execute an equipment protection switch 6-79

Equipment provisioning tasks Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Provisioning of slots and SFP modules

To view a list of slots

When to use

Use this task to view a list of slot information for a selected NE.

This task has two methods.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:



3. In theCategory field, selectEquipment .

4. In theFunction field, selectRetrieve/Set Equipment .

5. Click Go.

Result: The Slots page is displayed. It includes a list of slots for the selected NE.

Task, method 2: from the Slots page

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Use the object links to follow this path:Network Elements → Equipment .

Equipment provisioning tasks Provisioning of slots and SFP modulesTo view a list of slots

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


6-3

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Search for Equipment page is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:

1. In theNE type field, select a type of NE.

2. In theNE name field, select the name of the target NE.

3. In theEquipment type field, selectSlot/Circuit pack .

4. For theSearch by field, select the optionEquipment ID .

5. Leave theEquipment ID field empty.

6. Click Search .

Result: The Equipment - Slots/Circuit Packs page appears displaying a list ofslots for the selected NE.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Equipment provisioning tasks Provisioning of slots and SFP modulesTo view a list of slots

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

To modify a slot

When to use

Use this task to modify a slot for a selected network element.

Before you begin

The ports that are related to the slot in question must be free of traffic.

Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:





5. Click Go.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 The Slot column of the table lists the names of the slots. Click the radio button next tothe slot you wish to modify.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 From theGo menu, selectModify .

Equipment provisioning tasks Provisioning of slots and SFP modulesTo modify a slot

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


6-5

Result: The Modify Slot page is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


• Set unit type – select a type of unit from the drop down list to change the unittype:

– 16 DS1 Option Card (CMC409): selects the DS1 option card (16 × DS1,100 Ω), also referred to as X16DS1.

– 2 DS-3 (45 Mbit/s) (CMC408): selects the DS3 option card (2 × DS3), alsoreferred to as X2DS3-V2.

– 2 E-3 (34 Mbit/s) (CMC407): selects the E3 option card (2 × E3), also referredto as X2E3-V2.

– 2 Mbit/s 120 ohm Option Card (ASC102): selects the E1 option card 63 × E1120 Ω, also referred to as PI-E1/63.

– 2 Mbit/s 75 ohm Option Card (ASC104): selects the E1 option card 63 × E175 Ω, also referred to as PI-E1/63-75.

– 2 STM-4 / 8 STM-1 Option Card (ASC109): selects the STM-1/-4 option card,switchable 2 × STM-4 or 8 × STM-1, also referred to as SI-14/8.

– 3 E3/DS3 + 4E1 Card (ASC111): selects E3/DS3 interface port to be E3(34.368Mbit/s) or DS3 (44.736Mbit/s).

– 4 EPL / 32 2Mbit/s Option Card (ASC107): selects the Ethernet private line andE1 option card, also referred to as DI-EPL_E1/4+32-75.

– 4 EPL / 4 2Mbit/s Option Card (ASC105): selects the Ethernet private and E1option card, also referred to as DI-EPL_E1/4+4.

– 4 ESW / 4 2Mbit/s Option Card (ASC108): selects the switched Ethernet and E1option card, also referred to DI-ESW4_E14.

– AMU Adapter Card (ASC103): selects the adapter card for legacy option cardsupport in 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal 2m/4o subrack (occupies twoslots in subrack).

– AMU Main Board (ASC101): selects the 1655 Access Multiplexer Universalmain card.

– AMU Main Board (ASC101B): selects the 1655 Access Multiplexer Universalmain card.

– AMU Main Board (ASC110): selects the 1655 Access Multiplexer Universalmain card.

– AMU FAN UNIT (ASH104): selects the 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal fanunit.

– Ethernet Private Line Opt. Card (CMC418): selects the Ethernet private lineoption card, also referred to as X8PL.

– LAN Interconnect Unit V2 (CMC410): selects the 10/100BASE-T LAN optioncard, also referred to as X4IP-V2.

– AMU Main Card MI-16/1 (ASC114): selects the 1655 AMU main card with onemultirate STM-4/16


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

– 1655 AMU Fan ((ASF101): selects the fan for 6H subrack

– 1655 AMU Fan ((ASF102): selects the fan for 2H subrack

• Slot state – select a radio button to modify the slot state. Possible values areAuto,Assign, or Unassign.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click Submit .

Result: A progress indication followed by a confirmation is issued in theMessagesection of theModify Slot page, and the slot is modified.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


6-7

To select reset options for a slot

When to use

Use this task to reset a slot for the selected network element.

Note: Issuing a rest on the controller of the slot will result in a loss of associationwith the network element.

Before you begin

The ports that are related to the slot in question must be free of traffic.

Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:





5. Click Go.

Result: The Slots page appears displaying a list of slots for the selected NE.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 The Slot column of the table lists the names of the slots. Click the radio button next tothe slot you wish to modify.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 SelectWarm Resetor Cold Resetfrom the drop-down list at the bottom of theSlotswindow and clickGo.

Result: The Modify Slot page is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click Submit .

Equipment provisioning tasks Provisioning of slots and SFP modulesTo select reset options for a slot

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Result: A pop-up appears with the message:

Issuing a reset on the Controller slot will cause a loss ofassociation with the NE. Do you want to continue?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click Yes to confirm the selection.

Result: The selected reset option for the slot is activated.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Equipment provisioning tasks Provisioning of slots and SFP modulesTo select reset options for a slot

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


6-9

To view a list of SFP modules

When to use

Use this task to view a list of small form-factor pluggable optics (SFP) modules for aselected NE.

There are two methods to this task.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:




4. In theFunction field, selectRetrieve/Set SFP Modules .

5. Click Go.

Result: The Search for SFP Modules page is displayed, having the fields forNEtype andNE name preselected.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 For theSlot field, select a slot from the drop-down list, then clickSearch .

Result: The SFP Modules page is displayed. It includes a list of SFP modules forthe selected slot of the selected NE in question.

Equipment provisioning tasks Provisioning of slots and SFP modulesTo view a list of SFP modules

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Task, method 2: from the Slots page

...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:





5. Click Go.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 The Slot column of the table lists the names of the slots. Click the radio button next tothe slot for which you wish to view SFP modules.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 From theGo menu, selectSFP Modules .


...................................................................................................................................................................................................



E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Equipment provisioning tasks Provisioning of slots and SFP modulesTo view a list of SFP modules

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


6-11

To view SFP module information

When to use

Use this task to view SFP information for a selected slot of an NE. This includes datalike module type, serial number, and ordering information.

This task has two methods.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:





5. Click Go.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 The SFP module column of the table lists the names of the SFP modules. Click theradio button next to the SFP module you wish to view.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 From theGo menu, selectView .

Equipment provisioning tasks Provisioning of slots and SFP modulesTo view SFP module information

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Result: The SFP Module details page is displayed, which lists information for theselected SFP module.

Task, method 2: from the Slot list

...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:





5. Click Go.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 The Slot column of the table lists the names of the slots. Click the radio button next tothe respective slot.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 From theGo menu, selectSFP Modules .


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 From theSlot drop-down list, select a slot and clickSearch .


...................................................................................................................................................................................................



....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


6-13

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The SFP Module details page is displayed, which lists information for theselected SFP module.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

To set the SFP module assignment state

When to use

Use this task to set the SFP module assignment state for a selected slot tounassignedwhen the SFP module has been removed.

Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:





5. Click Go.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Result: The SFP Modules page is displayed. It includes a list of SFP modules forthe selected slot of the selected NE in question. TheSFP module column of thetable lists the names of the SFP modules.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click the radio button next to the SFP module you wish to view.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Equipment provisioning tasks Provisioning of slots and SFP modulesTo set the SFP module assignment state

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


6-15

Result: The SFP Module details page is displayed, which lists information for theselected SFP module. TheSFP module column of the table lists the names of theSFP modules.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click the radio button next to the SFP module you wish to view.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 From theGo menu, selectUnassign and clickGo.

Result: A progress indication followed by a confirmation is issued in theMessagesection of theSFP Modules page, and the SFP module assignment state is set toUnassigned.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Equipment provisioning tasks Provisioning of slots and SFP modulesTo set the SFP module assignment state

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

USB provisioning

View USB interface information

When to use

Use this task to view the USB interface information for a selected CMISE NE slot.

Note: This task is supported only for CMISE NEs.

Task

Complete the following steps to view the USB interface information for a selectedCMISE NE slot.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


• Use the icons or the object links to follow this path:Network Elements → NEManagement Functions .

• On the Network Map, right-click the NE upon which you wish to execute amanagement function. From the Node menu, selectSession → NE ManagementFunctions .

• Use the icons or the object links to follow this path:Network Elements . TheNetwork Elements page is displayed. Click the radio button next to the NE towhich you wish to send a management function. From the Go menu, selectNEManagement Functions , and click theGo button.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:

1. In theNE type field, select the type of NE. If you selected the target NE in step 1,this field is already populated with your selection.

2. Select the name of the NE from the list or type the NE name in the text box. Tosearch for an NE name, enter a search string in the text box with a wildcard (*).Click the Find button to locate the NE names that match the search string. If youselected the target NE in Step 1, this field is already populated with your selection.


4. In theFunction field, selectRetrieve/Set USB interfaces .

5. Click theGo button.

Result: The USB Interface Information page is displayed.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Equipment provisioning tasks USB provisioningView USB interface information

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


6-17

View USB device information

When to use

Use this task to view information about the USB device resident in the selected USBinterface.


Task

Complete the following steps to view USB device information.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 View USB interface information using the“View USB interface information” (p. 6-17)task.

Result: The USB Interface Information page is displayed and includes USBinterface information for a selected CMISE NE slot.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 The USB interface column of the table lists the names of the USB interfaces. Clickthe radio button next to the USB interface for which you wish to view USB deviceinformation.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 From theGo menu, selectUSB device information .

Result: The USB Device Information page is displayed.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Equipment provisioning tasks USB provisioningView USB device information

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Set the USB interface assignment state

When to use

Use this task to set the USB interface assignment state for a selected CMISE NE.


Task

Complete the following steps to view USB device information.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 View USB interface information using the“View USB interface information” (p. 6-17)task.

Result: The USB Interface Information page is displayed and includes USBinterface information for a selected CMISE NE slot.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 The USB interface column of the table lists the names of the USB interfaces. Clickthe radio button next to the USB interface for which you wish to set the assignmentstate.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 From theGo menu, selectUnassign USB interface .

Result: The USB interface assignment state is set to Unassigned.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Equipment provisioning tasks USB provisioningSet the USB interface assignment state

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


6-19

Port provisioning

To view a list of physical ports

When to use

Use this task to view a list of physical ports.

Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


• Use the object links to follow this path:Network . The Network Map is displayed.Right-click an NE icon. From the resultingNode menu, selectNetwork Element→ Ports .

• Use the object links to follow this path:Network Elements → Ports .

Result: The Search for Ports page is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Complete the following steps to begin to specify the criteria for your search.


2. In theNE name field, select the name of an NE (if not already present).

3. In thePort type field, selectPhysical .

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 If then

you want the search to return asingle port,

in the Search by field, selectPort ID . In the Port IDfield, enter the port ID. ClickSearch .

you want the search to return alist of multiple ports,

in the Search by field, selectPort list . Select aPortrate and/or aSlot / Circuit Pack . Click Search .

Result: The list at the bottom of thePorts page is populated with a list of ports inthe NE that meet your search criteria.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Equipment provisioning tasks Port provisioningTo view a list of physical ports

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

To view a list of logical ports

When to use

Use this task to view a list of logical ports.

Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................




3. In thePort type field, selectLogical .

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 If then




in the Search by field, selectPort list . Select aPortrate , a Parent port rate , and aSlot / Circuit Pack .Click Search .


E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Equipment provisioning tasks Port provisioningTo view a list of logical ports

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


6-21

To view a list of contained logical ports

When to use

Use this task to view a list of logical ports contained within a physical port.

Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................




3. In thePort type field, selectLogical .

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 If then




in the Search by field, selectPort list . Select a portrate, parent port rate, and a slot/circuit pack. ClickSearch .


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 The Native name column of the table lists the names of the physical or logical ports.Click the radio button next to the port for which you wish to view contained logicalports.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 From theGo menu, selectDisplay all contained ports or one of the menu options todisplay contained ports of a certain rate, and clickGo.

Result: The list at the bottom of thePorts page is populated with a list of thelogical ports contained in the physical or logical port.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Equipment provisioning tasks Port provisioningTo view a list of contained logical ports

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

To view a list of loopback-enabled ports

When to use

Use this task to view a list of loopback-enabled ports.

Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


• Use the object links to follow this path:Network . The Network Map is displayed.Right-click an NE icon. From the resultingNode menu, selectNetwork Elements→ Ports .


Result: The Ports page is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Complete the following steps to specify the criteria for your search:


2. In theNE name field, enter the name of the NE from the drop-down menu.

3. In theSearch by field, click the radio buttonPort list .

4. In thePort type field, click the radio buttonPhysical .

5. Make a selection in thePort rate and theSlot / Circuit pack fields.Note: If the “Slot / Circuit pack” field is not selectable, change the selection of thePort rate and try again.

6. In theFilter by field, click the check-box next toLoopback provisioned .

7. Click Search .

Result: The Ports panel is populated at the bottom containing a list of records thatmeet your search criteria.

If the list is empty, no loopbacks are provisioned.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Equipment provisioning tasks Port provisioningTo view a list of loopback-enabled ports

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


6-23

To provision or deprovision a loopback on a port

When to use

Use this task to provision or deprovision a loopback on a port.

CAUTION

Service-disruption hazard

Provisioning a loopback may result in a disruption of traffic, timing, and the possibleloss of DCN connections.

Before you begin

Loopback is supported only on physical ports.

Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................




3. In thePort type field, selectPhysical .

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 If then




in the Search by field, selectPort list . Select aPortrate , a Parent port rate , and aSlot / Circuit Pack .Click Search .

Equipment provisioning tasks Port provisioningTo provision or deprovision a loopback on a port

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 The Native name column of the table lists the names of the ports. Click the radiobutton next to the port on which you wish to provision loopback.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 From theGo menu, selectProvision loopback and clickGo.

Result: The Loopback Provisioning page is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 In the Loopback type field, click the radio button in either of the following fields:

• Inloop Loopback

• Outloop Loopback

Result: The Operation field changes toProvision or Deprovision , depending onyour selection, and whether an inloop loopback or outloop loopback is provisionedon the port.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 In the Operation field, selectProvision or Deprovision and clickSubmit .

Important! The NE will reject loopback creation if the port is in service.

Result: A confirmation window is displayed asking you to confirm the provisioningor deprovisioning.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Click Yes.

Result: A progress indication followed by a confirmation is issued in theMessagesection of the page, and the loopback is provisioned or deprovisioned on the port.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Equipment provisioning tasks Port provisioningTo provision or deprovision a loopback on a port

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


6-25

To modify the parameters of a physical or logical port

When to use

Use this task to modify the parameters of a port.

CAUTION


Modification of port parameters may be traffic affecting.

Before starting to modify port parameters, make sure that the port is not in use. Thetraffic provided on the respective path must have previously been removed (for examplererouted to another path).

Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................



2. In theNE name field, select the name of an NE.

3. In thePort type field, selectPhysical or Logical , respectively, depending on thetype of port you want to modify.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 If then




in the Search by field, selectPort list . Select a portrate, parent port rate, and a slot/circuit pack. ClickSearch .

Equipment provisioning tasks Port provisioningTo modify the parameters of a physical or logical port

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 The Native name column of the table lists the names of the ports. Each name is ahyperlink.


• Click the name of the port you wish to modify.

• Click the radio button next to the port you wish to modify. From the Go menu,selectView/Modify port parameters and clickGo.

Result: The Port page is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Change the entries or selections for any modifiable port parameters.

Detailed information about the parameters to be modified and the possible values isprovided in the following sections:

• “Parameters for SDH/PDH ports” (p. 6-28)

• “Parameters for Ethernet ports” (p. 6-33)

• “Parameters for VCG ports” (p. 6-37)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 If an EPL_E1/4+4 (ASC105) or ESW4_E14 (ASC108) option card is used, ports 7, 8,9, and 10 can be used as Ethernet, Fast Ethernet, Gigabit Ethernet port pairs. On thePhysical Ports page, theState column indicates which port is active or inactive.

To change the active port of a E/FE/GbE LAN port pair on these option cards, selectActivate Port from theGo menu and clickGo.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Click Submit .

Result: A confirmation window is displayed asking you to confirm themodification.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Click Yes.

Result: The port parameters are modified, and a confirmation is issued in theMessages panel. TheJob Updates page is displayed and reports the status of themodification of the port parameters.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Equipment provisioning tasks Port provisioningTo modify the parameters of a physical or logical port

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


6-27

Parameters for SDH/PDH ports

Introduction

This section lists the parameters that can be modified for SDH or PDH ports. Not allparameters and possible values apply to all port types, plug-in units, and networkelement configurations.

For a number of parameters, the network elements can report the valuenot applicable.This value is for information purposes only, it cannot be entered.

Transmission

In the Transmission section of thePort page, the following parameters can bemodified:

Parameter Function Possible values

Port mode Indicates the monitoring state of thespecified port.

Depending on the port rate and typethe following values are possible:

• on – the port is being monitored.

• auto – the port is ready totransition into a monitored state,when a signal is detected.

• off – the port is not beingmonitored.

Auto mode hold time (min) For physical ports with port mode setto auto, this parameter defines the timeperiod (in minutes), for which anincoming signal must be maintainedfor the port mode to automaticallytransition toon.

Integer in the range from 0 to 30.

Inloop/Facility loopback The field name is a hyperlink. Tocreate or delete a loopback, click thelink and follow the task“To provisionor deprovision a loopback on a port”(p. 6-24).

Outloop/Terminal loopback The field name is a hyperlink. Tocreate or delete a loopback, click thelink and follow the task“To provisionor deprovision a loopback on a port”(p. 6-24) .

MS DCC Controls the data communicationchannel (DCC) in the overhead relatedto the multiplex section terminated atthe port.

enabled, disabled.

RS DCC Controls the data communicationchannel (DCC) in the overhead relatedto the regenerator section terminated atthe port.

enabled, disabled.

MS LAPD role Defines the role of the port in case theMS DCC is enabled.

network, user.

Equipment provisioning tasks Port provisioningParameters for SDH/PDH ports

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


RS LAPD role Defines the role of the port in case theRS DCC is enabled.

network, user.

MS LAPD mode Defines the LAPD mode of the port incase the MS DCC is enabled.

UITS, AITS.

RS LAPD mode Defines the LAPD mode of the port incase the RS DCC is enabled.

UITS, AITS.

MS MSP DCC Controls the MSP protected datacommunication channel (DCC) in theoverhead related to the multiplexsection terminated at the port.

enabled, disabled.

RS MSP DCC Controls the MSP protected datacommunication channel (DCC) in theoverhead related to the regeneratorsection terminated at the port.

enabled, disabled.

MS MSP DCC mode Used to select the operation mode ofthe MSP protected DCC (if enabled) inthe overhead related to the multiplexsection terminated at the port.

independent, via MSP.

RS MSP DCC mode Used to select the operation mode ofthe MSP protected DCC (if enabled) inthe overhead related to the regeneratorsection terminated at the port.

independent, via MSP.

MS MSP LAPD role Used to select the role of the port incase the MS MSP DCC is enabled.

network, user.

RS MSP LAPD role Used to select the role of the port incase the RS MSP DCC is enabled.

network, user.

MS MSP LAPD mode Defines the LAPD mode of the port incase the MS MSP DCC is enabled.

UITS, AITS.

RS MSP LAPD mode Defines the LAPD mode of the port incase the RS MSP DCC is enabled.

UITS, AITS.

Port impedance Selects the impedance value of a2-Mbps port.

75 – 75 Ω; 120 – 120 Ω.

ISDN mode This parameter defines the ISDNmode, if applicable. It determines the2-Mbps signal mapping.

• non-ISDN– no ISDN processingat the respective port.

• ISDN-STD– ISDN standard mode.

• ISDN-LL – ISDN leased linemode.

Ingress PDH monitoring Controls the TS0 monitoring of theincoming signal.

disabled– TS0 monitoring turned off;enabled– TS0 monitoring turned on.

Egress PDH monitoring Controls the TS0 monitoring of theoutgoing signal.

disabled– TS0 monitoring turned off;enabled– TS0 monitoring turned on.

Line coding Defines the line coding of the signal ata DS1 port.

B8ZS(bipolar with eight-zerosubstitution),AMI (alternate markinversion).

Cable length (m) Cable length connected to the DS1 orDS3 PTP.

0-40, 40-80, 80-120, 120-160,160-200.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


6-29


RDI/REI insertion For a trail termination point, thissetting enables or disables theremotedefect indicator (RDI)and remoteerror indicator (REI) in the pathoverhead.

enabled, disabled, notSpecified,notApplicable (fixed)

Trace information

In the Trace Information section of thePort page, the following parameters can bemodified:


Transmitted trail trace format Selects the format of the transmittedtrail trace identifier (TTI).

Depending on the port and signal type,a subset of the following:

• non-specific byte– a single bytewith a fixed hexadecimal value of0x00 (ITU/ETSI mode 2).

• specific byte (1-byte string)– asingle byte (hexadecimal formatusing the printable T.50/ASCIIcharacter set) (SONET mode).

• 16-byte string– a 16-byteshexadecimal format using theprintable T.50/ASCII character set,with the first byte being a CRC-7(ITU/ETSI mode 1).

• 64-byte string– a 64-byteshexadecimal format using theprintable T.50/ASCII character set,with the last two bytes being acarriage return, line feed(SONET).

Transmitted trail trace value If the transmitted trail trace formatparameter is set tospecific byte (1-bytestring), 16-byte string, or 64-bytestring, the transmitted character stringis set here. Since the possible valuesdepend on the setting of thetransmitted trace display modeparameter, Alcatel-Lucent recommendsto set that parameter in advance.

The field name is a hyperlink. Click itto open a window where you can enterthe desired string.

Transmitted trace display mode If the transmitted trail trace formatparameter is set tospecific byte (1-bytestring), 16-byte string, or 64-bytestring, the format of the transmittedcharacter string is set here.

ascii, hex.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


Expected trail trace format Selects the format of the expected trailtrace identifier (TTI).






Expected trail trace value If the expected trail trace formatparameter is set tospecific byte (1-bytestring), 16-byte string, or 64-bytestring, the transmitted character stringis set here. Since the possible valuesdepend on the setting of theexpectedtrace display modeparameter,Alcatel-Lucent recommends to set thatparameter in advance.


Expected trace display mode If the expected trail trace formatparameter is set tospecific byte (1-bytestring), 16-byte string, or 64-bytestring, the format of the expectedcharacter string is set here.

ascii, hex.

Accepted trace display mode Sets the format of the acceptedcharacter string.

ascii, hex.

Trail trace mismatch detection mode Controls the detection mode. enabled, disabled.

Consequent action on trail tracemismatch

Enables or disables consequent actionin case of a trace identifier mismatchdetection. For SDH: This function isonly supported if the related trace readformat is set to16-byte string.

enabled, disabled.

Timing

In the Timing section of thePort page, the following parameters can be modified:


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


6-31


Timing mode Controls the retiming of a 2-Mbpsport.

Possible values are:

• self-timed– the signal is sent out,from the port in theself-timedmode.

• re-timed– the timing of the2-Mbps output signal is derivedfrom the NE system timing; the2-Mbps signal is routed throughthe elastic buffer.

• not applicable

Acceptance quality level If retiming is enabled, this parametersets the acceptance quality level.

If the system quality level(in case ofsystem timing) or the QL-out (in caseof independent timing) falls below theacceptance quality level, the timingwill go into the fallback mode.

This parameter is dependent on thetiming mode. When timing modeis setto re-timed, then all values exceptnotapplicableare valid. Whentimingmodeis not set tore-timed, then notapplicable is the only valid value.

Possible values are:

• PRC – Primary Reference Clock

• SSU-T– Synchronization SupplyUnit-Transit

• SSU-L– Synchronization SupplyUnit-Local

• SEC– SDH equipment clock

• not applicable

Fallback mode If a port is operating in there-timedmode and if theQL modeis enabled,the output is automatically switched tothe provisionedfallback mode, if thequality level of the system timingdrops below theacceptance qualitylevel.

This parameter is dependent on thetiming mode. When timing modeis setto re-timed, then all values exceptnotapplicableare valid. Whentimingmodeis not set tore-timed, then notapplicable is the only valid value.

The threefallback modes are:

• re-timed AIS– a re-timed AIS issent out.

• self-timed– the signal is sent out,from the port in theself-timedmode.

• none– no fallback applies.

• not applicable

Timing alarm reporting When thetiming stateof a tributaryoutput port isfallback, a defect isdeclared. The reporting of thistimingalarm can beenabledor disabledforeach individual output port. This isdone with thetiming alarm reportingparameter.

reported, not reported, not applicable.

ForceDNU Force DNU allows to force an S1-bytevalue DNU into an outgoing signal.When an outgoing signal is forced tocarry DNU, this signal cannot be usedfor synchronization by another NE.

reported, not reported, not applicable.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Fault management

In the Fault Management section of thePort page, the following parameters can bemodified:


Degraded value selection Selects one of the two availablethreshold definitions for the degradedsignal (DEG) condition for the givenlayer rate.

1, 2.

Local NUT Defines the protected or unprotectedstatus of the VC-4 timeslot in thecontext of a MS-SPRing protectionscheme.

protected, not protected.

Ingress PDH degraded value selection This parameter indicates (inconjunction with the setting of theIngress PDH monitoringparameter) thenumber of errors (EB: Errored Blocks)that can occur during the given periodfor the incoming signal. If this numberis exceeded and the port mode is set tomonitored, a signal degrade alarm isgenerated. A choice can be madebetween two pre-defined thresholds.

not applicable, 1, 2.

Parameters for Ethernet ports

Introduction

This section lists the parameters that can be modified for Ethernet ports. Not allparameters and possible values apply to all port types, plug-in units, and networkelement configurations.


Transmission









....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


6-33


Auto mode hold time (min) For physical ports with port mode setto auto, this parameter defines the timeperiod (in minutes), for which anincoming signal must be maintainedfor the port mode to automaticallytransition toon.


MAC address learning mode Defines the learning and forwardingmethod for received Ethernet frames.

• automaticmodeon: the sourceaddress of the frame will beautomatically learned (that is,dynamic MAC address entry iscreated or updated within theforwarding table). If there existsalready a dynamic or static MACaddress matching the destinationaddress and vlanId of the frame, itwill be forwarded according to thetable entry; otherwise the framewill be forwarded to all outputports of the virtual switch, exceptthe port where the frame wasreceived.

• automaticmodeoff: received framesare not treated as input of theautomatic learning process. Thepacket will be handled in thefollowing way:

– If there exists not adynamic or static MACaddress matching thesource address and vlanIdof the frame, the framewill be dropped andtrapped into the CPU. Atrap control reduces thetraffic to the CPU to oneMAC Address per second,which will be displayed inthe Mismatched MACAddress List .

– If there exists a dynamicor static MAC addressmatching the destinationaddress and vlanId of theframe, it will be forwardedaccording to the tableentry.

• notapplicable: attribute is notapplicable in currentlanCTP/wanCTP provisioningcontext; that is, lan CTP/ wanCTP is not member of a virtualswitch operating in spanning treemode.

Equipment provisioning tasks Port provisioningParameters for Ethernet ports

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


Mismatched MAC address list For an Ethernet port which has itsMAC address learning modeturnedoff, and is a member of a virtualswitch in thespanning treemode, thisparameter specifies a set of sourceMAC addresses for which Ethernetframes have been dropped on accountof there being no matching static ordynamic entry in the forwarding tableduring the current observation period.

A list of MAC addresses where eachaddress is represented as a string of 12characters, where each character is theASCII representation of a hexadecimaldigit.

Link pass through consequent actionmode

Defines thelink pass throughconsequent action active modefor aLAN PTP which is involved in apoint-to-point service over the WAN.

active, inactive, inactive (fixed).

Port label Assigns a user specified name to thePTP.

String.

Provisioned interface type Indicates the provisioned interfacesignal for switchable interfaces.

100Base FX, 1000Base FX, unexpectedinterface type.

Provisioned bit rate (Mb/s) For a port operating withauto-negotiation disabled, this settingdefines the bit rate which isprovisioned for the port (in Mbps).

10, 100, 1000, not applicable.

Provisioned duplex mode For a port operating withauto-negotiation disabled, this settingdefines the duplex mode which isprovisioned for the port.

half duplex, full duplex, notapplicable.

Provisioned pause mode The applicable pause mode. enabled, disabled, not applicable.

Auto negotiation mode Controls the auto-negotiation mode. enabled, disabled.

Auto negotiation for pause mode Defines whether the transmission ofPAUSE frames (flow control) and theprocessing of received PAUSE framesshould be disabled or should beauto-negotiated by the PTP.

pause mode disabled, auto-negotiate,auto-negotiate (fixed).

Default user priority The default priority for the port. Integer in the range from 0 to 7.

Ingress filtering mode For a LAN or WAN TP which isoperating under tagging mode“ieee8021Q”, but not in repeater mode,this setting defines the VLAN filteringof packets received at theEthernet-switch port. If the parameteris set to “enabled”, the port discardsall incoming packets which areassigned to VLANs which do notregister the given port.

enabled, disabled.

Egress bandwidth shaper Used to shape the egress data rate atthe output of a “switch port”.

Integer (representing kbps),notapplicable.

Auto path cost Controls whether the port path cost canchange dynamically as a result of thechanges to auto-negotiation status,VCG capacity, and so on

true, false.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


6-35


Acceptable frame type For a LAN or WAN TP which isoperating under tagging mode“ieee8021Q”, but not in repeater mode,this parameter defines whether the TPwill accept or drop untagged packets.

only VLANtagged, all frames.

Spanning tree

In the Spanning Tree section of thePort page, the following parameters can bemodified:


STP port priority The priority of the port for thespanning tree protocol.


Port path cost The port path cost. For a port with thespanning tree protocol active, thisparameter defines the contribution ofthis port to the path cost of pathstoward the spanning tree root whichincluded this port.

Integer.

Port path cost details

According to IEEE 802.1Q 1998, this parameter should be related to the bandwidth ofthe link in which the port participates. Link speed is mapped to port path costs asfollows:

Link speed Path cost

2 Mbps 10,000,000

4 Mbps 5,000,000

6 Mbps 3,400,000

8 Mbps 2,500,000

10 Mbps 2,000,000

50 Mbps 400,000

100 Mbps 200,000

1 Gbps 20,000

10 Gbps 2,000


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Parameters for VCG ports

Introduction

This section lists the parameters that can be modified for VCG ports. Not allparameters and possible values apply to all port types, plug-in units, and networkelement configurations.


Transmission








LCAS state sink For a VC-n TTP which is capable ofbeing allocated to a virtuallyconcatenated group for which LCASsupport is available, this parameterindicates the service state of the VC-n

TTP sink with respect to itsparticipation in a virtuallyconcatenated group.

not applicable, unavailable, failed,active, wait to restore, add.

LCAS mode The operation mode of the linkcapacity adjustment scheme (LCAS)for this VCG.

on, off.

LCAS hold-off time (ms) The LCAS hold-off time. If a tributaryis configured to be a member of theVCG, and a fault is detected for thattributary, then it is taken out oftransmission by LCAS after the holdoff time. By means of differenthold-off times, it can be defined whichprotection should switch first. Thehold-off time is configured on grouplevel, that means all tributaries of aVCG have the same hold-off time.

Integer in the range from 0 to 10000in steps of 100.

Equipment provisioning tasks Port provisioningParameters for VCG ports

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


6-37


LCAS wait to restore time (min) The LCAS wait-to-restore (WTR) time.If a tributary is configured to be amember of the VCG, and that tributaryrecovers from a faulty state then it istaken in again to transmission byLCAS after the wait-to-restore time.The wait-to-restore time is configuredon group level, that means alltributaries of a VCG have the samewait-to-restore time.


Encapsulation mode The method of encapsulation foradapting asynchronous Ethernet trafficover synchronous TDM traffic.

unknown, Ethernet over SDH, linkaccess procedure SDH, genericframing procedure

Encapsulation mode determination For a VCG/WAN TP, this settingdefines the method of determinationfor the Ethernet encapsulation mode.

provisioned, automatic.

Source CIR (100 Kb/s) For a VCG/WAN TP in an EthernetPrivate line unit, this parameter definesthe committed information rate (CIR)for the source direction of the TP.Customer frames in the sourcedirection will be dropped when thesource CIR is exceeded.

If the value exceeds the capacity, thenthe setting has no effect, since excessframes will be dropped owing to queueoverflow.

The unit used is 100 kbps.

Sink CIR (100 Kb/s) For a VCG/WAN TP in an EthernetPrivate line unit, this parameter definesthe committed information rate (CIR)for the sink direction of the TP.Customer frames in the sink directionwill be dropped when the sink CIR isexceeded.

If the value exceeds the capacity, thenthe setting has no effect, since theWAN link will be unable to deliverframes to the rate given.

The unit used is 100 kbps.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


MAC address learning mode Defines the learning and forwardingmethod for received Ethernet frames.

• automaticmodeon: the sourceaddress of the frame will beautomatically learned (that is,dynamic MAC address entry iscreated or updated within theforwarding table). If there existsalready a dynamic or static MACaddress matching the destinationaddress and vlanId of the frame, itwill be forwarded according to thetable entry; otherwise the framewill be forwarded to all outputports of the virtual switch, exceptthe port where the frame wasreceived.

• automaticmodeoff: received framesare not treated as input of theautomatic learning process. Thepacket will be handled in thefollowing way:

– If there exists not adynamic or static MACaddress matching thesource address and vlanIdof the frame, the framewill be dropped andtrapped into the CPU. Atrap control reduces thetraffic to the CPU to oneMAC Address per second,which will be displayed inthe Mismatched MACAddress List .

– If there exists a dynamicor static MAC addressmatching the destinationaddress and vlanId of theframe, it will be forwardedaccording to the tableentry.

• notapplicable: attribute is notapplicable in currentlanCTP/wanCTP provisioningcontext; that is, lan CTP/ wanCTP is not member of a virtualswitch operating in spanning treemode.

Mismatched MAC address list For an Ethernet port which has itsmACAddressLearningModeturned off,and is a member of a virtualSwitch inthe spanning treemode, this parameterspecifies a set of source MACaddresses for which Ethernet frameshave been dropped on account of therebeing no matching static or dynamicentry in the forwarding table duringthe current observation period.

A list of MAC addresses where eachaddress is represented as a string of 12characters, where each character is theASCII representation of a hexadecimaldigit.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


6-39


Default user priority The default priority for the port. Integer in the range from 0 to 7.

Ingress filtering mode For a LAN or WAN TP which isoperating under tagging mode“ieee8021Q”, but not in repeater mode,this setting defines the VLAN filteringof packets received at theEthernet-switch port. If the parameteris set to “enabled”, the port discardsall incoming packets which areassigned to VLANs which do notregister the given port.

enabled, disabled.

Egress bandwidth shaper Used to shape the egress data rate atthe output of a “switch port”.

Integer (representing kbps),notapplicable.

Auto path cost Controls whether the port path cost canchange dynamically as a result of thechanges to auto-negotiation status,VCG capacity, etc.

true, false.

Acceptable frame type For a LAN or WAN TP which isoperating under tagging mode“ieee8021Q”, but not in repeater mode,this parameter defines whether the TPwill accept or drop untagged packets.

only VLANtagged, all frames.

Trace information

In the Trace Information section of thePort page, the following parameters can bemodified:


Transmitted trail trace format Selects the format of the transmittedtrail trace identifier (TTI).







....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


Transmitted trail trace value If the transmitted trail trace formatparameter is set tospecific byte (1-bytestring), 16-byte string, or 64-bytestring, the transmitted character stringis set here. Since the possible valuesdepend on the setting of thetransmitted trace display modeparameter, it is recommended to setthat parameter in advance.


Transmitted trace display mode If the transmitted trail trace formatparameter is set tospecific byte (1-bytestring), 16-byte string, or 64-bytestring, the format of the transmittedcharacter string is set here.

ascii, hex.

Expected trail trace format Selects the format of the expected trailtrace identifier (TTI).






Expected trail trace value If the expected trail trace formatparameter is set tospecific byte (1-bytestring), 16-byte string, or 64-bytestring, the transmitted character stringis set here. Since the possible valuesdepend on the setting of theexpectedtrace display modeparameter,Alcatel-Lucent recommends to set thatparameter in advance.


Expected trace display mode If the expected trail trace formatparameter is set tospecific byte (1-bytestring), 16-byte string, or 64-bytestring, the format of the expectedcharacter string is set here.

ascii, hex.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


6-41


Trail trace mismatch detection mode Controls the detection mode. enabled, disabled.

Consequent action on trail tracemismatch

Enables or disables consequent actionin case of a trace identifier mismatchdetection. For SDH: This function isonly supported if the related trace readformat is set to16-byte string.

enabled, disabled.

Accepted trace display mode Sets the format of the acceptedcharacter string.

ascii, hex.

Spanning tree

In the Spanning Tree section of thePort page, the following parameters can bemodified:


STP port priority The priority of the port for thespanning tree protocol.


Port path cost The port path cost. For a port with thespanning tree protocol active, thisparameter defines the contribution ofthis port to the path cost of pathstoward the spanning tree root whichincluded this port.

Integer.

Port path cost details

According to IEEE 802.1Q 1998, this parameter should be related to the bandwidth ofthe link in which the port participates. Link speed is mapped to port path costs asfollows:

Link speed Path cost

2 Mbps 10,000,000

4 Mbps 5,000,000

6 Mbps 3,400,000

8 Mbps 2,500,000

10 Mbps 2,000,000

50 Mbps 400,000

100 Mbps 200,000

1 Gbps 20,000

10 Gbps 2,000


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Data service

Overview

Purpose

This section discusses Ethernet card provisioning and VCG provisioning.

Contents

To view Ethernet card information 6-44

To modify Ethernet card information 6-45

To configure IEEE 802.3ah OAM 6-47

To view virtual concatenation groups 6-48

To modify virtual concatenation groups 6-50

To view VC TTPs 6-52

To reset the wait to restore timer for VC TTPs 6-53

Equipment provisioning tasks Data serviceOverview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


6-43

To view Ethernet card information

When to use

Use this task to view Ethernet card information on a selected NE.

Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:



3. In theCategory field, selectData services .

4. In theFunction field, selectRetrieve/Set Ethernet Card Information .

5. Click Go.

Result: The Ethernet Cards page is displayed.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Equipment provisioning tasks Data serviceTo view Ethernet card information

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

To modify Ethernet card information

When to use

Use this task to modify Ethernet card information.

Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:





5. Click Go.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click the radio button next to the slot you wish to modify.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 From theGo menu, selectModify and clickGo.

Result: The Modify Ethernet Card page is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Change the entries or selections for any modifiable port parameters. Depending on thetype of plug-in unit used and on the setting of theTagging mode, not all options apply.

• Tagging mode – select theTransparent or the IEEE 802.1Q/IEEE 802.1ad radiobutton.

• Ingress Expected TPID Value – specify the relevant value if you wish to definethe TPID (Ethertype) translation function. Possible values are: 0x600 to 0xFFFF.This field is not displayed if Tagging mode is set toTransparent.

Equipment provisioning tasks Data serviceTo modify Ethernet card information

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


6-45

• Egress Transmitted TPID Value – specify the relevant value as EtherType in theegress direction. Possible values are: 0x600 to 0xFFFF. This field is not displayedif Tagging mode is set toTransparent.

• Priority code point selection egress/ingress map – specify the map defining foreach possible incoming value of the P bits (user priority) and CFI bit (canonicalformat identifier). Select values from the drop down list, or select “Non-standard”for manual mapping.

• Priority code point selection ingress map out vectors – specify the map vectorsfor each possible incoming value of the P bits (user priority) and CFI bit (canonicalformat identifier). A value can be entered if “Non-standard” is selected in thePriority code point selection egress/ingress map field. Otherwise the values areread-only.

• Priority code point selection egress map out vectors – specify the map vectorsfor each possible incoming value of the P bits (user priority) and CFI bit (canonicalformat identifier). A value can be entered if “Non-standard” is selected in thePriority code point selection egress/ingress map field. Otherwise the values areread-only.

• Aging pass timer – enter the period of expiration of a dynamic MAC address ofthe forwarding table. A dynamic MAC address is removed from the forwardingtable if theaging pass timerhas elapsed since the entry has been created orupdated within the forwarding table. Possible values are: 10 to 630 in steps of 10seconds. This field is only applicable for dynamic MAC addresses advertised viathe standard Ethernet automatic learning process. Dynamic MAC addressesadvertised via Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP snooping) are notcovered.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click Submit .

Result: A progress indication followed by a confirmation is issued in theMessagesection of theModify Ethernet Card page, and the Ethernet card is modified.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Equipment provisioning tasks Data serviceTo modify Ethernet card information

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

To configure IEEE 802.3ah OAM

When to use

Use this task to enable/disable IEEE Std. 802.3ah OAM on any supported port.

Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................




...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:

• In the NE type field, select a type of NE (if not already present).

• In the NE name field, select the name of the target NE (if not already present).

• In the Category field, selectData services .

• In the Function field, selectRetrieve/Set Ethernet Ports .

• Click Go.

Result: The Ethernet Ports page is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Do the following:

• Select the appropriate slot from theSlot field.

• Select the appropriate virtual switch from theVirtual Switch name field.

• In the Port Type field, mark theLAN check box and clickSearch .

Result: The Ethernet Ports page displays a list of Ethernet ports.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 In the Ethernet Ports page, selectIEEE 802.3ah configurationand clickGo.

Result: The Ethernet Ports page displays the details of Ethernet port informationand IEEE 802.3ah configuration.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 In the Admin state field, mark theEnabled check box.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click Submit to activate the 802.3ah Link OAM.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Equipment provisioning tasks Data serviceTo configure IEEE 802.3ah OAM

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


6-47

To view virtual concatenation groups

When to use

Use this task to view virtual concatenation group (VCG) information for an NE slot.


Task, method 1: from the Ethernet Card Information page

...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:





5. Click Go.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click the radio button next to the slot for which you wish to view VCG information.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 From the Go menu, selectVCG Information and clickGo.

Result: The Virtual Concatenation Groups page is displayed.

Equipment provisioning tasks Data serviceTo view virtual concatenation groups

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Task, method 2: from the NE Management Functions page

Complete the following steps to view virtual concatenation group information.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:




4. In theFunction field, selectRetrieve/Set VCG Information .

5. Click Go.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 In the Slot field, select the slot from the drop down list for which you wish to viewvirtual concatenation group information.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click Search .

Result: The virtual concatenation group information is displayed in the table below.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Equipment provisioning tasks Data serviceTo view virtual concatenation groups

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


6-49

To modify virtual concatenation groups

When to use

Use this task to modify virtual concatenation groups.

Based on the Ethernet card support, different fields are displayed for modification. Thefollowing are the types of Ethernet cards which apply:

• Ethernet card which supports LCAS

• Ethernet card which does not support LCAS

Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:





5. Click Go.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click the radio button next to the VCG you wish to modify.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Equipment provisioning tasks Data serviceTo modify virtual concatenation groups

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Result: The Modify Virtual Concatenation Group page is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 For Ethernet cards thatdo support LCAS, the following fields can be modified:

• VC TTP view – select the VC TTP view. Possible values are:

– Separate Sink/Source

– Combined Sink/SourceIf Separate Sink/Sourceis selected, then separate lists forSource Available andSource Selected andSink Available and Sink Selected are displayed in theVC-N TTP window. If Combined Sink/Sourceis selected then combined lists forSource/Sink Available andSource/Sink Selected are displayed (each entrycovers both source and sink).

• VCG type – select the VCG type. Possible values are:VC-4, VC-3, or VC-12.

• TTP mode – select the TTP mode. Possible values are:monitoredor not monitored.

• Encapsulation State – select the encapsulation state. Possible values are:automaticor manual.

• Encapsulation Mode – select the method of encapsulation for adaptingasynchronous Ethernet traffic over synchronous TDM traffic. Possible values are:GFP (generic framing procedure) orEoS(Ethernet over SDH).

• LCAS Mode – selectenabledor disabled.

• LCAS WTR time (mins) – enter the LCAS wait to restore time in minutes.Possible range is 0 minutes to 60 minutes.

• LCAS Hold-off (secs) – enter the LCAS hold-off time in seconds. Possible rangeis 0 seconds to 10 seconds in incremental steps of 100 milliseconds.The default hold-off timer is set to zero to allow fast LCAS protection. This meansthat LCAS will act immediately upon disruptions. If the LCAS group (which is aprotection mechanism) is protected by a higher protection layer like SNCP, thehold-off timer should be set to a value (100 ms or higher) that allows SNCprotection to happen before LCAS protection. If you want a double protection, setthe hold-off timer accordingly.

• CIR Ingress (kbit/s) – enter the ingress committed information rate (CIR).

• CIR Engress (kbit/s) – enter the egress committed information rate (CIR).

For Ethernet cards that donot support LCAS, the following fields can be modified:

• TTP Mode – select the TTP mode. Possible values are:monitoredor not monitored.

• VCG Capacity – select the capacity of the VCG from the drop-down list.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Click Submit .

Result: A progress indication followed by a confirmation is issued in theMessagesection of theModify Virtual Concatenation Group page, and the virtualconcatenation group information is modified for the selected NE slot.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Equipment provisioning tasks Data serviceTo modify virtual concatenation groups

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


6-51

To view VC TTPs

When to use

Use this task to view the VC TTPs associated with a selected virtual concatenationgroup.

Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:





5. Click Go.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Select the VCG for which to view the VC TTP. From theGo menu, selectAssociatedVC TTPs and clickGo.

Result: The VC TTPs page is displayed.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Equipment provisioning tasks Data serviceTo view VC TTPs

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

To reset the wait to restore timer for VC TTPs

When to use

Use this task to reset the wait to restore (WTR) timer for VC TTPs associated with aselected virtual concatenation group.

Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:





5. Click Go.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 From the Go menu, selectVCG information and clickGo.

Equipment provisioning tasks Data serviceTo reset the wait to restore timer for VC TTPs

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


6-53

Result: The Virtual Concatenation Group Information page is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Select the VCG for which to view the VC TTP. From theGo menu, selectAssociatedVC TTPs and clickGo.

Result: The VC TTPs page is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Select the VC TTP for which to reset the wait to restore timer.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 From theGo menu, selectReset WTR Timer and clickGo.

Result: The wait to restore timer is reset on the selected VC TTP.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Equipment provisioning tasks Data serviceTo reset the wait to restore timer for VC TTPs

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

MIB management

To upload the MIB into the management system

When to use

Use this task to upload the Management Information Base (MIB) currently stored onan NE into the management system.

Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:



3. In theCategory field, selectNetwork Elements .

4. In theFunction field, selectManage MIB .

5. Click Go.

Result: The MIB Management page is displayed. It includes information about thecurrent association status of the selected NE.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 In the Operation field, selectMIB Upload and clickSubmit .

Result: A progress indication followed by a confirmation is issued in theMessagesection of theMIB Management page, the MIB is uploaded from the NE to themanagement system, and the results are displayed in theMessage bar.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Equipment provisioning tasks MIB managementTo upload the MIB into the management system

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


6-55

To download the MIB to an NE

When to use

Use this task to download the Management Information Base (MIB) currently stored inthe management system to an NE.

Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:





5. Click Go.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 In the Operation field, selectMIB Download and clickSubmit .

Result: A progress indication followed by a confirmation is issued in theMessagesection of theMIB Management page, the MIB is downloaded from themanagement system to the NE, and the results are displayed in theMessage bar.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Equipment provisioning tasks MIB managementTo download the MIB to an NE

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

To update the MIB image

When to use

Use this task to initiate a check of the MIB image stored in the management systemagainst the MIB of a selected NE. After the check, the management system gets thelatest copy of the different parts and will resynchronize the MIB. This is normallyquicker than performing a full MIB upload.

Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:





5. Click Go.

Result: The MIB Management page appears displaying information about thecurrent association status of the selected NE.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 In the Operation field, selectUpdate MIB image and clickSubmit .

Result: A progress indication followed by a confirmation is issued in theMessagesection of theMIB Management page, the MIB stored in the management systemis checked against the MIB of the selected NE. After the check, the managementsystem gets the latest copy of the different parts and will resynchronize the MIB.Results are displayed in theMessage bar.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Equipment provisioning tasks MIB managementTo update the MIB image

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


6-57

To enable the association with an NE

When to use

Use this task to enable the association of the management system with a selected NE.After the association is successfully enabled, the management system and the NE areconnected and can communicate.

Before you begin

The association state of the NE must be “Disconnected”.

Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:





5. Click Go.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 In the Operation field, selectEnable association and clickSubmit .

Result: A progress indication followed by a confirmation is issued in theMessagesection of theMIB Management page. The association state changes to“Connected”.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Equipment provisioning tasks MIB managementTo enable the association with an NE

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

To disable the association with an NE

When to use

Use this task to disable the association of the management system with a selected NE.After the association is successfully disabled, the management system and the NE aredisconnected and cannot communicate anymore.

Before you begin

The association state of the NE must be “Connected”.

Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:





5. Click Go.

Result: The MIB Management page appears displaying information about thecurrent association status of the selected NE.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 In the Operation field, selectDisable association and clickSubmit .

Result: A warning window opens.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 If you are sure that you want to disable the association with the NE, clickYes.

Equipment provisioning tasks MIB managementTo disable the association with an NE

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


6-59

Result: A progress indication followed by a confirmation is issued in theMessagesection of theMIB Management page. The association state changes to“Disconnected”.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Equipment provisioning tasks MIB managementTo disable the association with an NE

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Provisioning of NE event controls

To modify NE event controls

When to use

Use this task to modify NE event controls such as the lining-up mode.

Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:



3. In theCategory field, selectAlarms and Events .

4. In theFunction field, selectRetrieve/Set Event Control Information .

5. Click Go.

Result: The Event control details page is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 In the Lining up field, selectNo (which is the default) to enable reporting of alarmsfrom the NE to the management system orYes to disable it (alarm blocking).

When an NE is put in to lining-up mode, no alarms but any other communicationerrors will be reported. This mode prevents the system from becoming cluttered withunnecessary alarms during installation or maintenance actions on the NE. Any existingalarms for the network element are cleared when the management system activates thelining-up mode. This has the effect of moving all alarms to the history store. The NEre-evaluates the alarm status when the lining-up is deactivated.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click Submit .

Equipment provisioning tasks Provisioning of NE event controlsTo modify NE event controls

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


6-61

Result: A progress indication followed by a confirmation is issued in theMessagesection of theEvent control details page, and the event control is modified.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Equipment provisioning tasks Provisioning of NE event controlsTo modify NE event controls

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

To view NE event parameter settings

When to use

Use this task to view the current NE event parameter settings.

Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:



3. In theCategory field, selectAlarm Severity Assignment Profiles .

4. In theFunction field, selectRetrieve/Set Event Parameters .

5. Click Go.

Result: The NE Event Parameters page is populated at the bottom containing alist of records that meet your search criteria.

The following information is provided for each probable cause:

• Probable cause – the probable cause ID.

• Alarm description – the full text description of the probable cause.

• Additional information – if an event type is associated with an MDI, the MDIname is displayed.

• Configurable per resource – indicates whether severity and reporting relatedto the probable cause can be configured or not.

• Severity – indicates the importance of an alarm. Depending on the managementsystem installation parameters, possible values are eitherPrompt, Deferred,Informationor Critical, , Minor, Warning.

• Reporting – indicates whether the alarms related to the probable cause arereported or not.

• MDO iD – the ID of the MDO which is activated at the NE if the NE event isdetected.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Equipment provisioning tasks Provisioning of NE event controlsTo view NE event parameter settings

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


6-63

To modify NE event parameter settings

When to use

Use this task to modify the current NE event parameter settings.

Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:




4. In theFunction field, selectRetrieve/Set Event Parameters .

5. Click Go.

Result: The NE Event Parameters page is populated at the bottom containing alist of records that meet your search criteria.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 In the list of probable causes, select the ones that you wish to modify. To do so, clickin the square symbol in the left most column.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Select the desired action from theGo menu:

If you want to then select

change the severity assigned to theselected probable causes,

Set severity to new value

turn on the reporting for the selectedprobable causes,

Set reporting on

turn off the reporting for the selectedprobable causes,

Set reporting off

Equipment provisioning tasks Provisioning of NE event controlsTo modify NE event parameter settings

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

If you want to then select

relate an MDO to the selected probablecauses

Set MDO id new value , wherenew

value = 1 to 4.

cancel the relation of an MDO to theselected probable causes

Set MDO id to not applicable

change all settings for the selectedprobable causes to the factory defaults

Reset to factory defaults

Click Go.

Result: A warning window is displayed that informs about the consequences of therequested changes.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 If you are sure about the modification settings, clickYes.

Result: A progress indication followed by a confirmation is issued in theNE EventParameters page.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Equipment provisioning tasks Provisioning of NE event controlsTo modify NE event parameter settings

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


6-65

Provisioning of MDIs and MDOs

To view a list of MDOs

When to use

Use this task to view a list of Miscellaneous Discrete Outputs (MDO).

Related information

See also:

• “Miscellaneous discrete inputs and outputs” (p. 5-8)

Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:



3. In theCategory field, selectExternal Control and Monitoring Points .

4. In theFunction field, selectRetrieve/Set MDO .

5. Click Go.

Result: The MDOs page is displayed. It includes a list of MDOs.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Equipment provisioning tasks Provisioning of MDIs and MDOsTo view a list of MDOs

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

To view alarms associated with an MDO

When to use

Use this task to view alarms associated with an MDO.

Related information

See also:


Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:





5. Click Go.

Result: The MDOs page is displayed. It includes a list of MDOs on the NE.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click the radio button next to the MDO for which you wish to view alarms.

Result: The alarms associated with the MDO are displayed below the table.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Equipment provisioning tasks Provisioning of MDIs and MDOsTo view alarms associated with an MDO

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


6-67

To modify an MDO

When to use

Use this task to modify a Miscellaneous Discrete Output (MDO).

Related information

See also:


Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:





5. Click Go.

Result: The MDOs page is displayed. It includes a list of MDOs on the NE.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


1. Click the radio button next to the MDO you wish to modify. From theGo menu,selectModify and clickGo.

2. Click the radio button next to the MDO you wish to modify. Click the hyperlink inthe MDO id field.

Equipment provisioning tasks Provisioning of MDIs and MDOsTo modify an MDO

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Result: The MDO details page is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


• MDO name – enter or change the name associated to the respective MDO.

• MDO status – selectActive (closed loop),Inactive (open loop),Not Available, orNE controlled.

If MDO statusis set to “NE controlled”, the MDO depends on current alarms. Thefollowing settings do not apply to 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal:

• MDO activation - dependent on disconnect –

• MDO activation - dependent on suppression –

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click Submit .

Result: A progress indication followed by a confirmation is issued in theMessagesection of theMDO details page, and the MDO is modified.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Equipment provisioning tasks Provisioning of MDIs and MDOsTo modify an MDO

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


6-69

To view a list of MDIs

When to use

Use this task to view a list of Miscellaneous Discrete Inputs (MDI).

Related information

See also:


Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:




4. In theFunction field, selectRetrieve/Set MDI .

5. Click Go.

Result: The MDIs page is displayed. It includes a list of MDIs on the NE.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Equipment provisioning tasks Provisioning of MDIs and MDOsTo view a list of MDIs

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

To modify an MDI

When to use

Use this task to modify a miscellaneous discrete input (MDI).

Related information

See also:


Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:




4. In theFunction field, selectRetrieve/Set MDI .

5. Click Go.

Result: The MDIs page is displayed. It includes a list of MDIs on the NE.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


1. Click the radio button next to the MDI you wish to modify. From theGo menu,selectModify and clickGo.

2. Click the radio button next to the MDI you wish to modify. Click the hyperlink inthe MDI id field.

Result: The Modify MDI page is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 In the MDI name field, enter or change the name associated to the respective MDI.

Equipment provisioning tasks Provisioning of MDIs and MDOsTo modify an MDI

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


6-71

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click Submit .

Result: A progress indication followed by a confirmation is issued in theMessagesection of theModify MDI page, and the MDI is modified.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Equipment provisioning tasks Provisioning of MDIs and MDOsTo modify an MDI

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


To view a list of equipment protection groups

When to use

Use this task to view a list of equipment protection groups.

Related information

See also:

• “Equipment protection groups” (p. 5-9)

Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:



3. In theCategory field, selectProtection Groups .

4. In theFunction field, selectRetrieve/Set Equipment Protection .

5. Click Go.

Result: The Equipment Protection Groups page is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 In the Circuit pack and protection type field select a circuit pack and protection typefrom the pull-down list.

Click Search .

Result: The list at the bottom of theEquipment Protection Groups page ispopulated with a list of the equipment protection groups that meet your searchcriteria.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Equipment provisioning tasks Equipment protectionOverview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


6-73

To add an equipment protection group

When to use

Use this task to add an equipment protection group.

Related information

See also:


Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:





5. Click Go.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 In the Circuit pack and protection type field, select the type of circuit pack andprotection type to be added.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click on theNew tool in theSearch section of the window.

Result: The Equipment Protection Group details page is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 In the Working slot field, select the working slot of the equipment protection group.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 In the Protection slot field, select the protection slot of the equipment protectiongroup.

Equipment provisioning tasks Equipment protectionTo add an equipment protection group

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Click Submit .

Result: A progress indication followed by a confirmation is issued in theMessagesection of theEquipment Protection Groups page, and the equipment protectiongroup is added.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Equipment provisioning tasks Equipment protectionTo add an equipment protection group

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


6-75

To modify an equipment protection group

When to use

Use this task to modify an equipment protection group.

Related information

See also:


Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Do the following:





5. Click Go.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 In the Circuit pack and protection type field, select a circuit pack and protection typefrom the pull-down list.

Click Search .

Result: The list at the bottom of theEquipment Protection Groups page ispopulated with a list of the equipment protection groups that meet your searchcriteria. TheEquipment Protection group name column of the table lists thenames of the equipment protection groups.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click the radio button next to the equipment protection group you wish to modify.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Result: The Equipment Protection Group details page is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Modify the Wait to restore time (minutes) , if required. Possible values range from 0minutes to 60 minutes.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click Submit .

Equipment provisioning tasks Equipment protectionTo modify an equipment protection group

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Result: A progress indication followed by a confirmation is issued in theMessagesection of theEquipment Protection Group details page, and the equipmentprotection group is modified.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Equipment provisioning tasks Equipment protectionTo modify an equipment protection group

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


6-77

To delete an equipment protection group

When to use

Use this task to delete an equipment protection group.

Related information

See also:


Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Do the following:

1. In theNE type field (if not already present).




5. Click Go.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 In the Circuit pack and protection type field select a circuit pack and protection typefrom the pull-down list.

Click Search .


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click the radio button next to the equipment protection group you wish to delete.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 From theGo menu, selectDelete and clickGo.

Result: A progress indication followed by a confirmation is issued in theMessagesection of theEquipment Protection Groups page, and the equipment protectiongroup is deleted.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Equipment provisioning tasks Equipment protectionTo delete an equipment protection group

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

To execute an equipment protection switch

When to use

Use this task to execute an equipment protection switch.

Related information

See also:


Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Do the following:





5. Click Go.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 In the Circuit pack and protection type field select a circuit pack and protection typefrom the pull-down list and clickSearch .


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 CAUTION


A forced switch to a faulty unit or lockout of protection could cause a trafficinterruption.

Perform a forced switch only to a unit which is working fault-free.

Click the radio button next to the equipment protection group for which you wish toexecute a protection switch. From theGo menu, select one of the following and clickGo.

• Clear – the last protection switch is cleared, the situation is returned to normal.

• Forced to Working – switches service to the working unit regardless of the stateof the working unit. Prevents automatic switching to the protection unit in case afailure is detected on the working unit.

Equipment provisioning tasks Equipment protectionTo execute an equipment protection switch

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


6-79

• Forced to Protection – switches service to the protection unit regardless of thestate of the protection unit. Prevents automatic switching to the working unit incase a failure is detected on the protection unit.

• Manual to Working – switches service to the working unit if there has not been aforced switch request and the working unit is not in a failed state.In case a failure is later detected on the working unit, an automatic switch to theprotection unit will take place.

• Manual to Protection – switches service to the protection unit if there has notbeen a forced switch request and the protection unit is not in a failed state.In case a failure is later detected on the protection unit, an automatic switch to theworking unit will take place.

• Lock out of protection – prevents the usage of the protection unit for anyprotection switching activity. This is canceled with the clear command.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click Yes.

Result: A progress indication followed by a confirmation is issued in theMessagesection of theEquipment Protection Groups page, and the protection switch isexecuted.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Equipment provisioning tasks Equipment protectionTo execute an equipment protection switch

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

7 7Alarm managementconcepts

Overview

Purpose

This chapter presents concept information related to the alarm management on 1655Access Multiplexer Universal network elements using OMS.

Contents

Alarm Severity Assignment Profile (ASAP) concepts 7-1

Alarm Severity Assignment Profile (ASAP) concepts

Overview

An Alarm Severity Assignment Profile (ASAP) is a list of alarms which can occur in anetwork element and which each have an alarm severity assigned.

ASAPs can be assigned to “1655 AMU” functional system components (a circuit packor a specific port for example) during provisioning.

Each ASAP can be uniquely identified by its type and its name.

Concept

ASAP allows the user to control alarm reporting with more flexibility, and to createmultiple alarm profiles for each alarm category and to assign these profiles to entitieswithin the system.

The alarms contained in each category are predefined. The categories containing thealarms are referred to as predefined profile types. Each profile type has a defaultprofile and a set of user-created profiles. The user-created profiles and the defaultprofiles within the profile types are referred to as ASAPs. The assigned alarm severitylevels refer to each alarm within each ASAP.

Note that predefined or default alarms or profile types cannot be changed or deleted bythe user. Only the profiles created by the user can be changed or deleted.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


7-1

Alarm severities

The alarm severity levels are used in the following description of the ASAP types:

1. Prompt (Urgent alarm that requires immediate (prompt) maintenance action)

2. Deferred (Non-urgent alarm that requires deferred maintenance action)

3. Info (Informational alarm).

Reporting state

Each alarm can be assigned to one of the following reporting states:

Reporting state Meaning

Reported The alarm - when raised - will be reported towards themanagement systems, and displayed on the graphical userinterfaces.

Not Reported The alarm - when raised - willnot be reported.

Please note that changing the alarm reporting state does not affect the display ofcurrently present and history alarms. Especially the display of already present alarmscannot be removed if their reporting state is changed from “Reported” to “NotReported”.

ASAP types

The ASAP types, listed in alphabetical order according to their ITM-CITrepresentation, are defined for “1655 AMU” network elements:

ASAP Type Functional category

dcn Alarms related to node level DCN (including Q-LAN)

equipment Alarms related to equipment (circuit pack and otherequipment alarms)

ethPath Transmission & TCA causes related to Path for Ethernet

ethPS Transmission causes related to Physical Section for Ethernet

MiscDiscreteIn Alarms related to MiscDiscreteIn

pdhPS Transmission causes related to Physical Section for PDH(LOS, AIS)

pdhPath Transmission & TCA causes related to path for PDH (onlysupported for E1)

timing Alarms related to timing (node, port and timing sources)

sdhPRS Transmission & TCA causes related to Physical andRegenerator Section for SDH

sdhMS Transmission & TCA causes related to Multiplex Section forSDH

Alarm management concepts Alarm Severity Assignment Profile (ASAP) concepts

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

ASAP Type Functional category

sdhMSP Alarms related to 1+1 Multiplex Section Protection for SDH

sdhHOPath Transmission & TCA causes related to HO Path for SDH(includes ms/Sn adaptation, Sn NIM, Sn termination andMS-SPRing circuit audit)

sdhLOPath Transmission & TCA causes related to LO Path for SDH(includes Sn/Sm adaptation, Sm NIM, Sm termination)

sdhVCG Transmission & TCA causes related to Virtual Concatenation(GFP causes should be handled via physical ethernet)

ethLAG Transmission causes related to Link Aggregation Group

Default ASAPs

For each of the available ASAP types, there exists a default ASAP. These defaultASAPs are named “DEFAULT” for all ASAP types.

dcn ASAP

The following table lists the default alarm severity assignments of the “dcn” ASAP.

Alarmidentifier“Probablecause”

Alarm text Alarmseverity

Reporting state(default setting)

DCN-BUcLOST

Mandatory IS-IS parameters missing Prompt Reported

DCNcCONF IS-IS configuration error Prompt Reported

DCNcREPAIR IS-IS Level-2 Area repair, transmission/configuration error

Deferred Reported

DCNTAPc-CONF

DCN-Tunnel auto provisioning configurationerror

Deferred Reported

MLQ2 Loss of Q2-communications Information Reported

equipment ASAP

The following table lists the default alarm severity assignments of the “equipment”ASAP.

Alarm identifier“Probable cause”



FANcEQF FAN unit failure Information Reported

FANcPWR FAN unit power failure Information Reported

FANcUNI FAN unit removed Information Reported


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


7-3




FANcWFUP Wrong or failed FAN unit present Information Reported

I2CcUPF I2C-bus failure Prompt Reported

IPcEQF LAN unit failure - protected Deferred Reported

IPcUNI LAN unit removed Deferred Reported

IPcUPF LAN unit failure Prompt Reported

IPcWUP Wrong LAN unit present Prompt Reported

PMcEQF Pluggable Module failure Deferred Reported

PMcUNI Pluggable Module removed Deferred Reported

PMcUPF Unprotected Pluggable Module failure Prompt Reported

PMcWUP Wrong Pluggable Module present Prompt Reported

POWcLSV Loss of secondary input voltage Deferred Reported

PUcEQF Power unit failure - protected Deferred Reported

PUcUNI Power unit removed Deferred Reported

PUcUPF Power unit failure Prompt Reported

PUcWUP Wrong Power unit present Prompt Reported

SCcEQF System controller failure Prompt Reported

SCcWUP Wrong System controller Unit present Prompt Reported

SYScTMP System temperature too high Information Reported

TIcEQF Timing interface unit failure - protected Deferred Reported

TIcUNI Timing interface unit removed Deferred Reported

TIcUPF Timing interface unit failure Prompt Reported

TIcWUP Wrong Timing interface unit present Prompt Reported

UNITcINIT Unit in initialization Information Reported

UPUS Unit present in unassigned slot Information Reported

UNITcLATCHOPEN*

Latch of Unit Open Prompt Reported

PREcEQF * Pre-Equipment Failure Information Not reported

EEPROMcUNI * Extension EEPROM Configuration Issue orRead Write Failure

Prompt Reported

Notes:

1. Alarms marked with an asterisk (“*”) in the “Probable cause” column are not supportedin the present “1655 AMU” release. These alarms are prepared for future applications.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

MiscDiscreteIn ASAP

The following table lists the default alarm severity assignments of the“MiscDiscreteIn” ASAP.

Alarm identifier“Probablecause”1

Alarm text 2 Alarmseverity


MDcIP1 MDI 1: <user entered string> Information Reported




Notes:

1. In the ITM-CIT NE Alarm List , only “MISC” is displayed as the probable cause of anenvironmental alarm.

2. You can change the alarm text of each individual Miscellaneous Discrete Input (MDI).

ethPath ASAP

The following table lists the default alarm severity assignments of the “ethPath” ASAP.




LANDPcTHR15 LAN Dropped packets thresholdcrossing 15-min

Information Reported

LANDPcTHR24 LAN Dropped packets thresholdcrossing 24-hrs


LANI3GEILScTHR15 LAN Loaded Sec for incoming trafficwith class 3 green traffic Thr 15min

Deferred Reported

LANI3GEILScTHR24 LAN Loaded Sec for incoming trafficwith class 3 green traffic Thr 24-hrs

Deferred Reported

LANI32GEILScTHR15 LAN Loaded Sec for inc Tr with class3 or 2 green traffic Thr 15min

Deferred Reported

LANI32GEILScTHR24 LAN Loaded Sec for inc Tr with cl 3or 2 green traffic Thr 24-hrs

Deferred Reported

LANI3GEISLScTHR15 LAN Severely Loaded Sec for inc Trwith class 3 green traffic Thr 15min

Deferred Reported

LANI3GEISLScTHR24 LAN Severely Loaded Sec for inc Tr withclass 3 green traffic Thr 24-hrs

Deferred Reported

LANI32GEISLScTHR15 LAN Severely Loaded Sec for inc Tr with Cl3 or 2 green traffic Thr 15min

Deferred Reported

LANI32GEISLScTHR24 LAN Severely Loaded Sec for inc Tr with cl3 or 2 green traffic Thr 24-hrs

Deferred Reported

LANG2EOCScTHR15 LAN Green traffic class 2 Ethernet OutputCongested Sec Thr 15min

Deferred Reported


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


7-5




LANG2EOCScTHR24 LAN Green traffic class 2 Ethernet OutputCongested Sec Thr 24-hrs

Deferred Reported

LANY2EOCScTHR15 LAN Yellow traffic class 2 Ethernet OutputCongested Sec Thr 15min

Deferred Reported

LANY2EOCScTHR24 LAN Yellow traffic class 2 Ethernet OutputCongested Sec Thr 24-hrs

Deferred Reported

LANG3EOCScTHR15 LAN Green traffic class 3 Ethernet OutputCongested Sec Thr 15min

Deferred Reported

LANG3EOCScTHR24 LAN Green traffic class 3 Ethernet OutputCongested Sec Thr 24-hrs

Deferred Reported

LANY3EOCScTHR15 LAN Yellow traffic class 3 Ethernet OutputCongested Sec Thr 15min

Deferred Reported

LANY3EOCScTHR24 LAN Yellow traffic class 3 Ethernet OutputCongested Sec Thr 24-hrs

Deferred Reported

MACcMIS MAC address mismatch for LAN/WAN port Deferred Reported

MACcVCM VLAN configuration mismatch Deferred Reported

MACcVLANOVFW Maximum number of VLAN instancesexceeded


MIBcVLANOVFW Maximum number of VLAN instancesexceeded in MIB


ARTDcTHR15 Average round trip delay threshold crossing15min

Deferred Reported

ARTDcTHR24 Average round trip delay threshold crossing24hrs

Deferred Reported

URTDMcTHR15 Number of unsuccessful (timed out) roundtrip delay measurements Thr 15min

Deferred Reported

URTDMcTHR24 Number of unsuccessful (timed out) roundtrip delay measurements Thr 24hrs

Deferred Reported

XRTDcTHR15 Maximum round trip delay threshold crossing15min

Deferred Reported

XRTDcTHR24 Maximum round trip delay threshold crossing24hrs

Deferred Reported

WANDPcTHR15 WAN Dropped packets threshold crossing15-min


WANDPcTHR24 WAN Dropped packets threshold crossing24-hrs


WANI3GEILScTHR15 WAN Loaded Sec for incoming traffic withclass 3 green traffic Thr 15min

Deferred Reported

WANI3GEILScTHR24 WAN Loaded Sec for incoming traffic withclass 3 green traffic Thr 24-hrs

Deferred Reported

WANI32GEILScTHR15 WAN Loaded Sec for inc Tr with class 3 or 2green traffic Thr 15min

Deferred Reported

WANI32GEILScTHR24 WAN Loaded Sec for inc Tr with cl 3 or 2green traffic Thr 24-hrs

Deferred Reported

WANI3GEISLScTHR15 WAN Severely Loaded Sec for inc Tr withclass 3 green traffic Thr 15min

Deferred Reported


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008




WANI3GEISLScTHR24 WAN Severely Loaded Sec for inc Tr withclass 3 green traffic Thr 24-hrs

Deferred Reported

WANI32GEISLScTHR15 WAN Severely Loaded Sec for inc Tr with Cl3 or 2 green traffic Thr 15min

Deferred Reported

WANI32GEISLScTHR24 WAN Severely Loaded Sec for inc Tr with cl3 or 2 green traffic Thr 24-hrs

Deferred Reported

WANG2EOCScTHR15 WAN Green traffic class 2 Ethernet OutputCongested Sec Thr 15min

Deferred Reported

WANG2EOCScTHR24 WAN Green traffic class 2 Ethernet OutputCongested Sec Thr 24-hrs

Deferred Reported

WANY2EOCScTHR15 WAN Yellow traffic class 2 Ethernet OutputCongested Sec Thr 15min

Deferred Reported

WANY2EOCScTHR24 WAN Yellow traffic class 2 Ethernet OutputCongested Sec Thr 24-hrs

Deferred Reported

WANG3EOCScTHR15 WAN Green traffic class 3 Ethernet OutputCongested Sec Thr 15min

Deferred Reported

WANG3EOCScTHR24 WAN Green traffic class 3 Ethernet OutputCongested Sec Thr 24-hrs

Deferred Reported

WANY3EOCScTHR15 WAN Yellow traffic class 3 Ethernet OutputCongested Sec Thr 15min

Deferred Reported

WANY3EOCScTHR24 WAN Yellow traffic class 3 Ethernet OutputCongested Sec Thr 24-hrs

Deferred Reported

pdhPS ASAP

The following table lists the default alarm severity assignments of the “pdhPS” ASAP.




E11cAIS 1.5 Mbit/s AIS Informa-tion

Not Reported

E11cLOS 1.5 Mbit/s Loss of input signal Prompt Not Reported

E11cNES 1.5 Mbit/s Not expected input signal Informa-tion

Not Reported

E31cAIS 34 Mbit/s AIS Informa-tion

Not Reported

E31cLOS 34 Mbit/s Loss of input signal Prompt Reported

E31cNES 34 Mbit/s Not expected input signal Informa-tion

Not Reported



Not Reported



....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


7-7





Not Reported

P12ScAIS 2 Mbit/s Alarm indication signal received Informa-tion

Not Reported

P12ScLOF 2 Mbit/s Loss of frame alignment Prompt Reported

ethPS ASAP

The following table lists the default alarm severity assignments of the “ethPS” ASAP.




1GEcANM 1 Gigabit Ethernet interface Auto NegotiationMismatch

Prompt Reported

1GEcLOSS 1 Gigabit Ethernet interface Loss of inputsignal

Prompt Reported

1GEcNES 1 Gigabit Ethernet interface Not expected inputsignal

Informa-tion

Not Reported

LANcANM Ethernet interface Auto Negotiation Mismatch Prompt Reported

LANcLOS Ethernet interface Loss of input signal Prompt Reported

LANcNES Ethernet interface Not expected input signal Informa-tion

Not Reported

GELSRcFLR * Gigabit Ethernet Laser failure Informa-tion

Reported

GEcODNC 802.3ah OAM partner is not available for GEport

Prompt Reported

MRVcRCF * Remote Client Failure between MRV and UserSwitch

Prompt Reported

pdhPath ASAP

The following table lists the default alarm severity assignments of the “pdhPath”ASAP.



Reportingstate (defaultsetting)

P12cDEG 2 Mbit/s Moderate block error rate Deferred Reported

DS3cDEG DS3 Line BER degraded Deferred Reported

P11OTMcSW 1.5 Mbit/s output timing mode change Information Reported

P12OTMcSW 2 Mbit/s output timing mode change Information Reported

P12ScNCM 2 Mbit/s No CRC-4 Multiframe alignment signal Information Reported

P12ScRDI 2 Mbit/s Remote defect indicator Information Not Reported


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008



Reportingstate (defaultsetting)

P12ScRNCM 2 Mbit/s Remote No CRC-4 Multiframealignment Signal


P12ScSSF P12s Network connection server signal fail Information Reported

P12SNBBEcTHR15 P12s Near- end background block errors thresholdcrossing 15-min

Information Not Reported

P12SNBBEcTHR24 P12s Near- end background block errors thresholdcrossing 24-hrs


P12SNEScTHR15 P12s Near- end errored seconds thresholdcrossing 15-min


P12SNEScTHR24 P12s Near- end errored seconds thresholdcrossing 24-hrs


P12SNSEScTHR15 P12s Near- end severely ES threshold crossing15-min


P12SNSEScTHR24 P12s Near- end severely ES threshold crossing24-hrs


P12SNUAScTHR15 P12s Near- end unavailable seconds thresholdcrossing 15-min


P12SNUAScTHR24 P12s Near- end unavailable seconds thresholdcrossing 24-hrs


Notes:

1. Alarms marked with an asterisk (“*”) in the “Probable cause” column are not supportedin the present “1655 AMU” release. These alarms are prepared for future applications.

timing ASAP

The following table lists the default alarm severity assignments of the “timing” ASAP.




MTcAIS Station clock input Alarm indication signal Prompt Reported

MTcLOF Station clock input Loss of frame alignment Prompt Reported

MTcLOS Station clock input Loss of signal Prompt Reported

MTcNES Station clock input Not expected signal Prompt Reported

TBACKcUPM System timing in backup state Informa-tion

Reported

TLINKcFLR Timing link failed Deferred Reported

TLINKcUNEQ Timing link unequipped Deferred Reported

TSCOcSQ Station clock output squelched Informa-tion

Reported


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


7-9

sdhPRS ASAP

The following table lists the default alarm severity assignments of the “sdhPRS” ASAP.


Alarm text Alarm severity Reportingstate (defaultsetting)

RS16NBBEcTHR15 STM-16 RS Near-end background block errorsthresh cross 15- min


RS16NBBEcTHR24 STM-16 RS Near-end background block errorsthresh cross 24- hrs


RS16NEScTHR15 STM-16 RS Near-end errored seconds thresholdcrossing 15- min


RS16NEScTHR24 STM-16 RS Near-end errored seconds thresholdcrossing 24- hrs


RS16NSEScTHR15 STM-16 RS Near-end severely ES thresholdcrossing 15- min


RS16NSEScTHR24 STM-16 RS Near-end severely ES thresholdcrossing 24- hrs


RS16NUAScTHR15 STM-16 RS Near-end unavailable secondsthreshold crossing 15- min


RS16NUAScTHR24 STM-16 RS Near-end unavailable secondsthreshold crossing 24- hrs


RS1NBBEcTHR15 STM-1 RS Near-end background block errorsthresh cross 15-min


RS1NBBEcTHR24 STM-1 RS Near-end background block errorsthresh cross 24-hrs


RS1NEScTHR15 STM-1 RS Near-end errored seconds thresholdcrossing 15-min


RS1NEScTHR24 STM-1 RS Near-end errored seconds thresholdcrossing 24-hrs


RS1NSEScTHR15 STM-1 RS Near-end severely ES thresholdcrossing 15-min


RS1NSEScTHR24 STM-1 RS Near-end severely ES thresholdcrossing 24-hrs


RS1NUAScTHR15 STM-1 RS Near-end unavailable secondsthreshold crossing 15-min


RS1NUAScTHR24 STM-1 RS Near-end unavailable secondsthreshold crossing 24-hrs


RS4NBBEcTHR15 STM-4 RS Near-end background block errorsthresh cross 15-min


RS4NBBEcTHR24 STM-4 RS Near-end background block errorsthresh cross 24-hrs


RS4NEScTHR15 STM-4 RS Near-end errored seconds thresholdcrossing 15-min


RS4NEScTHR24 STM-4 RS Near-end errored seconds thresholdcrossing 24-hrs


RS4NSEScTHR15 STM-4 RS Near-end severely ES thresholdcrossing 15-min



....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008



RS4NSEScTHR24 STM-4 RS Near-end severely ES thresholdcrossing 24-hrs


RS4NUAScTHR15 STM-4 RS Near-end unavailable secondsthreshold crossing 15-min






RS1cTIM STM-1 RS trace identifier mismatch Prompt Reported



RS64cTIM Laser degradation Information Reported

RS64cTIM Laser failure Information Reported

STM16cLOF STM-16 Loss of frame alignment Prompt Reported

STM16cLOS STM-16 loss of input signal Prompt Reported

STM16cNES STM-16 Not expected input signal Information Not Reported

STM16cPLOS STM-16 LOS and restart pulse detected Prompt Reported


STM1cLOS STM-1 Loss of input signal Prompt Reported



STM4cLOS STM-4 Loss of input signal Prompt Reported


sdhMS ASAP

The following table lists the default alarm severity assignments of the “ sdhMS” ASAP.




MS1cSSF STM-1 MS Network connection server signalfail

Prompt Reported

MS4cSSF STM-4 Network connection server signal fail Prompt Reported

MS16cSSF STM-16 Network connection server signal fail Prompt Reported

MS16cAIS STM-16 MS alarm indication signal received Prompt Reported

MS16cDEG STM-16 MS Moderate block error rate Deferred Reported

MS16cRDI STM-16 MS Remote defect indicator Information Not Reported

MS1cAIS STM-1 MS Alarm indication signal received Information Reported



....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


7-11





MS4cAIS STM-4 MS Alarm indication signal received Information Reported



MS16NBBEcTHR15 STM-16 MS Near-end background block errorsthresh cross 15- min


MS16NBBEcTHR24 STM-16 MS Near-end background block errorsthresh cross 24- hrs


MS16NEScTHR15 STM-16 MS Near-end errored seconds thresholdcrossing 15- min


MS16NEScTHR24 STM-16 MS Near-end errored seconds thresholdcrossing 24- hrs


MS16NSEScTHR15 STM-16 MS Near-end severely ES thresholdcrossing 15- min


MS16NSEScTHR24 STM-16 MS Near-end severely ES thresholdcrossing 24- hrs


MS16NUAScTHR15 STM-16 MS Near-end unavailable secondsthreshold crossing 15- min


MS16NUAScTHR24 STM-16 MS Near-end unavailable secondsthreshold crossing 24- hrs


MS1NBBEcTHR15 STM-1 MS Near-end background block errorsthreshold crossing 15-min


MS1NBBEcTHR24 STM-1 MS Near-end background block errorsthreshold crossing 24-hrs


MS1NEScTHR15 STM-1 MS Near-end errored seconds thresholdcrossing 15-min


MS1NEScTHR24 STM-1 MS Near-end errored seconds thresholdcrossing 24-hrs


MS1NSEScTHR15 STM-1 MS Near-end severely ES thresholdcrossing 15-min


MS1NSEScTHR24 STM-1 MS Near-end severely ES thresholdcrossing 24-hrs


MS1NUAScTHR15 STM-1 MS Near-end unavailable secondsthreshold crossing 15-min


MS1NUAScTHR24 STM-1 MS Near-end unavailable secondsthreshold crossing 24-hrs


MS4NBBEcTHR15 STM-4 MS Near-end background block errorsthreshold crossing 15-min


MS4NBBEcTHR24 STM-4 MS Near-end background block errorsthreshold crossing 24-hrs


MS4NEScTHR15 STM-4 MS Near-end errored seconds thresholdcrossing 15-min


MS4NEScTHR24 STM-4 MS Near-end errored seconds thresholdcrossing 24-hrs



....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008




MS4NSEScTHR15 STM-4 MS Near-end severely ES thresholdcrossing 15-min


MS4NSEScTHR24 STM-4 MS Near-end severely ES thresholdcrossing 24-hrs


MS4NUAScTHR15 STM-4 MS Near-end unavailable secondsthreshold crossing 15-min


MS4NUAScTHR24 STM-4 MS Near-end unavailable secondsthreshold crossing 24-hrs


MS1cEXC * STM-1 MS Excessive bit error rate Prompt Reported

MS4cEXC * STM-4 MS Excessive bit error rate Prompt Reported

MS16cEXC * STM-16 Excessive Bit Error Rate Prompt Reported

sdhMSP ASAP

The following table lists the default alarm severity assignments of the “sdhMSP”ASAP.




MS16cFOP STM-16 MS Protection switching protocolfailure

Deferred Reported

MS1cFOP STM-1 MS Protection switching protocol failure Deferred Reported

MS4cFOP STM-4 MS Protection switching protocol failure Deferred Reported

sdhHOPath ASAP

The following table lists the default alarm severity assignments of the “sdhHOPath”ASAP.



AU4CcAIS AU-4-4c Alarm indication signal received Information Reported

AU4CcLOP AU-4-4c Loss of pointer Prompt Reported

AU3cAIS AU-3 Alarm indication signal received Information Reported

AU3cLOP AU-3 Loss of pointer Prompt Reported

AU4cAIS AU-4 Alarm indication signal received Information Reported

AU4cLOP AU-4 Loss of pointer Prompt Reported

VC4cSSF VC-4 Network connection server signal fail Information Reported

VC4cLOM VC-4 Loss of multiframe Prompt Reported

VC4cPLM VC-4 Payload mismatch Prompt Reported


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


7-13



VC4cTIM VC-4 Path trace identifier mismatch Prompt Reported

VC4cRDI VC-4 Remote defect indicator Information Not Reported

VC4cUNEQ VC-4 Unequipped Prompt Reported

VC4CNBBEcTHR15 VC-4-4c Near-end background block errorsthresh cross 15- min


VC4CNBBEcTHR24 VC-4-4c Near-end background block errorsthresh cross 24- hrs


VC4CNEScTHR15 VC-4-4c Near-end errored seconds thresholdcrossing 15- min


VC4CNEScTHR24 VC-4-4c Near-end errored seconds thresholdcrossing 24-hrs


VC4CNSEScTHR15 VC-4-4c Near-end severely ES thresholdcrossing 15-min


VC4CNSEScTHR24 VC-4-4c Near-end severely ES thresholdcrossing 24-hrs


VC4CNUAScTHR15 VC-4-4c Near-end unavailable secondsthreshold crossing 15- min


VC4CNUAScTHR24 VC-4-4c Near-end unavailable secondsthreshold crossing 24- hrs


VC4CcDEG VC-4-4c Moderate block error rate Deferred Reported

VC4cEXC * VC-4 Excessive BIP8 bit error rate Prompt Reported

VC4CcEXC * VC4-4C Excessive BIP8 bit error rate Prompt Reported

VC4CcTIM VC-4-4c Path trace identifier mismatch Prompt Reported

VC4CcRDI VC-4-4c Remote Defect Indicator Information Not Reported

VC4CcUNEQ VC-4-4c Unequipped Prompt Reported

VC4CcSSF VC-4-4c Network connection server signal fail Information Reported

VC4NBBEcTHR15 VC-4 Near-end background block errorsthreshold crossing 15-min


VC4NBBEcTHR24 VC-4 Near-end background block errorsthreshold crossing 24-hrs


VC4NEScTHR15 VC-4 Near-end errored seconds thresholdcrossing 15-min


VC4NEScTHR24 VC-4 Near-end errored seconds thresholdcrossing 24-hrs


VC4NSEScTHR15 VC-4 Near-end severely ES threshold crossing15-min


VC4NSEScTHR24 VC-4 Near-end severely ES threshold crossing24-hrs


VC4NUAScTHR15 VC-4 Near-end unavailable seconds thresholdcrossing 15-min


VC4NUAScTHR24 VC-4 Near-end unavailable seconds thresholdcrossing 24-hrs



....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008



VC4cDEG * VC-4 Moderate block error rate (BIP-8,bursty)

Deferred Reported

sdhLOPath ASAP

The following table lists the default alarm severity assignments of the “sdhLOPath”ASAP.


Alarm text Alarm severity Reporting state(default setting)

VC3cSSF VC-3 Network connection serversignal fail





VC3cTIM VC-3 Path trace identifier mismatch Prompt Reported




VC12cTIM VC-12 Path trace identifiermismatch

Prompt Reported



TU3cAIS TU-3 Alarm indication signalreceived


TU3cLOP TU-3 Loss of pointer Prompt Reported

TU12cAIS TU-12 Alarm indication signalreceived


TU12cLOP TU-12 Loss of pointer Prompt Reported

VC3cDEG VC-3 Moderate block error rate Deferred Reported

VC3NBBEcTHR15 VC-3 Near-end background blockerrors threshold crossing 15-min


VC3NBBEcTHR24 VC-3 Near-end background blockerrors threshold crossing 24-hrs


VC3NEScTHR15 VC-3 Near-end errored secondsthreshold crossing 15-min


VC3NEScTHR24 VC-3 Near-end errored secondsthreshold crossing 24-hrs


VC3NSEScTHR15 VC-3 Near-end severely ESthreshold crossing 15-min


VC3NSEScTHR24 VC-3 Near-end severely ESthreshold crossing 24-hrs



....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


7-15



VC3NUAScTHR15 VC-3 Near-end unavailable secondsthreshold crossing 15-min


VC3NUAScTHR24 VC-3 Near-end unavailable secondsthreshold crossing 24-hrs







VC11cTIM VC-11 Path trace identifiermismatch

Prompt Reported


VC11NBBEcTHR15 VC-11 Near- end background blockerrors threshold crossing 15-min


VC11NBBEcTHR24 VC-11 Near- end background blockerrors threshold crossing 24-hrs


VC11NEScTHR15 VC-11 Near- end errored secondsthreshold crossing 15-min


VC11NEScTHR24 VC-11 Near- end errored secondsthreshold crossing 24-hrs


VC11NSEScTHR15 VC-11 Near- end severely ESthreshold crossing 15-min


VC11NSEScTHR24 VC-11 Near- end severely ESthreshold crossing 24-hrs


VC11NUAScTHR15 VC-11 Near- end unavailableseconds threshold crossing 15-min


VC11NUAScTHR24 VC-11 Near- end unavailableseconds threshold crossing 24-hrs


VC12NBBEcTHR15 VC-12 Near-end background blockerrors threshold crossing 15-min


VC12NBBEcTHR24 VC-12 Near-end background blockerrors threshold crossing 24-hrs


VC12NEScTHR15 VC-12 Near-end errored secondsthreshold crossing 15-min


VC12NEScTHR24 VC-12 Near-end errored secondsthreshold crossing 24-hrs


VC12NSEScTHR15 VC-12 Near-end severely ESthreshold crossing 15-min


VC12NSEScTHR24 VC-12 Near-end severely ESthreshold crossing 24-hrs


VC12NUAScTHR15 VC-12 Near-end unavailable secondsthreshold crossing 15-min


VC12NUAScTHR24 VC-12 Near-end unavailable secondsthreshold crossing 24-hrs




....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

sdhVCG ASAP

The following table lists the default alarm severity assignments of the “sdhVCG”ASAP.



VC12VcLOM VC-12 Virtual concatenated Loss of multiframe Prompt Reported

VC12VcSQM VC-12 Virtual concatenated Sequence mismatch Prompt Reported

VC12VcMND VC-12 virtual concatenated group memberdifferential delay out of range

Deferred Reported

VC12VcLOA VC-12 Virtual concatenated Loss of alignment Prompt Reported

VC12VcSSF VC-12 Virtual concatenated server signal fail Prompt Reported

VC12VcSSD VC-12 Virtual concatenated server signaldegrade

Deferred Reported

VC12VcPLM VC-12-Xv Payload mismatch Prompt Reported



VC3VcSSD VC-3 Virtual concatenated server signal degrade Deferred Reported




VC4VcSSD VC-4 Virtual concatenated server signal degrade Deferred Reported





Deferred Reported


Deferred Reported



VC12VcLOPC VC-12 Virtual concatenated loss of partialcapacity

Prompt Reported

VC12VcLOTC VC-12 Virtual concatenated loss of totalcapacity

Prompt Reported

VC12VcFOPR VC-12 Virtual concatenated failure of protocolreceived

Prompt Reported

VC12VcFOPT VC-12 Virtual concatenated failure of protocoltransmitted

Prompt Reported


Prompt Reported

VC3VcLOTC VC-3 Virtual concatenated loss of total capacity Prompt Reported


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


7-17




Prompt Reported


Prompt Reported


Prompt Reported

VC4VcLOTC VC-4 Virtual concatenated loss of total capacity Prompt Reported


Prompt Reported


Prompt Reported

ethLAG

The following table lists the default alarm severity assignments of the “ethLAG”ASAP.




FEcPLCF FE Link Aggregation Partner ConfigurationError

Prompt Reported

FEcPLL Only one of the two aggregated FE ports of alink aggregation group (LAG) is available fortransmission

Prompt Reported

FEcTLL Fast Ethernet Link Aggregation Total Link Loss Prompt Reported

GEcPLCF GBE link aggregation partner configurationerror

Prompt Reported

GEcPLL Only one of the two aggregated GbE ports of alink aggregation group (LAG) is available fortransmission

Prompt Reported

GEcTLL None of the two aggregated GbE ports of a linkaggregation group (LAG) is available fortransmission

Prompt Reported

ASAP name

The ASAP name is used to distinguish different ASAPs of the same type.

The following provisioning rules apply to the ASAP name:

1. The “DEFAULT” ASAPscannotbe renamed.

2. The ASAP name is an alphanumeric string of up to 20 characters.

3. The following characters are permitted in an ASAP name:

• Upper case letters (A Z),

• Lower case letters (a z),

• Digits (0 9),


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Maximum number of ASAPs

The total number of ASAPs supported by the 1655 AMU is restricted to 50, excludingthe 15DEFAULTASAPs


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


7-19

8 8Alarm management tasks

Overview

Purpose

This chapter informs how to perform the most common tasks related to the alarmmanagement.

Contents

To create a new Alarm Severity Assignment Profile (ASAP) 8-2

To modify an existing ASAP 8-3

To delete an ASAP 8-5

To view ASAP information 8-6

To view an assignment list for a specified ASAP 8-7

To assign an ASAP to one or several managed objects 8-9

To view assigned ASAPs for a specified managed object 8-12

To assign one or more ASAPs in different groups to one or severalmanaged objects

8-15

To assign one or several NE resources to an ASAP 8-18

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


8-1

To create a new Alarm Severity Assignment Profile (ASAP)

When to use

Use this task to create new Alarm Severity Assignment Profile (ASAP).

Related information

For related information, please refer to section ASAP concepts.

Before you begin

Prior to performing this task, you must have an overview of the current networktopology.

Task

Complete the following steps to create a new ASAP:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Use the object links to follow this path:Profiles → NE Profiles .

Result: The NE Profiles page is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Click the New profile button right to the drop down menu.

Result: The New NE Profile page is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Do the following:

1. For theProfile class , click the radio buttonAlarm .

2. In theNE type field, select the type of the target NE (if not already present).

3. In theNE name field, select the name of the target NE.

4. In theProfile group field, select the profile group to which you wish to create anew profile.

5. In theProfile name field, enter an case-sensitive up to 20 characters alphanumeric(AZ, az, 09, and hyphen)string for the new profile name. The profile nameshould be unique per profile type.

6. Click Submit .

Result: A progress indication followed by a confirmation is issued in theMessagesection of theNew NE Profile page and the newAlarm Severity Assignment Profileis created.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alarm management tasks To create a new Alarm Severity Assignment Profile(ASAP)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

To modify an existing ASAP

When to use

Use this task to modify and/or rename an existing Alarm Severity Assignment Profile(ASAP).

Related information


Before you begin


The maximum ASAP number to define is 64 including default ASAP.

Important! To modify the default ASAP will be forbidden.

Task

Complete the following steps to modify and/or rename an existing ASAP:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:



3. For theNE name field, click theFind button to populate the available NEs. Marka single NE or several NEs from which you wish to display profiles and click on>for its selection, or click on>> to select all available NEs.

4. In theProfile group field, select the profile group.

5. In theProfile name field, enter profile name (optional).

6. Click Search .

Result: The NE Profiles panel is populated at the bottom containing a list of theNE profiles that meet your search criteria. The displayed profiles in theProfile name column depends on the selection of theprofile class in the abovesearch panel.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Mark the user-created alarm severity assignment profile you wish to modify.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 SelectView/Modify from the Go menu and clickGo.

Alarm management tasks To modify an existing ASAP

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


8-3

Result: The Modify NE Profile details page is displayed.

To modify the ASAP continue withStep 5, to renamethe ASAP profile namecontinue withStep 6.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Change the severity and reporting state for any of the alarm identifier fields that aremodifiable from the drop-down menus and clickSubmit .

Result: A progress indication followed by a confirmation is issued in theMessagesection of theModify NE Profile details page and theAlarm Severity AssignmentProfile is modified.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 In the New Profile Name field, enter the new ASAP profile name clickSubmit .

Result: A progress indication followed by a confirmation is issued in theMessagesection of theModify NE Profile details page and theAlarm Severity AssignmentProfile is renamed.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alarm management tasks To modify an existing ASAP

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

To delete an ASAP

When to use

Use this task to delete an Alarm Severity Assignment Profile (ASAP).DefaultASAPscannot be deleted.

Task

Complete the following steps to delete an user-created ASAP:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:






6. Click Search .


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Mark the user-created alarm severity assignment profile you wish to delete.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 SelectDelete from the Go menu and clickGo.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click Yes.

Result: A confirmation window appears.

The user-createdalarm severity assignment profileis deleted.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alarm management tasks To delete an ASAP

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


8-5

To view ASAP information

When to use

Use this task to view Alarm Severity Assignment Profile (ASAP) information.

Related information


Before you begin


Task

Complete the following steps to view ASAP information:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:






6. Click Search .


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Mark the user-created alarm severity assignment profile you wish to view.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 SelectView/Modify from the Go menu and clickGo.

Result: The NE Profile details page is displayed with the alarm severityassignment profile information.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alarm management tasks To view ASAP information

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

To view an assignment list for a specified ASAP

When to use

Use this task to view an assignment list for a specified ASAP.


Related information


Before you begin


Task, method 1: via NE Profiles

Complete the following steps to assign an ASAP:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:






6. Click Search .

Result: The NE Profiles panel is populated at the bottom containing list of the NEprofiles that meet your search criteria. The displayed profiles in theProfile name

column depends on the selection of theprofile class in the above search panel.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Mark the user-created alarm severity assignment profile you wish to assign.

Result: The ASAP Assignments page is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 SelectCurrent Assignment from the Go menu and clickGo.

Alarm management tasks To view an assignment list for a specified ASAP

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


8-7

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Do the following:

• In the NE type field, select the type of the target NE (if not already present).


• For View , click the radio buttonASAP (if not already present).

• In the ASAP group field, select the ASAP group.

• In the ASAP name field, select a current active ASAP name.

• In the NE resource type field, select the NE resource type.

• In the NE resource name field, enter a NE resource name (optional).

• Click Search .

Result: The ASAP Assignments panel is populated at the bottom with a list of thespecified ASAP assignments that meet your search criteria.

Note: If no records are displayed, change your search criteria of this step and tryagain.

Task, method 2: via NE management functions


...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:




4. In theFunction field, selectRetrieve/Set Alarm Severity Assignment ProfileAssignment .

5. Click Go.

Result: The ASAP Assignment page is displayed. Continue withStep 5of taskmethod 1.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alarm management tasks To view an assignment list for a specified ASAP

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To assign an ASAP to one or several managed objects

When to use

Use this task to assign an ASAP to one or several manageable object(s).


Related information


Before you begin




...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:






6. Click Search .



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Mark the user-created alarm severity assignment profile you wish to assign, selectCurrent Assignment from the Go menu, and clickGo.

Alarm management tasks To assign an ASAP to one or several managed objects

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


8-9


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Do the following:








• Click Search .

Result: The ASAP Assignments panel is populated at the bottom with a list ofASAP assignments that meet your search criteria.

Note: If no records are displayed change your search criteria of this step and tryagain.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Mark the objects you wish to assign to a new ASAP.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 SelectModify ASAPs assigned to selected NE resources from the Go menu andclick Go.

Result: The ASAP Assignment page is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 In the ASAP assignment panel select the ASAP to which you wish to assign to thepreviously selected objects displayed above in theNE resources panel and clickSubmit .

Result: A progress indication followed by a confirmation is issued in theMessagesection of theASAP Assignment page and a new ASAP is assigned to one orseveral objects.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:





5. Click Go.


E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


8-11

To view assigned ASAPs for a specified managed object

When to use

Use this task to view assigned ASAPs for a specified managed object.


Related information


Before you begin




...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:






6. Click Search .



...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Alarm management tasks To view assigned ASAPs for a specified managed object

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Do the following:



• For View , click the radio buttonNE resources (if not already present).


• In the Slot field, select the slot.Note: This field can be omitted depending on the selection of theNE resourcetype field.


• Click Search .

Result: The ASAP Assignments panel is populated at the bottom with a list ofASAP assignments that meet your search criteria. If the assignment list containsmore than 50 entries than click in bottomResult pagespanel on next thehighlighted number(s) to skip to the next page(s) for displaying.

Note: If no records are displayed, change your search criteria of this step and tryagain.



...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:





5. Click Go.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


8-13

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................


E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

To assign one or more ASAPs in different groups to one orseveral managed objects

When to use

Use this task to assign one or more Alarm Severity Assignment Profiles (ASAPs) indifferent groups to one or several manageable objects.


Related information


Before you begin




...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:






6. Click Search .



...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Alarm management tasks To assign one or more ASAPs in different groups to oneor several managed objects

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


8-15


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Do the following:



• For View , click the radio buttonNE resources (if not already present).


• In the Slot field, select the slot.Note: This field can be omitted depending on the selection of theNE resourcetype field.


• Click Search .

Result: The ASAP Assignments panel is populated at the bottom with a list ofASAP assignments that meet your search criteria. If the assignment list containsmore than 50 entries than click in bottomResult pagespanel on next thehighlighted number(s) to skip to the next page(s) for displaying.

Note: If no records are displayed change your search criteria of this step and tryagain.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Mark the objects you wish to assign to new ASAPs, selectModify ASAPs assignedto selected NE resources from the Go menu and clickGo.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 In the ASAP assignment panel select the ASAPs to which you wish to assign to thepreviously selected objects displayed above in theNE resources panel and clickSubmit .

Result: A progress indication followed by a confirmation is issued in theMessagesection of theASAP Assignment page and the new ASAPs are assigned to one orseveral objects.

Note: Always the last established ASAPs are used primarily on the assignedobjects.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:





5. Click Go.


E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


8-17

To assign one or several NE resources to an ASAP

When to use

Use this task to assign one or several NE resources to an ASAP.


Related information


Before you begin




...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:






6. Click Search .


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Alarm management tasks To assign one or several NE resources to an ASAP

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Do the following:








• Click Search .

Result: The ASAP Assignments panel is populated at the bottom with a list ofNE resource assignments that meet your search criteria.

Note: Display of records is not mandatory for this task.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 SelectModify NE resources assigned to selected ASAP from the Go menu andclick Go.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Complete the following items in the NE resource assignment panel:


• In the NE resource name field, click theFind button to populate the availablemanageable objects. Mark a single object or several objects you wish to assign andclick on > for its selection, or click on>> to select all available objects.

• Click Submit .

Result: A progress indication followed by a confirmation is issued in theMessagesection of theASAP Assignment page and the manageable object(s) is/areassigned to the ASAP displayed in theASAP panel.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


8-19

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:





5. Click Go.


E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

9 9Timing provisioningconcepts

Overview

Purpose

This chapter presents concept information related to timing provisioning on 1655Access Multiplexer Universal network elements using OMS.

Contents

Network element timing 9-1

Network synchronization 9-4

Timing quality levels 9-6

Priorities 9-7

Retiming 9-8

Parameters for provisioning timing sources 9-9

Parameters for provisioning system timing 9-13

Parameters for provisioning station clock output 9-17

Parameters for provisioning output port timing 9-20

Network element timing

Introduction

To transmit signals with the correct speed, an NE is equipped with an internaloscillator. This oscillator is called theSDH Equipment Clock (SEC). The SEC providesa clock signal to all transmission units and can either be free running or locked to anexternal timing reference.

For pure transmission purposes, an NE can be in the free running mode, in which nosynchronization reference is used. This timing mode is accurate enough fortransmission, but when the SDH network is also used to carry a timing reference, allNEs must be synchronized with a single timing reference.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


9-1

The transmission signals in an SDH network can be used to transport the networksynchronization signals. Therefore each NE in the network has to derive a timingsignal and send it to other NEs. In this way the whole network can be synchronizedwith one system timing reference.

Timing reference

The timing signal received by an NE is called the timing reference.

The different physical ports that provide the input signals that are available as timingreferences are:

• Station clock input ports (main timing ports, MTP)

• Line ports (LP)

• Tributary ports (TP)

Timing output

A NE can provide a synchronization signal to other equipment by sending an outputtiming signal.

The following timing outputs can be used:

• Station clock output (SCO) ports (MTP)

• Line ports (LP)

• Tributary ports (TP)

External clock output

For synchronization of equipment that is not connected to the NE by tributary or linesignals, the NE can provide an external clock signal (usually 2 MHz). However, thisequipment must be in close proximity to the NE as the clock signal can only be carrieda few hundred meters.

Timing sources and outputs

A schematic drawing of an NE with the timing sources and outputs is shown below.The dotted arrows indicate outgoing timing signals. The straight arrows indicate thetiming inputs on which the internal clock of the NE can be synchronized.

Timing provisioning concepts Network element timing

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Timing modes

Timing units can be set in different modes:

• Free running

• Holdover

• Locked

Free running

In the free runningmode, the timing unit generates a clock signal from its ownoscillator. No timing signal from other equipment is used for the NE synchronization.

Holdover

The holdovermode will prevent a frequency step in case of a reference failure.Therefore it uses a frequency memory of the last available frequency.

Locked

In the lockedmode, the timing unit locks the oscillator-frequency to one of the externaltiming sources.

Schematic view of the timing modes

A schematic view of the three different timing modes is shown in the following figure:

Line signal

Clock

Tributary signal

Line signal

Station clock input Station clock output

NE


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


9-3

Network synchronization

Introduction

For telephone exchanges or switches, accurate timing is critical. Therefore switches aresynchronized with each other. One way of synchronizing is through the network. Inthis case all the SDH-NEs in the network are synchronized with one master clock. Allthe switches in the network can synchronize with the network, and consequently to themaster clock.

Timing equipment

A network can use different types of equipment as a timing reference, each having itsown, well defined, accuracy.

• Primary Reference Clock (PRC)

• Synchronization Supply Unit-Transit (SSU-T)

• Synchronization Supply Unit-Local (SSU-L)

• SDH Equipment Clock (SEC)

• Do Not Use (DNU).

Synchronization Status Message (SSM) signal

A timing marker or synchronization status message signal can be used to transfer thesignal-quality level throughout a network. This will guarantee that all network elementsare always synchronized to the highest-quality clock that is available.

+/-

Hold overmemory

Hold over

Feedback loopTimingsources

Locked

Free running


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Primary Reference Clock (PRC)

The master clock should be a primary reference clock (PRC), that provides a veryaccurate network clock (a clock satisfying the ITU-T recommendation G.811). Theother NEs in the ring are slaved to this clock. A second clock in the network can beused to act as the backup of the master clock.

The PRC can either be an autonomous clock or it is able to accept synchronizationfrom a radio or satellite signal.

Synchronization Supply Unit (SSU)

Noise, called jitter, may accumulate on the signal after passing through many nodes. Ittherefore becomes necessary at some point to recover and reshape the signal. In thiscase aSynchronization Supply Unit (SSU)will be used. In addition to recovering andreshaping, the SSU will also be able to run on its own when the reference signal (forinstance coming from the PRC) is lost. In this case, the SSU will be able to maintainthe quality of the reference signal it produces by means of a holdover mode: thefrequency and phase of the reference signal are stored in a memory and used togenerate a reference signal locally.

Two kinds of SSUs exist:

• SSU-T: SSU-transit

• SSU-L: SSU-local

The functionality of both SSUs is equal, the accuracy of the SSU-T is higher than theaccuracy of the SSU-L.

SDH Equipment Clock SEC

An SDH NE has its own internal oscillator, called the SDH equipment clock (SEC).The accuracy of a SEC is lower than the accuracy of both the SSU and the PRC.

Network example

An example of a network is shown in the following figure. Four NEs of a largenetwork are drawn, plus a master clock (PRC) and an SSU.

Timing provisioning concepts Network synchronization

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


9-5

Timing quality levels

Introduction

To choose the most appropriate timing signal from all the incoming timing signals, thequality of the timing signals must be known.

Different quality levels are defined for timing signals. The quality levels specify thequality of the incoming or outgoing timing signal. The quality levels are related to theequipment used to produce the corresponding timing signal.

Accuracy

The accuracy of a timing signal can be given in an accuracy value. Every timing signalwill have an average frequency, and a deviation in time from the average frequencyvalue. The deviation from the average frequency, can be represented as a fraction ofthe average frequency. This fraction is known as the accuracy value.

Example

When a timing reference has an average frequency of 2048 MHz, and varies in timebetween 2048.01 MHz and 2047.99 MHz, the deviation from the average value is plusor minus 0.01 MHz. This can be expressed in an accuracy value:

Accuracy = 0.01 / 2048≈ 0.0000049 = 4.9 × 10–6

NE NE

NE

NELine A Line B

Line A

Line B

Line B

Line A

Line B Line A

SDHNetwork

SDHNetwork

Station clockinput

Station clockoutput

SSUSSU

SSUPRC

Station clockinput

Standby synchronization

Working synchronization

Master clock

Timing provisioning concepts Network synchronization

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Quality levels

The quality level (QL) values are transported as a synchronization status message inthe S1 byte in the STM-N signal or in the 4th to 8th position of the Sa bit in a framed2 Mbps signal.

QL S1-byte Accuracy Description

QualityUnknown

S1=0 N/A No QL information of the signal is available.

PRC S1=02 10–11 Primary reference clockindicates that the timing signalis provided by a primary reference clock.

SSU-T S1=04 1.5 × 10–9 Synchronization supply unit-transitindicates that thetiming signal is derived from a transit SSU.

SSU-L S1=08 3 × 10–8 Synchronization supply unit-localindicates that thetiming signal was derived from a local SSU.

SEC S1=11 4.6 × 10–6 SDH equipment clockindicates that the timing signal isprovided by an SDH equipment clock.

DNU S1=15 N/A Do not use for synchronization indicates that the timingsignal should not be used, since it may cause timingloops.

Priorities

Introduction

The timing reference signal is transported through a synchronized network by the NEs.The path this timing signal will follow can be controlled by the network operator.

Description

When only the quality level of the timing reference signal is used, a number of signalswith equal quality level can arrive at an NE. To determine the timing source that theNE will choose in such a case, a priority is assigned to each timing source.

In choosing a timing source, the NE first selects the timing source with the highestquality level. When there are several timing sources available with this highest qualitylevel, the priority is taken into account additionally.

Example

In this figure, notice how the priorities define the timing path when each node receivestwo signals of PRC quality. The priority in the upper node is disabled since this inputsignal depends on an output signal of this NE; this could cause a timing loop.

An example of priority settings in a network is shown in the following figure:

Timing provisioning concepts Timing quality levels

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


9-7

Retiming

Introduction

When, for instance, a 2 Mbps PDH signal enters an SDH network, it is mapped into aVC-12. This VC-12 itself is aligned to a TU-12 in larger containers (for instanceVC-4) and then transported through the network. A pointer is carried along to indicatethe position of the VC-12 in the container. During transport through the SDH network,the VC-12 may shift in the TU-12. As a consequence, the pointer will also change,since it dynamically indicates the position of the VC-12.

In other words, the payload can float in the container. Due to this floating, the phaseinformation of the original 2 Mbps signal inside the VC-12 can no longer be used.

This problem can be overcome using (2 Mbps) retiming. The main idea of retiming isthe enforcement of timing integrity at the cost of data integrity.

Retiming

A phase difference might occur between the tributary signal entering the SDH networkand the NE clock of the node where this signal leaves the SDH network. Even if thewhole SDH network is synchronized with one reference clock, this clock can be out ofphase with the original clock of the tributary signal. To clock the signal out with theSDH-PRC frequency, the signal is unpacked (from its virtual container) and stored in

1

PRC PRC

PRC

DNU

DNU

DNU

Line signal Line signal2

Station Clock Input

1

2

2

1

1

2Line signal Line signal

PRC PRC

Priority = 11

2 Priority = 2

Priority = disabled

Timing provisioning concepts Priorities

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

an elastic buffer. From there it is sent out, and then the re-timed signal will carry theSDH-PRC frequency. Now it can be used as a timing reference outside the SDHnetwork.

Retiming is possible on the following tributary interfaces:

• 1.5 Mbps

• 2 Mbps

Self-timed

In the self-timed mode, the timing signal is derived from the bit rate of the VC-12, incase of 2 Mbps retiming. The bit rate may fluctuate due to pointer adjustments withinthe SDH network. Therefore the self-timed mode is not suitable for carrying a timingreference through the SDH network.

Parameters for provisioning timing sources

Introduction

An overview of the relationship between the physical ports, the timing references, andthe logical timing sources is shown in the following figure:

The physical ports and the timing references are indicated on the left side, the logicaltiming sources on the right side. Timing references can be assigned to the timingsources.

Clear wait to restore state

Clear wait to restore stateresets the wait to restore timer and the signal status willrevert to normal.

Possible values of theclear wait to restore stateareYesandNo.

MTP 1.1

MTP 1.2

TS 1.<Port#>

TS 4.<Port#>

LP 1.1...LP 1.4

Station clockinput process

Input porttiming

process

STCLK-1

STCLK-2

TRIB-1

TRIB-4

LINE_1

LINE_2

TimingReferences

TimingSources

Timing SourceAssignment

PhysicalPorts

Timing provisioning concepts Retiming

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


9-9

Global wait to restore time

In case of a failure the system switches to a valid reference. When the failure is nolonger present, the system switches back, after a certain waiting period (the switchingis revertive). This waiting period is called theglobal wait to restore time. It can rangefrom 0 minutes to60 minutes. The signal status will becomewait to restore.

The global wait to restore timesetting holds for all the timing in the NE. That is, forthe timing sources, for the system timing, and for the station clock output timing.

Port mode

The user can enable or disable the option for monitoring a timing source. If a timingsource is monitored, the timing source will forward thereference failand referenceunequippedalarms to the management system when applicable.

Monitoredcan have the valuesAuto, Yes, or No.

Protection reference

The protection ports that can be assigned to the timing sources:

Timing sources Possible timing references

TRIB-1 TP2.1 to TP2.2

TRIB-2 TP2.1 to TP2.2

QL-in

When the quality level is read from the S1-byte or the Sa-bit from the timingreferences, it is reflected in theQL-in parameter. This parameter can have all of thedefined quality level values; see“Timing quality levels” (p. 9-6).

QL-in status

The user can view the status of the incoming quality level (QL-in status) for eachtiming source. Possible values are:

QL-in status Description

Valid The received quality level is in the valid range.

Invalid The received quality level falls outside the validrange or is unstable.

Not supported The corresponding input port does not provideS1-byte extraction.

Not applicable No reference is assigned to the timing source, or theassigned signal experiences a reference fail.

Timing provisioning concepts Parameters for provisioning timing sources

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

QL-out

The QL-out parameter indicates the actual quality level value of the timing source thatis used by the system timing block and the station clock output block. TheQL-outvalue, is the quality level that enters the system timing and station clock output blocks.WhenQL-provisionedis AUTO, QL-out equalsQL-in. WhenQL-provisionedhas avalue which is different fromAUTO, QL-out equalsQL-provisioned.

QL-provisioned

The quality level of timing references can be provisioned by the user. The provisionedquality level is calledQL-provisioned.In case of a timing reference without anS1-byte,QL-provisionedallows the user to provision a quality level.

When a timing reference does have an S1-byte (QL-in can be read by the system), thisQL-provisioned. can be set toAuto; in this case the S1- byte will be read from theincoming signal and will be sent to the System Timing function.

Reference fail

When the incoming signal cannot provide a timing reference, the timing reference isconsidered to fail.Reference failcan take the valuesYesor No.

Signal status

The signal status is received in the timing sources block and forwarded to the systemtiming block and the station clock output timing block. Possible values are:

Signal Status Description

Not Connected No reference is assigned to the timing source.

Failed A timing link fail is declared for the assigned timing link.

Wait to Restore The assigned reference signal will be available again whenthe Wait to Restore timer has expired.

Normal The logical timing source is assigned to a valid timingreference.

Switch request

Switch requests are shown in the table, together with their description and priority.

Priority Switch Request Description

No request This is the default value. The system timing is operatingunder normal conditions.

1 Clear Replaces the status by the normal status (in case of aprevious switch).


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


9-11

Priority Switch Request Description

2 Forced to working Unconditional switch, issued by the user, even if this isservice degrading.

3 Forced to protection Unconditional switch, issued by the user, even if this isservice degrading.

4 Reference failure Initiates a switch to protection. This request is not issuedby the user, but by the node itself.

5 Manual to working A conditional switch, which is issued by the user. Theswitch will not be performed if it is service degrading.

6 Manual to protection A conditional switch, which is issued by the user. Theswitch will not be performed if it is service degrading.

Switch status

This parameter indicates the latest switch request. When no protection reference isprovisioned, this parameter is not available. The possible values of this parameter arelisted in the table below:

Switch Status Description

No request No switch request has been issued.

Forced to worker A forced switch has been made to the timingreference that is provisioned as the worker timingreference.

Forced to protection A forced switch has been made to the timingreference that is provisioned as the protection timingreference.

Manual to worker A manual switch has been made to the timingreference that is provisioned as the worker timingreference.

Manual to protection A manual switch has been made to the timingreference that is provisioned as the protection timingreference.

Failed No switch could be made.

No protection has been provisioned

Timing source

Physical timing references can be assigned to logical timing sources. Once a timingreference is assigned to a timing source, no other reference can be assigned to thesame source.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Transmission protected

Transmission protected indicates whether the timing reference is MSP-protected fortransmission. The values fortransmission protectedareYesandNo.

Worker reference

The worker ports that can be assigned to the timing sources:

Timing sources Possible timing references

STCLK-1 MTP1.1, MTP1.2

STCLK-2 MTP1.1, MTP1.2

LINE_1 LS1

LINE_2 LS2

TRIB-1 to TRIB-4 TS1, TS2, TS3, or TS4

Parameters for provisioning system timing

Introduction

The system timing functional block in the NE is responsible for:

• Selecting the timing sources to synchronize the system

• Selecting the timing mode for the system

• Translating the quality level into the S1-byte of the outgoing signal

The different parameters that can be set in the system timing functionality are indicatedin the following figure:


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


9-13

Active timing source

The active timing sourceindicates the timing source currently used to synchronize thesystem, together with theswitch statusof the source and the latest issuedswitchrequest.

Lock out request

The lock outstate can be changed with thelock out requestparameter. This can be setto no request, clear, or set.

The lock out requestis for maintenance purposes. A timing source, which has a priorityvalue assigned to it, can be temporarily locked out. When the timing source is alreadydisabled,set is rejected. Alockout requestis set tono requestautomatically when thetiming source is disabled.

To turn off a locked out state, the lock out request must be set toclear.

Whenpriority = disabled the lock out requestfield is greyed out.

When a timing source is locked out, the NE is in the abnormal state.

Lockout

The user can disable a specific timing source that enters the timing source selectionwithout changing the priority settings. If a timing source is locked out, it will not takepart in the timing source selection.

Whether a timing source is locked out is indicated by thelockoutparameter. Thepossible values for thelockoutparameter are:yesandno.

STCLK-1

STCLK-2

TRIB_1

TRIB_3

Free Running

Holdover

TRIB_2

TRIB_4

TimingSource Selection

TimingMode Selection

Clock Distributionto all transport units

LINE_1

LINE_2

Timing Sources

Timing provisioning concepts Parameters for provisioning system timing

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Priority

The priority can be set for each timing source. There is a maximum of 8 timingsources. Thepriority can have values from1 to 8.

The priority parameter can also have the valuedisabled. A disabled timing source willnot be taken account in the timing source selection for the system timing.

Make sure not to provision identical priority values to multiple timing sources.

QL

The quality level of a timing source, that is used for automatic timing mode selection.This QL is identical to the QL-out as described in“Parameters for provisioning timingsources” (p. 9-9).

Switch request

Switch requests are shown in the table in order of priority, together with theirdescription.

Switch request Description

No Request This is the default value. The system timing isoperating under normal conditions.

Clear Replaces the status by the normal status (in case of aprevious switch).

Forced Unconditional switch, issued by the user, even if it isservice degrading.

Manual A conditional switch, which is issued by the user.The switch will not be performed if it is servicedegrading.

Switch status


Value Description

No Request No switch request has been issued.

Clear The former switch request is cleared. Switching willbe system controlled after this request.

Forced to <timing source> A forced switch has been made to a timing source asindicated by the user.

Manual to <timing source> A manual switch has been made to a timing sourceas indicated by the user.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


9-15

System and output timing QL mode

The timing reference switchcan operate in two modes:QL-enabledandQL-disabled.

• If the timing reference switchis set toQL-enabled, it selects the source accordingto the quality level and the source priorities (if two or more sources have equal,highest quality levels)

• If the timing reference switchis set toQL-disabled, it selects the best sourceaccording to the signal status and the priorities (if several sources have equal signalstatus).

Signal status

The signal status is received in the timing sources block and forwarded to the systemtiming block and the station clock output timing block. Possible values are:

Signal Status Description

Not connected No reference is assigned to the timingsource.

Failed A timing link fail is declared for theassigned timing link.

Wait to restore The assigned reference signal will beavailable again when the wait to restoretimer has expired.

Normal The logical timing source is assigned to avalid timing reference.

System QL

This parameter shows the quality level value of the timing signal used to clock thesystem. Possible values are the quality levels as described in“Timing quality levels”(p. 9-6).

Timing mode

This parameter is used to set one of the three timing modes:locked, holdover, andfreerunning. The nature of the modes is discussed in“Network element timing” (p. 9-1).

Timing state

While operating in thelockedmode, the incoming reference becomes unacceptable, thetiming mode selector switches toholdover. This is reflected in thetiming stateparameter. When the system stays in the lock out mode, the timing status remainsnormal.

In free runningor lockedmode, thetiming statealways reflectsnormal.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Parameters for provisioning station clock output

Introduction

The station clock output functional block in the NE is responsible for selecting thetiming source for the station clock output (SCO).

Acceptance QL

The user can provision anacceptance QL, applicable for both station clock outputports (if more than one). This quality level is the minimal quality level value that isaccepted by the station clock output process. If the quality level of the signal for thestation clock output falls below theacceptance QL, the NE “squelches” the stationclock output signal.

Active timing source

The active timing sourceindicates the timing source currently used to synchronize thesystem, together with theswitch statusof the source and the latest issuedswitchrequest.

Lock out request

The lock outstate can be changed with thelock out requestparameter. This can be setto no request, clear or set.

The lock out requestis for maintenance purposes. A timing source, which has a priorityvalue assigned to it, can be temporarily locked out. When the timing source is alreadydisabled,set is rejected. Alockout requestis set tono requestautomatically when thetiming source is disabled.

LINE_1

LINE_2

TRIB_1

TRIB_3

System Timing

TRIB_2

TRIB_4

TimingSource Selection Source Selection

Station ClockOutput Process

StationClockOutput

Timing Sources

Timing provisioning concepts Parameters for provisioning station clock output

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


9-17

To turn off a locked out state, the lock out request must be set toclear.

Whenpriority = disabled the lock out requestfield is greyed out.

Important! When a timing source is locked out, the NE is in theabnormalstate.

Lockout

The user can disable a specific timing source that enters the timing source selectionwithout changing the priority settings. If a timing source is locked out, it will not takepart in the timing source selection.

Whether a timing source is locked out is indicated by thelockoutparameter. Thepossible values for thelockoutparameter are:yesandno.

Output QL

In case of independent timing,QL-out is not necessarily equal to the system qualitylevel.

Output state

The user can view theoutput stateof the signal generated by the station clockoutput(s). Possible values arenormal, disabled, andunacceptable.

• Normal indicates that the output in not disabled and has a quality level above theacceptance QL.

• Disabledindicates that the station clock output is disabled.

• Unacceptableindicates a quality level below theacceptance QL, or a signal statusis failed.

Priority

The priority can be set for each timing source. There is a maximum of 6 timingsources. Thepriority can have values from1 to 8.

The priority parameter can also have the valuedisabled. A disabled timing source willnot be taken account in the timing source selection for the system timing.

Signal type

The signal typefor the station clock outputs is read only parameter, equivalent of theread and write parameter:2 Mbps signal mapping. It is identical for these two types ofstation clock outputs. These values are:

Signal type Description

2 MHz A 2 MHz clock signal.

2 Mbps framed A 2 Mbps tributary signal, with a framed structure.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Source selection

The station clock output timing can be derived from the active system clock processesor from the independent station clock output timingsource reference selector. This isprovisioned by the user. Two options are available:

• System timing

• Independent station clock timing.

STCLK output

The user can enable or disable thestation clock output. If it is disabled it forwards nosignal at all and cannot be used.

Switch request

Switch requests are shown in the table in order of priority, together with theirdescription.

Switch request Description

No request This is the default value. The system timing isoperating under normal conditions.

Clear Replaces the status by the normal status (in case of aprevious switch).

Forced Unconditional switch, issued by the user, even if it isservice degrading.

Manual A conditional switch, which is issued by the user.The switch will not be performed if it is servicedegrading.

If QL=enabled, the switch will not be performed if itis service degrading.

If QL=disabled, the switch will be performed even ifit is service degrading.

Switch status


Value Description

No request No switch request has been issued.

Clear The former switch request is cleared. Switching willbe system controlled after this request.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


9-19

Value Description

Forced to <timing source> A forced switch has been made to a timing source asindicated by the user.

Manual to <timing source> A manual switch has been made to a timing sourceas indicated by the user.

System and output timing QL mode

The timing reference switchcan operate in two modes:QL-enabledandQL-disabled.

• If the timing reference switchis set toQL-enabled, it selects the source accordingto the quality level and the source priorities (if two or more sources have equal,highest quality levels)

• If the timing reference switchis set toQL-disabled, it selects the best sourceaccording to the signal status and the priorities (if several sources have equal signalstatus).

Timing source

Physical timing references can be assigned to logical timing sources. Once a timingreference is assigned to a timing source, no other reference can be assigned to thesame source.

Parameters for provisioning output port timing

Introduction

Transmission ports are managed by a number of parameters, which are related totiming.

This is shown in the functional diagram below:


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Acceptance QL

For each individual 2 Mbps tributary output port in there-timedmode, anacceptanceQL can be provisioned.

If the system QL(in case of system timing) or theQL-out (in case of independenttiming) falls below theacceptance QL, the timing will go into thefallback mode.

Fallback mode

If a 2 Mbps port is operating in there-timedmode and if thesystem and output QLmodeis enabled, the output is automatically switched to the provisionedfallback mode,if the quality level of the system timing drops below theacceptance QL.

The threefallback modes are:

• re-timed AIS– a re-timed AIS is sent out.

• self-timed– the signal is sent out, from the port in theself-timedmode.

• none– no fallback applies.

Force DNU

Force DNUallows to force an S1 byte valueDNU into an outgoing signal.

The values forForce DNUare given below:

Option Description

Yes A DNU is forced on the outgoing signal

No No DNU is forced on the outgoing signal

No request This option resets a force DNU setting. It is thedefault value forForce DNU.

Output porttiming process

(SDH output ports)

FromStation Clock

Output

ClockDistribution

Output porttiming process

(2 Mbps output ports)

FromStation Clock

Output

ClockDistribution

Timing provisioning concepts Parameters for provisioning output port timing

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


9-21

When an outgoing signal is forced to carry DNU, this signal cannot be used forsynchronization by another NE.

Forced DNU

Forced DNUis a read only parameter. It indicates whether a DNU is forced on anoutgoing signal.

Outgoing QL

Outgoing QLindicates the quality level that is sent out on a given transmission outputport which supports S1-byte quality level information carriage.

SSM out

SSM outdisplays the current S1 byte value that is sent out from the selected port.

Timing mode

The timing mode of each individual 2 Mbps tributary output port can be set to theself-timedor re-timedmode:

• In the self-timedmode the 2 Mbps signal is extracted from the container contentsof the VC-12.

• In the re-timedmode, the timing of the 2 Mbps output signal is derived from theNE system timing; the 2 Mbps signal is routed through the elastic buffer.

If the ISDN modeof a 2 Mbps ISDN port is set toleased line (LL), the default valueof the timing modeparameter will bere-timed.

Timing alarm reporting

When thetiming stateof a 2 Mbps tributary output port isfallback, a defect isdeclared. The reporting of thistiming alarmcan beenabledor disabledfor eachindividual 2 Mbps tributary output port. This is done with thetiming alarm reportparameter.

Timing state (port)

The (port) timing stateof each individual 2 Mbps tributary output port can be viewed.The (port) timing statecan have two values:

• Normal: The port operates as specified in the timing mode

• Fallback: The timing mode has fallen back as specified in thefallback modeparameter.

Timing provisioning concepts Parameters for provisioning output port timing

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

10 10Timing provisioning tasks

Overview

Purpose

This chapter informs how to perform the most common tasks related to timingprovisioning.

Contents

To view a list of NE timing ports 10-2

To modify an NE timing port 10-3

To view a list of NE system timing sources 10-5

To modify an NE system timing source 10-6

To modify NE system timing status details 10-7

To view a list of NE timing sources 10-9

To modify an NE timing source 10-10

To view a list of station clock output timing sources 10-12

To modify a station clock output timing source 10-13

To modify NE station clock output timing status 10-14

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


10-1

To view a list of NE timing ports

When to use

Use this task to view a list of NE timing ports.

Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:



3. In theCategory field, selectTiming References .

4. In theFunction field, selectRetrieve/Set Port Information .

5. Click Go.

Result: The NE Timing Ports page appears displaying a list of timing ports for anNE.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Timing provisioning tasks To view a list of NE timing ports

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

To modify an NE timing port

When to use

Use this task to modify an NE timing port.

Related information

If you want to prevent an outgoing signal from being used for synchronization byforcing it to DNU, follow the instructions provided in“To modify the parameters of aphysical or logical port” (p. 6-26).

Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:




4. In theFunction field, selectRetrieve/Set Port Information .

5. Click Go.

Result: The NE Timing Ports page is displayed. It includes a list of timing portsfor an NE.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click the radio button next to the NE timing port you wish to modify.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Timing provisioning tasks To modify an NE timing port

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


10-3

Result: The Modify NE Timing Port page is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


• Port mode – the configured mode of the port. Possible values are:

– Monitored: The port is in service and carrying traffic. Fault reporting andperformance monitoring are enabled.

– Not Monitored: The port is out of service and is not carrying live traffic. Faultreporting and performance monitoring are disabled.

– Auto: The port is in an “automatic” state (that means a pre-service state). Faultreporting and performance monitoring are disabled. The port will change to theMonitoredstate after a fault free signal has been detected and the pre-servicetimer expires.

• Auto mode time (min) – the pre-service timer. The time that a continuous, faultfree signal is required on the port before the port is brought into service. Enter aninteger in the range of 0 minutes to 30 minutes.

• Signal type – the 2 Mbps signal mapping of the station clock input ports. Selectone of the following, depending on the type of signal that is provided:2MHz,2Mbit/s Unframed, 2Mbit/s Framed, 64KHz, or Not Specified.

• Sa Bit – if a framed 2 Mbps signal is used, this parameter specifies if SSMextraction from the station clock input signal is enabled and (if yes) the Sa bitcarrying the SSM words. Select one of the following:

– Disable Extraction: SSM extraction is disabled.

– 4: SSM extraction is disabled, Sa bit 4 is used.





...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click Submit .

Result: The NE timing port is modified.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Timing provisioning tasks To modify an NE timing port

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

To view a list of NE system timing sources

When to use

Use this task to view a list of NE system timing sources.

Related information

See also:

• “Parameters for provisioning system timing” (p. 9-13)

Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:




4. In theFunction field, selectRetrieve/Set System Timing Source Information .

5. Click Go.

Result: The NE System Timing Sources page is displayed. It includes a list ofsystem timing sources for an NE.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Timing provisioning tasks To view a list of NE system timing sources

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


10-5

To modify an NE system timing source

When to use

Use this task to modify an NE system timing source.

Related information

See also:


Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 View a list of NE system timing sources using the task“To view a list of NE systemtiming sources” (p. 10-5).

Result: The NE System Timing Sources page is displayed. It includes a list ofNE system timing sources for an NE.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Click the radio button next to the NE system timing source you wish to modify.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Result: The NE System Timing Source details page is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


• Priority – the priority of the timing link from a system timing source entering atiming link switch. Possible values are eitherDisabled, or 1 through8. If thesource is disabled, it does not participate in the timing link switching. The range ofpriorities depends on the maximum number of timing sources that a given timinglink switch can use as inputs. Priority 1 is the highest priority.

• Lockout Request – clears or sets the locked out status of the system timingsource. If a lockout request is set, the system timing source cannot participate inthe timing link switching. Possible values are:No Request, Set, or Clear.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click Submit .

Result: A progress indication followed by a confirmation is issued in theMessagesection of theNE System Timing Source details page, and the NE system timingsource is modified.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Timing provisioning tasks To modify an NE system timing source

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

To modify NE system timing status details

When to use

Use this task to modify NE system timing status details.

Related information

See also:


Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:




4. In theFunction field, selectRetrieve/Set System Timing Status Information .

5. Click Go.

Result: The NE system timing status details page is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


• Switch Request – requests an NE system timing switch action. Select one of thefollowing: No Request, Clear, Forced, or Manual.If the action isForcedor Manual, a timing source to switch to has to be specified.

• Timing mode – the mode to be used by the system timing source. Possible valuesare:

– Free Running: the system time base is supplying timing to the system,uncorrected by any external references, or from historical reference data.

– Holdover: the time base is taking reference from the holdover memory.

– Locked: the system time base is locked to one of the input reference signals asit is determined by the system timing link switch.

Timing provisioning tasks To modify NE system timing status details

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


10-7

• System & output timing QL mode – the quality level mode for system and outputtiming. Possible values are:

– Enabled: The NE selects the best link according to the quality level (QL) of thereference and the source priorities (if several sources have the same highestQL).

– Disabled: The NE selects the best link according to the signal status and thesource priorities (if several sources have the same signal status). Only the linksin the normal status participate in the timing link switching.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click Submit .

Result: A progress indication followed by a confirmation is issued in theMessagesection of theNE system timing status details page, and the NE system timingstatus details are modified.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Timing provisioning tasks To modify NE system timing status details

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

To view a list of NE timing sources

When to use

Use this task to view a list of NE timing sources.

Related information

See also:


Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:




4. In theFunction field, selectRetrieve/Set Timing Source Information .

5. Click Go.

Result: The NE Timing Sources page is displayed. It includes a list of timingsources for an NE.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Timing provisioning tasks To view a list of NE timing sources

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


10-9

To modify an NE timing source

When to use

Use this task to modify an NE timing source.

Related information

See also:


Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 View a list of NE timing sources using the task“To view a list of NE timing sources”(p. 10-9).

Result: The NE Timing Sources page is displayed. It includes a list of NE timingsources for an NE.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Click the radio button next to the NE timing source you wish to modify.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Result: The NE Timing Source details page is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


• Working reference – a timing reference (external signal which can be used forsynchronization purposes) assigned as worker to a given timing source. When notiming reference is assigned to the timing source, the worker reference isNone.When a single timing reference is assigned, its identity is given by the workingreference. For an NE which supports timing reference protection, and when twotiming references are assigned, the working reference gives the identity of theworker timing reference.

• Protection reference – A timing reference (external signal which can be used forsynchronization) assigned as protection to a timing source.

• Switch Request – requests a timing protection switch action. Select one of thefollowing: No Request, Clear, Forced to Working, Forced to Protection, Manual toWorking, or Manual to Protection.This field is only available if a timing protection has been set up for the respectivetiming source.

Timing provisioning tasks To modify an NE timing source

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

• QL provisioned – allows to specify the acceptance quality level. If the stationclock output timing source falls below that value, the NE reacts as specified withthe setting of theSquelch method field. Possible values are:

– PRC: primary reference clock

– SSU_L: synchronization supply unit-local

– SSU_T: synchronization supply unit-transit

– SEC: SDH equipment clock

– DNU: the output timing signal should not be used for synchronization.

– Auto: the timing source forwards the incoming QL value toward the timing linkswitches; otherwise the timing source overrides the incoming QL with theprovisioned one.

– Monitored – determines whether defects are monitored for the timing source. Atiming source can report the alarms link failure or link unequipped. Selectyesor no.

– Clear wait to restore state – if this field is changed from the defaultno to yes,the wait to restore timer is reset, and the signal status reverts to “Normal”.

– Global wait to restore time – the period a timing source will wait, after therestoration of a reference signal following a timing link failure, before thetiming source reverts to normal operation. Applies to all timing sources. Enteran integer value in the range 0 min. to 60 min.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click Submit .

Result: A progress indication followed by a confirmation is issued in theMessagesection of theNE Timing Source details page, and the NE timing source ismodified.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Timing provisioning tasks To modify an NE timing source

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


10-11

To view a list of station clock output timing sources

When to use

Use this task to view a list of station clock output (SCO) timing sources.

Related information

See also:

• “Parameters for provisioning station clock output” (p. 9-17)

Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:




4. In theFunction field, selectRetrieve/Set Station Clock Output Timing SourceInformation .

5. Click Go.

Result: The NE SCO Timing Sources page is displayed. It includes a list of SCOtiming sources for an NE.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Timing provisioning tasks To view a list of station clock output timing sources

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

To modify a station clock output timing source

When to use

Use this task to modify a Station Clock Output (SCO) timing source.

Related information

See also:


Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 View a list of SCO timing sources using the task“To view a list of station clockoutput timing sources” (p. 10-12).

Result: The NE SCO Timing Sources page is displayed. It includes a list of SCOtiming sources for an NE.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Click the radio button next to the SCO timing source you wish to modify.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Result: The NE SCO Timing Source details page is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


• Priority – the priority of the timing link from a system timing source entering atiming link switch. Possible values are eitherDisabled, or 1 through8. If thesource is disabled, it does not participate in the timing link switching. The range ofpriorities depends on the maximum number of timing sources that a given timinglink switch can use as inputs. Priority 1 is the highest priority.

• Lockout Request – clears or sets the locked out status of the station clock outputtiming source. If a station clock output timing source lockout request is set, thestation clock output timing source cannot participate in the timing link switching.Possible values are:No Request, Set, or Clear.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click Submit .

Result: A progress indication followed by a confirmation is issued in theMessagesection of theNE SCO Timing Source details page, and the SCO timing source ismodified.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Timing provisioning tasks To modify a station clock output timing source

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


10-13

To modify NE station clock output timing status

When to use

Use this task to modify settings of the station clock output (SCO) timing status.

Related information

See also:


Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:




4. In theFunction field, selectRetrieve/Set Station Clock Output Timing StatusInformation .

5. Click Go.

Result: The NE station clock output timing status details page is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


• Switch Request – requests an NE station clock output switch action. Select one ofthe following: No Request, Clear, Forced, or Manual.If the action isForcedor Manual, a timing source to switch to has to be specified.

• Timing source to switch to – the timing source to be used for the switch requestfrom the drop-down list of available line or tributary timing sources. This fieldapplies to forced or manual switches.

Timing provisioning tasks To modify NE station clock output timing status

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

• System & output timing QL mode – the quality level mode for system and outputtiming. Possible values are:

– Enabled: The NE selects the best link according to the quality level (QL) of thereference and the source priorities (if several sources have the same highestQL).

– Disabled: The NE selects the best link according to the signal status and thesource priorities (if several sources have the same signal status). Only the linksin the normal status participate in the timing link switching.

• Station clock output – enables or disables the station clock output signal.

• Signal type – the type of the signal generated by the station clock output ports.This field is displayed if thestation clock outputis enabled. Possible values are:2MHz, 2Mbit/s Framed, 2Mbit/s Unframed, or 6MHz.

• Force DNU – allows to force an S1-byte valueDNU into the outgoing clock signal.This field is displayed if the signal type is2Mbit/s Framed. If an outgoing clocksignal is forced to carry DNU, this signal cannot be used for synchronization byanother NE. Possible values are:Yes, No, or No Request.

• Squelch method – determines what is done with the signal if the station clockoutput timing source falls below the value in theAcceptance QLfield. This field isdisplayed if the signal type is2Mbit/s Framed. Possible values are:

– DNU: do not use this signal

– AIS: replace the signal with AIS

• Select Sa bit – allows to specify the Sa bit carrying the SSM words for the2 Mbps framed clock output signal. Possible values are4 to 8

• Source selection – the source selection for the station clock output timing.Possible values are:

– System Timing: the station clock output timing is derived from one of thesystem clock processes.

– Independent: the station clock output timing is derived from the independentstation clock output timing link switch

• Acceptance QL – allows to specify the acceptance quality level. If the stationclock output timing source falls below that value, the NE reacts as specified withthe setting of theSquelch method field. Possible values are:

– PRC: primary reference clock

– SSU_L: synchronization supply unit-local

– SSU_T: synchronization supply unit-transit

– SEC: SDH equipment clock


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


10-15

• Regenerator loop – can be set in order to avoid timing loops in the office betweenthe timing output ports and one or both of the timing inputs through a stand alonesynchronization equipment (SASE). Timing loops might happen, if the NE forwardstiming to the SASE via one or both of the external timing output ports, and at thesame time receives a timing signal from the SASE via one or both of the externaltiming input ports. Possible values are:

– None: the regenerator loop functionality is disabled. Timing loops are notconsidered.

– MTP1.1: if the quality level of the incoming framed 2-Mbps timing signal atthe external timing input 1 is equal to the quality level of the timing signal thatis transmitted to the external timing output ports,Do not use forsynchronization (DNU)is inserted for the outgoing timing signal as a timingloop might be present.

– MTP1.2: if the quality level of the incoming framed 2-Mbps timing signal atthe external timing input 2 is equal to the quality level of the timing signal thatis transmitted to the external timing output ports,Do not use forsynchronization (DNU)is inserted for the outgoing timing signal as a timingloop might be present.

– Both: the regenerator loop functionality is applied to both external timinginputs.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click Submit .

Result: A progress indication followed by a confirmation is issued in theMessagesection of theNE station clock output timing status details page, and the SCOtiming status is modified.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

11 11Traffic provisioningconcepts

Overview

Purpose

This chapter presents concept information related to traffic provisioning on 1655Access Multiplexer Universal network elements using OMS.

Contents

SDH traffic provisioning concepts 11-2

Transmission plan 11-2

Cross-connections 11-3

VC-n concatenation 11-8

Subnetwork Connection Protection (SNCP) 11-9

Multiplex Section Protection (MSP) 11-11

Cascaded SNC 11-13

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


11-1

SDH traffic provisioning concepts

Transmission plan

Design transmission plan

Transmission provisioning is based on a transmission plan, which must be availablewhen network connections are to be configured. The transmission plan shows:

• Which ports are terminating ports

• The parameters necessary for manual routing

An example for a transmission plan is shown in the following figure:

The following hints can be used to set up a transmission plan:

• Make a drawing of the current network configuration (for example a ring) in whichto provision a transmission path. It is important to make clear in this drawing howthe NEs are connected to each other.Example: LB side of NE A connected to LA side of NE B.

LA LB

A

LA LB

B

LA LB

C

LB LA

E

LB LA

F

LB LA

D

Terminal

TP2.1 TP2.1

TP1.2

LP1.1

Tributary Ports

#1.111 #1.111 #1.121

#1.153 #1.111#1.122

#1.122 : AU-4/VC numberLB: Line Port BLA: Line Port A

Traffic provisioning concepts SDH traffic provisioning conceptsOverview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

• Identify path channels within the line connections between NEs: first check whichchannels are available.Example: Between NEs A and B: #1.153, between NEs B and C: #1.111 etc. (#1 isAU-4 number 1). A ring with 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal NEs is possibleon STM-1 level and on STM-4, therefore only #1 is available

• Identify NEs in which add-drop cross-connections should be established. These arethe terminating NEs of the transmission path.

• Identify terminating ports. First check which ports are available.Example: TP2.1 in NE A and TP1.2 in NE D.

• Identify the NEs in which through connections should be established (in betweenterminating NEs).Example: NE C.

Cross-connections

Introduction

A cross-connection is made to create a path from one point to another point in thenetwork. A transmission plan is made to provision paths in a network and according tothis plan cross-connections can be made in each NE involved in the path. The OMSestablishes the necessary cross-connections automatically when a network connection iscreated.

Cross-connection shapes

The supported cross-connection shapes (as shown in the graphical display of across-connection) are listed in the following table:

LA LB

A

LA LB

B

LA LB

C

LB LA

E

LB LA

F

LB LA

D

LB: Line Port BLA: Line Port A

Physical Network

Fibers

Traffic provisioning concepts SDH traffic provisioning conceptsTransmission plan

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


11-3

Cross-connectionshape

Diagram Management systemsymbol

Simple (uni), aunidirectionalpoint-to-pointconnection

from port ID 1 to port ID 1

source destination

Simple (bi), abidirectionalpoint-to-pointconnection

from port ID 1 to port ID 1

source destination

Add-drop (bi), part of abidirectional pathprotection scheme

Pathprotectiongroup 2

Pathprotectiongroup 1

to port ID 1

PPG 1 output

from port ID 1

PPG 2 output

to port ID 2

adjunct PPG 1 output

from port ID 2

adjunct PPG 2 output

Ring 1

Ring 2

W P

W P

SDH cross-connection levels

The supported SDH cards provide administrative units (AUs), which are sub-structuredfor lower connectivity levels.

• STM-1– 1 AU-4 is substructured into a combination of the lower TU-3, TU-2, orTU-12 connectivity levels which are compliant with ITU-T recommendation G.707.

• STM-4– 4 AU-4s are substructured into a combination of the lower TU-3, TU-2, orTU-12 connectivity levels which are compliant with ITU-T recommendation G.707.

• STM-16– 16 AU-4s are substructured into a combination of the lower TU-3, TU-2,or TU-12 connectivity levels which are compliant with ITU-T recommendationG.707.

VC-4 Concatenation

The concatenation of four AU-4s provides a mechanism to transport payloads greaterthan the capacity of a single VC-4, for example to transport ATM cells in SDHnetworks.

A concatenated AU-4 group is indicated as AU-4-4C. All cross connections possible forAU-4s can also be made with concatenated AU-4s. The groups are rigorously coupled,therefore the direction and/or SNC protection switching is always set for all four AU4s.

Traffic provisioning concepts SDH traffic provisioning conceptsCross-connections

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

The coupling of AU4s is done by setting the pointer value in all but the leading AU-4to a specific state named the Concatenation Indicator (CI). AU-4-4C is only supportedon STM-4 optical tributary units and on STM-16 lines.

PDH cross-connection levels

The PDH cards that are supported provide fixed VCs as follows:

• 1.5 Mbps– 63 × VC-11 mapped into a substructured VC-4

• 2 Mbps– 63 × VC-12 mapped into a substructured VC-4

• 34 Mbps– 3 ×VC-3s mapped into a substructured VC-4

• 45 Mbps– 3 × VC-3 mapped into a substructured VC-4.

Note: VC11 – DS11 signals (VC-11) are mapped to TU-12 and are treated as VC-12for cross-connections.

Diagrams

The following diagrams show the transmission architecture for the 1655 AccessMultiplexer Universal NE for the variants 1m/1o (1 main unit, 1 option card) and2m/4o (2 main units, 4 option cards). Note that the number of available line portsdepends on the actual SFP configuration.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


11-5

Control & Timing

10

16

Tributary Slot

Main Unit

all capacities are givenin VC-4 equivalents

2 STM-1/-4´ 2 STM-1´

Line Ports

2 5´

76 ´ 76 HO-Matrix

1 16 LO-Matrix6 ´


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Connection points

A cross-connection is made between termination points (TP). On the tributary units, aVC-12 termination point is selected. On the line units, the TU number inside the VC-4must be selected. The TU number consists of 3 numbers:

• k: the number of the TUG-3 inside the VC-4

• l : the number of the TUG-2 inside the TUG-3

• m: the TU-12 number inside the TUG-2.

2 ´ 5

10

16

16 16´ LO-Matrix

Main Unit 1

all capacities are givenin VC-4 equivalents

16

Main Unit 2

Control & Timing Control & TimingLine Ports Line Ports

76 76 HO-Matrix´

10

Tributary Slot 1 Tributary Slot 4Tributary Slot 2 Tributary Slot 3

2 STM-1/-4´ 2 STM-1´2 STM-1/-4´2 STM-1´

76 76 HO-Matrix´

16 16´ LO-Matrix

2 ´ 5

4 ´ 104 ´ 10


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


11-7

Example

VC-n concatenation

Introduction

The concatenation of two VC-ns provides a mechanism to transport payloads greaterthan the capacity of a single VC-n, for example to transport ethernet data in SDHnetworks. This feature is for the LAN tributary only.

VC-3 concatenation

A concatenated VC-3 group is indicated as VC-3-Xv, “v” means virtual concatenation.X can be 1 9.

VC-4 concatenation

A concatenated VC-4 group is indicated as VC-4-Xv, “v” means virtual concatenation.X can be 1 7.

VC-12 concatenation

A concatenated VC-12 group is indicated as VC-12-Xv, “v” means virtualconcatenation.X can be 1 5 for X4IP, 1 63 for the other interface cards.

Virtual concatenation

Virtual concatenation allows the transport of a single VC-n-Xv structure inX individualTU-n without the use of any concatenation indication in the pointer bytes (which is thecase for contiguous concatenation). It only requires the path termination function toprovide concatenation functionality, hence guaranteeing interworking with otherstandard low order connection functions.

TP1.1,1.112

112

TUG-3TUG-2TU-12

VC-12:

100

TUG-3

VC-3:

SlotPort

AU-4 numberVC-12 (or VC-3) number


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Termination

VC-n concatenation is only supported without termination. This means that only VC-n

level cross-connections can be made.

A VC-n-Xv signal is handled likeX individual VC-n3 signals. The same alarms andperformance values are supported as for VC-n. The result of the VC-n-Xv supervisionis copied into theX VC-ns.

• An alarm in an VC-n-Xv group is displayed as one alarm for the entire group.

• X VC-ns can have different path and path trace.

Subnetwork Connection Protection (SNCP)

Introduction

Subnetwork Connection Protection (SNCP)is used to protect the traffic for apre-selected path (path protection). This type of path protection can be used forVC-4-4c, VC-4, VC-3, and VC-12 level.

Definition

Subnetwork connection protection is characterized by sending the signal in bothdirections. When a fault condition occurs the receive NE switches to the protectingline. The capacity for protection cannot be used for any other traffic.

Objective

To be able to protect every provisioned path on an individual basis within asubnetwork.

Outcome

A provisioned subnetwork containing individually paths that are 1+1 protected againstservice failures.

Principle

Subnetwork Connection Protection (SNCP) protection switching provides protectionagainst transmission failures in and between ring add/drop NEs. One leg is selected asa designated worker and the other leg as a designated protecting. This means that thecapacity is used for protection even if the normal route is available. A trail continues touse the working route until a fault condition occurs or an external switch request isissued to switch to the protecting route. This type of protection is non revertive. Thismeans that when a traffic failure in the working route has been cleared, traffic willremain on the protection route until a manual or forced switch is applied, or when afailure occurs on the protection line. This behavior is irrespective of any servicerestoration in the working route.

An example for an SNCP protected path is shown in the following figure:

Traffic provisioning concepts SDH traffic provisioning conceptsVC-n concatenation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


11-9

Subnetwork connection non-intrusive (SNC/N) protection

The switching criteria for SNC/N are based on both signal failures and signal degrade.Signal failures that cause SNC/N protection switch are the same as for SNC/I: AIS(Alarm Indication Signal), UNEQ (unequipped VC), TIM (Trace Identifier Mismatch),TU-AIS and TU-LOP (Loss of Pointer). Signal degrades that cause SNC/N protectionswitching are based on the number of errored blocks detected during a certain period.The threshold that defines when a signal is declared degraded can be set by the user.

The 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal only uses SNC/N protection.

Subnetwork connection inherent protection (SNC/I) protection

The switching criteria for SNC/I are based on signal failures. Signal failures that causeSNC/I protection switch are: AIS (Alarm Indication Signal), UNEQ (unequipped VC),TIM (Trace Identifier Mismatch), TU-AIS and TU-LOP (Loss of Pointer).

NE A NE C

NE B

NE D

workingroute

protectingroute

Traffic provisioning concepts SDH traffic provisioning conceptsSubnetwork Connection Protection (SNCP)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Multiplex Section Protection (MSP)

Introduction

Multiplex Section Protection (MSP)is used to protect the traffic in a point-to-pointconnection against transmission failures (MS-AIS, LOF, LOS, MS-DEG) and portequipment failures. A requirement for this kind of protection is that the transmissionlines are doubled (one working line, one protection line).

Multiplex section protection is applicable for 1655 Access Multiplexer UniversalSTM-1, STM-4 and STM-16 interfaces.

Principle

In a point-to-point connection between NEs protected by MSP, the lines must bedoubled. One pair is selected as a designated worker and the other pair is designatedprotection. The capacity in the protection or standby section must be reserved but isnot available for traffic.

Simply put, the protection or standby section is reserved for the same amount of trafficas the working section and it cannot be used for carrying any other kind of traffic.

A trail continues to use the working route until a fault condition occurs or an externalswitch request is issued to switch to the protection route.

An example for a MSP protected section is shown in the following figure:

Revertive mode

In the case of failure when in theRevertivemode, the traffic switches to the protectionline and switches back when the failure is solved.

Non-revertive mode

In the Non-revertivemode the traffic switches to the protection line in case of a failure.It remains on the protection line even when the failure is solved.

Unidirectional mode

In the case of failure in theUnidirectional mode, only the receive side switches.

Bidirectional mode

In the case of failure in theBidirectional mode, both sides, the transmit and receiveside, are switched.

Protection lineWorking line

Multiplex section

Traffic provisioning concepts SDH traffic provisioning conceptsMultiplex Section Protection (MSP)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


11-11

SONET interworking

The SONET interworking option can be enabled or disabled for interworking withSONET equipment which provides MSP. A SONET network element using MSP canbe connected to the far end of the selected MSP pair.

Timer provisioning

The following are timers that the user can provision:

• Wait-to restore timer

• Hold-off timer

Wait to restore timer

The wait to restore timer applies to ITU / ETSI Mode (Annex A). If, in case ofrevertive switching, the VCs are selected from the protection MS due to a fail ordegrade condition on the working MS, and the condition clears, then the wait to restoretimer is started. When the timer expires, the selector is switched back to the preferredworking state. Each protection group is provided with its own wait to restore timer,which is provisionable from the management system in steps of one minute between 0and 60 minutes. A newly provisioned value of the wait to restore timer does not takeeffect until any current timer has expired.

Hold-off timer

A hold-off timer provides a delay between the moment that the signal fail or degradecondition is set, and the start of the execution of the switchover. Each protection groupcontains one hold-off timer, which is triggered by the four SF/SD condition inputs. Thehold-off timer is started by the activation of the first SF or SD condition. If allconditions are cleared before the hold-off timer terminates, the execution of theswitchover is not be started and is not forgotten.

Each protection group is provided with its own hold-off timer, which can beprovisioned from the management system. A newly provisioned value of a hold-offtimer does not take effect until the hold-off timer has expired.

Fail condition

Whenever a fault condition is present in an MS, and after some integration time haselapsed, the management system indicates the detected fault. This is shown as the failcondition.

MSP protection switch states and protection switch requests

Protection switch requests can be initialized from the management system.

The following switch requests are possible:

• Clear

• Lockout

• Forced switch (to Working or Protection)

• Manual Switch (to Working or Protection)


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

It is also possible to retrieve the protection switch state of the MSP group. Inbidirectional mode, this will be possible for both the near- and far-end sites.

Note that a clear command clears a WTR timer that has not yet expired.

MSP protection switch states

The protection switch states are defined by the slot which is standby (working orprotection) and the group fail condition (Free, Unit Failed, or No Request). Thefollowing protection switch states are supported by the management system:

• P,Free (Protection, Free): The protection slot is the standby slot and the groupcondition is Free.

• W,Free (Working, Free): The working slot is the standby slot and the groupcondition is Free.

• P,UF (Protection, Unit Failed): The protection slot is the standby slot and the groupcondition is Unit Failed.

• W,UF (Working, Unit Failed): The working slot is the standby slot and the groupcondition is Unit Failed.

• P,NR (Protection, No Request): The protection slot is standby slot and the groupcondition is No Request.

• W,NR (Working, No Request): The working slot is standby slot and the groupcondition is No Request.

Cascaded SNC

Introduction

Cascaded SNC is used to implement a single node interconnection to connectsubnetworks.

Within a cross-connect, the system allows a direct connection between the head-end ofone SNC/N protected pair to the tail end of another SNC/N protected pair in bothdirections of transmission. In each direction of transmission, the incoming signal overthe active link is bridged to both the active and standby links in the outgoing direction.The (virtual) connection point between both SNC/N sections is referred to as theZ-point on the management systems.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


11-13

It may be noted that no fault management and performance monitoring is supported onthe Z-point.

Cascading SNC is characterized by providing network connection through one singleNE. The protecting and protected trails are still maintained in the separate subnetworks.The capacity for protection can not be used for any other traffic.

From a functional point of view, it enables to connect subnetworks with one single NEwithout requiring more resources than necessary . (Needing multiple passes through thecross connect unit or extra monitors; TP)

Two or more subnetworks that are connected through one NE. It is also used toseparate operation areas in a network.

Traffic provisioning concepts SDH traffic provisioning conceptsCascaded SNC

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

12 12Traffic provisioning tasks

Overview

Purpose

This chapter informs how to perform the most common tasks related to trafficprovisioning.

Contents

Provisioning of cross-connections 12-2

To view cross-connections 12-2

To add an uncorrelated cross-connection 12-5

To convert a cross-connection 12-7

To delete a cross-connection 12-8

Provisioning of MSP protection groups 12-9

To view a list of MSP protection groups 12-9

To add an MSP protection group 12-11

To modify an MSP protection group 12-13

To delete an MSP protection group 12-14

To operate an MSP protection switch 12-15

Provisioning of SNC/Cascading/DNI protection groups 12-16

View a list of SNC/Cascading/DNI protection groups 12-16

Modify a protection group 12-18

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


12-1

Provisioning of cross-connections

To view cross-connections

When to use

Use this task to view a list of cross-connections on the selected NE.


Related information

See also:

• “Cross-connections” (p. 11-3)


...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:



3. In theCategory field, selectCross-connections .

4. In theFunction field, selectRetrieve/Set Cross-connections .

5. Click Go.

Result: The Search for Cross Connections page is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Select the filter criteria, then clickSearch .

Result: The Cross Connections page is displayed. It includes a list ofcross-connections.

Traffic provisioning tasks Provisioning of cross-connectionsTo view cross-connections

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Task, method 2: using the Protection Groups function

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


• Use the object links to follow this path:Connections → Cross Connections .

• On the Network Map, right-click the NE upon which you wish to execute amanagement function. From theNode menu, selectNetwork Element → CrossConnections .

Result: The Cross Connections page is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Complete the following steps to begin to specify the criteria for your search. Thefollowing sections describe the fields on this page when aCross Connection type ofAll or Correlated is selected.

1. In theCross Connection type field, selectAll or Correlated .



4. In theCross Connection rate field, select the appropriate cross-connection ratesfor the NE type from drop-down menu

5. In theSlot field, select from a list of all slots on that shelf that have ports whichcan be cross-connected at the selected rate from the drop-down menu (optional).

6. In thePort field, select from a list of all ports on that slot that can becross-connected at the selected rate or that contain ports that can becross-connected at the selected rate from the drop-down menu (optional).

7. In theContained port field, when a port has been selected, select from the list ofcontained ports that have cross-connections at the selected rate from the drop-downmenu (optional).

8. In theCross Connection shape field, select the shape of the cross-connection.Values depend on the selected NE type (optional).

9. In theCross Connection label field, select the name applied to thecross-connection. This name is the name of the connection of which the is a part ifthe cross-connection is correlated (optional).

10. In theFixed Cross Connections field, selectInclude or Exclude .The fielddetermines if fixed cross-connections are included or excluded from the searchresults. A fixed cross-connection is a cross-connection created by default for an NE,by either the NE or the OMS, which cannot be created or deleted by a user.

Complete the following steps to begin to specify the criteria for your search. Thefollowing sections describe the fields on this page when aCross Connection type ofUncorrelated is selected.

1. In theCross Connection type field, selectUncorrelated .

2. In theNE type field, select a type of NE (optional).

3. In theNE name field, select the name of an NE (optional).


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


12-3

4. In theCross Connection rate field, select the appropriate cross-connection ratesfor the NE type from drop-down menu

5. In theEvent date and time field, enter the start and end date and time of thesearch range, or use the calendar hyperlink to make selections (optional).

6. In theCross Connection shape field, select the shape of the cross-connection.Values depend on the selected NE type (optional).

7. In theCross Connection label field, select the name applied to thecross-connection. This name is the name of the connection of which thecross-connection is a part if the cross connection is correlated (optional).

8. In theFixed Cross Connections field, selectInclude or Exclude .The fielddetermines if fixed cross-connections are included or excluded from the searchresults. A fixed cross-connection is a cross connection created by default for an NE,by either the NE or the OMS, which cannot be created or deleted by a user.

Click Search

Result: The Protection Groups page is populated with a list of protection groupsin the NE that meet your search criteria.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

To add an uncorrelated cross-connection

When to use

Use this task to add an uncorrelated cross-connection for an NE.

Important! In the standard way of operation, it is not necessary and notrecommended to add cross-connections separately in the network elements. TheOMS creates the necessary cross-connections automatically with theimplementation of network connections.

Related information

See also:


Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 View a list of cross-connections using the task“To view cross-connections” (p. 12-2),“To view cross-connections” (p. 12-2).

Result: The Cross-connections page is displayed. It includes a list ofcross-connections for the selected NE.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Click the New tool in theSearch for Cross Connections area.

Result: The Create Cross Connection page is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


• NE type – select the NE type for which you want to create a cross-connection fromthe list. This field is mandatory.

• NE Name/Find Button – select the name of the NE from the list or enter a searchstring in the field. The first item in the list that matches the search string ishighlighted. If the item that matches the search string is not displayed in the list,click Find to try and locate a match. If no match is found, either enter or selectanother NE name. This field is mandatory.

• Cross-connection rate – Mandatory: This field is populated after you select theNE name. If you want to change the default value, select the new cross-connectionrate from the list menu. Possible values are:VC4-4c, VC-4, LO-VC-3, andVC-12.

• Cross-connection shape – Mandatory: This field is populated after you select theNE name. A default value is populated after you select an NE name. A diagram ofthe default cross-connection shape is displayed below this field. If you want tochange the default value, select the desired shape of the cross-connection. Valuesdepend on the selected NE type.

• Cross connection label – Optional: Enter the cross-connection label.

Traffic provisioning tasks Provisioning of cross-connectionsTo add an uncorrelated cross-connection

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


12-5

• From port ID1 – Either use the hyperlink to access theCross Connection PortSelection List window, select all desired port IDs, and clickOK, or use theFromport ID1 field. This updates thePort ID fields.

• From port ID2 – This field appears based on cross-connection shape. Either use thehyperlink to access theCross Connection Port Selection List window, select alldesired port IDs, and clickOK, or use theTo port ID2 field. This updates thePortID fields.

• From port ID1 BLSR node – Either use the hyperlink to accessSearch for NEs toSelect window, select a network element, and clickOK, or use theFrom port ID1BLSR node field. This updates theFrom port ID1 BLSR node field.

• From port ID2 BLSR node – This field appears based on cross-connection shape.Either use the hyperlink to accessSearch for NEs to Select window, select anetwork element, and clickOK, or use theFrom port ID2 BLSR node field. Thisupdates theFrom port ID2 BLSR node field.

• To port ID1 – Either use the hyperlink to access theCross Connection PortSelection List window, select all desired port IDs, and clickOK, or use theToport ID1 field. This updates thePort ID fields.

• To port ID2 – This field appears based on cross-connection shape. Either use thehyperlink to access theCross Connection Port Selection List window, select alldesired port IDs and clickOK, or use theTo port ID2 field. This updates thePortID fields.

• To port ID1 BLSR node – Either use the hyperlink to access theSearch for NEsto Select window, select a network element, and clickOK, or use theTo port ID1BLSR node field. This updates theTo port ID1 BLSR node field.

• To port ID2 BLSR node – This field appears based on cross-connection shape.Either use the hyperlink to access theSearch for NEs to Select window, select anetwork element, and clickOK, or use theTo port ID2 BLSR node field. Thisupdates theTo port ID2 BLSR node field.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click Submit .

Result: The cross-connection is added.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Traffic provisioning tasks Provisioning of cross-connectionsTo add an uncorrelated cross-connection

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

To convert a cross-connection

When to use

Use this task to convert a protected cross-connection to be unprotected, or to convertan unprotected cross-connection to be protected.

Related information

See also:


Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 View a list of cross-connections using the task“To view cross-connections” (p. 12-2),“To view cross-connections” (p. 12-2).

Result: The Cross-connections page is displayed. It includes a list ofcross-connections for the selected NE.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Click the radio button next to the cross-connection you wish to delete. From theGomenu, selectConvert Cross Connection and clickGo.

Result: The Convert Cross Connection page is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


• Cross Connection Port to Remove – select the port ID you wish to delete theleg.

• From port ID2 – Use the hyperlink to access theCross Connection PortSelection List pop-up screen and select all desired port IDs and clickOK, or enterthe To port ID2 field. This updates the Port ID fields.

• From port ID2 BLSR node – Use the hyperlink to access Search for NEs to Selectpop-up screen and select a network element and clickOK, or enter theFrom portID2 BLSR node field. This updates theFrom port ID2 BLSR node field.

• Cross Connection label – change the name applied to the cross-connection(optional)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click Submit .

Result: The cross-connection is converted

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Traffic provisioning tasks Provisioning of cross-connectionsTo convert a cross-connection

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


12-7

To delete a cross-connection

When to use

Use this task to delete a cross-connection for an NE.

Important! In the standard way of operation it is not necessary and notrecommended to delete cross-connections separately in the network elements. TheOMS deletes the cross-connections automatically with the deletion of networkconnections.

Related information

See also:


CAUTION


Deletion of a cross-connection may be traffic affecting.

Before starting to delete a cross-connection, ensure that it is not in use. The trafficprovided on the respective path must have previously been removed (for examplererouted to another path) before deleting any of the cross-connections included in thatpath.

Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 View a list of cross-connections, using the task“To view cross-connections” (p. 12-2),“To view cross-connections” (p. 12-2).

Result: The list at the bottom of theCross-connections page is populated with alist of cross-connections that meet your search criteria.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Click the radio button next to the cross-connection you wish to delete. From theGomenu, selectDelete and clickGo.

Result: The cross-connection is deleted.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Traffic provisioning tasks Provisioning of cross-connectionsTo delete a cross-connection

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Provisioning of MSP protection groups

To view a list of MSP protection groups

When to use

Use this task to view a list of Multiplex Section Protection (MSP) groups.

There are two methods for this task. Note that the options available on the openedMSP Protection Groups page following method 1 are slightly different from theoptions available on theProtection Groups page opened using method 2.

Related information

See also:

• “Multiplex Section Protection (MSP)” (p. 11-11)

Task, method 1: using the NE Management Functions option

...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:




4. In theFunction field, selectRetrieve/Set MSP Protection .

5. Click Go.

Result: The MSP Protection Groups page is displayed. It includes a list of MSPprotection groups on the NE.

Traffic provisioning tasks Provisioning of MSP protection groupsTo view a list of MSP protection groups

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


12-9

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Task, method 2: using the Protection Groups function

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


• Use the object links to follow this path:Network Elements → ProtectionGroups .

• On the Network Map, right-click the NE upon which you wish to execute amanagement function. From theNode menu, selectNetwork Element→ Protection Groups .

Result: The Protection Groups page is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................




3. In theProtection group name field, type the protection group name (optional).

4. In theProtection group type field, select1+1 MSP.

5. In theRate field, select the port rate (optional).

Click Search

Result: The Protection Groups page is populated with a list of protection groupsin the NE that meet your search criteria.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Traffic provisioning tasks Provisioning of MSP protection groupsTo view a list of MSP protection groups

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

To add an MSP protection group

When to use

Use this task to add a Multiplex Section Protection (MSP) protection group in an NE.To prepare a fully functional protected multiplex section, a matching MSP protectiongroup has to be established in the NE on the opposite end of the multiplex section aswell. After the MSP protection groups have been set up on both sides, the protectedmultiplex section can be added as a network connection.

Related information

See also:


Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 View a list of MSP protection groups on an NE using the task“To view a list of MSPprotection groups” (p. 12-9), “Task, method 1: using the NE Management Functionsoption” (p. 12-9).


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 On the toolbar, click theNew tool.

Result: The MSP Protection Group Details page is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


• Working Section – from the list of ports, select the port designated for the workersection of the 1+1 MSP.

• Protection Section – from the list of ports, select the port designated for theprotection section of the 1+1 MSP.

• MSP mode – select the mode of operation. Possible values areETSI (complieswith ETSI standard ETS 300 746, and ITU-T recommendation. G.841, G.783) or1+1 Optimised(complies with NTT specification, and G.841, G.783).For 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal, selectETSI.

• Communication mode – select the method of message communication forprotection switching. Possible values areunidirectionalor bidirectional, wherebidirectional is the usual selection.This field is only displayed ifMSP modeis set toETSI.

Traffic provisioning tasks Provisioning of MSP protection groupsTo add an MSP protection group

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


12-11

• Switch mode – select the mode of protection switching associated with theprotection group. Possible values are:

– Non Revertive: when a protection switch occurs, the traffic will not revert backto the failed resource on recovery.

– Revertive: when a protection switch occurs and the failed resource recovers, thetraffic will switch back, but only after the wait to restore period has expired.

This field is only displayed ifMSP modeis set toETSI.

• Wait to restore time (minutes) – select an amount of time, in minutes, for thewait-to-restore timer to run. Possible values are 0 min. to 60 min. A newlyprovisioned value of the wait-to-restore time does not take effect until any currenttime has expired. This field is only displayed ifMSP modeis ETSIandswitchmodeis revertive.The wait to restore time applies in cases of revertive switching. When the VCs areselected from the protection MS due to a fail or degrade condition on the workingMS, and the condition clears, the wait-to-restore timer is started. When the timerexpires, the selector is switched back to the preferred working state.

• Wait to rename time (minutes) – select an amount of time, in minutes, for thewait-to-rename timer to run. Possible values are 0 min. to 60 min. A newlyprovisioned value of the wait-to-rename time does not take effect until any currenttime has expired. This field is only displayed ifMSP modeis 1+1 Optimised.The wait-to-rename time applies in cases when the APS channel is transmitted onboth working and primary sections, and at the receive side selected from theworking or protection section. The section from which the APS is selected isreferred to as secondary.“secondary” The other section is referred to as “primary”.If the VCs are selected from the secondary MS, and the fail or degrade conditionon the primary MS clears, then the wait-to-rename timer is started. When the timerexpires, the secondary MS is renamed to “primary” and the primary MS is renamedto “secondary”.

• SONET interworking – select the option to provision interworking with SONETequipment which provides MSP. Possible values are:

– Enabled: a SONET network element using MSP can be connected to the farend of the selected MSP pair.

– Disabled: a SONET network element using MSP cannot be connected to the farend of the selected MSP pair.

This field is only displayed if the MSP mode is set toETSI, communication modeis Unidirectional, and switch mode isNon-revertive.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click Submit .

Result: A progress indication followed by a confirmation is issued in theMessagesection of theMSP Protection Group Details page, and the MSP protection groupis added.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Traffic provisioning tasks Provisioning of MSP protection groupsTo add an MSP protection group

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

To modify an MSP protection group

When to use

Use this task to modify a Multiplex Section Protection (MSP) protection group.

Related information

See also:


Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 View a list of MSP protection groups using the task“To view a list of MSP protectiongroups” (p. 12-9).


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Click the radio button next to the MSP protection group you wish to modify. From theGo menu, selectModify and clickGo.

Result: The Modify an MSP Protection Group page is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 If the MSP protection group has a switch mode ofrevertive, theWait to restore time(minutes) or theWait to rename time (minutes) field is present, and you may modifythe setting of this field.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click Submit .

Result: A progress indication followed by a confirmation is issued in theMessagesection of theMSP Protection Group Details page, and the MSP protection groupis modified.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Traffic provisioning tasks Provisioning of MSP protection groupsTo modify an MSP protection group

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


12-13

To delete an MSP protection group

When to use

Use this task to delete a Multiplex Section Protection (MSP) protection group.

Related information

See also:


Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 CAUTION


Deletion of a protection could cause a traffic interruption.

Click the radio button next to the MSP protection group you wish to delete. From theGo menu, selectDelete and clickGo.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click Yes.

Result: A progress indication followed by a confirmation is issued in theMessagesection of theMSP Protection Groups page, and the MSP protection group isdeleted.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Traffic provisioning tasks Provisioning of MSP protection groupsTo delete an MSP protection group

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

To operate an MSP protection switch

When to use

Use this task to execute a protection switch (manual to working).

Related information

See also:


Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 CAUTION


A forced switch to a faulty section or lockout of protection could cause a trafficinterruption.

Perform a forced switch only to a section which is working fault-free.

Click the radio button next to the MSP protection group for which you wish to executea protection switch. From theGo menu, select the appropriate action and clickGo. Formore information see“MSP protection switch states and protection switch requests”(p. 11-12).

Result: A confirmation window appears asking you to confirm the protectionswitch.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click Yes.

Result: A progress indication followed by a confirmation is issued in theMessagesection of theMSP Protection Groups page, and the protection switch is executed.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Traffic provisioning tasks Provisioning of MSP protection groupsTo operate an MSP protection switch

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


12-15

Provisioning of SNC/Cascading/DNI protectiongroups

View a list of SNC/Cascading/DNI protection groups

When to use

Use this task to view a list of protection groups.

Task

Complete the following steps to view a list of protection groups.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................




• Use the icons or the object links to follow this path:Network Elements . TheNetwork Elementspage is displayed. Click the radio button next to the NE towhich you wish to send a management function. From theGo menu, selectNEManagement Functions , and click theGo button.

Result: The NE Management Functionspage is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:

1. In theNE type field, select the type of NE. If you selected the target NE in Step 1,this field is already populated with your selection.

2. Select the name of the NE from the list or type the NE name in the text box. Tosearch for an NE name, enter a search string in the text box with a wildcard (*).Click the Find button to locate the NE names that match the search string. If youhad selected the target NE in Step 1, this field is already populated with yourselection.

3. In theCategory field, selectProtection Group.

4. In theFunction field, selectRetrieve/Set SNC / Cascading / DNI Protectionandclick Go.

Traffic provisioning tasks Provisioning of SNC/Cascading/DNI protection groupsOverview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Result: The Search for SNC/Cascading/DNI Protection Groupspage is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 In the Search for SNC/Cascading/DNI Protection Groupspage, do the following:

1. Select the relevant values in theSlot andHigher order TP fields.

2. Select the appropriate value for the Cross-connection rate.

3. Select the appropriate protection group.

4. Click Search .

Result: The protection groups for the selected NE is displayed.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Traffic provisioning tasks Provisioning of SNC/Cascading/DNI protection groupsView a list of SNC/Cascading/DNI protection groups

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


12-17

Modify a protection group

When to use

Use this task to modify a protection group.

Important: Modifying a protection group may affect the traffic.

Task

Complete the following steps to modify a protection group.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


• Use the icons or the object links to follow this path:Network . The Network Map isdisplayed. Right-click an NE icon. From the Node menu, selectNetwork Element→ Protection Groups .

• Use the icons or the object links to follow this path:Network Elements . TheNetwork Elementspage is displayed. Click the radio button next to the NE forwhich you wish to view the protection groups. From theGo menu, selectProtection Group, and click theGo button.

• Use the icons or the object links to follow this path:Network Elements →Protection Groups .

Result: The search panel of the Protection Groups page is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:

1. In theNE type field, select the type of NE. If you selected the target NE in Step 1,this field is already populated with your selection.

2. Select the name of the NE from the list or type theNE name text box.

3. In theProtection group type field, selectProtection Group.

4. In theRate field, select the appropriate value.

5. Click Search .

Result: The Search for Protection Groupsappears displaying the protection groupsfor the selected NE.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click on the appropriate radio button to select a protection group.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 SelectModify protection groupfrom the drop down list at the bottom of theSearch forProtection Groupspage and clickGo.

Result: The Protection group general informationpage appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Modify the appropriate parameters and clickSubmit .

Traffic provisioning tasks Provisioning of SNC/Cascading/DNI protection groupsModify a protection group

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Result: A message appears confirming the successful modification of the selectedprotection group.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Traffic provisioning tasks Provisioning of SNC/Cascading/DNI protection groupsModify a protection group

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


12-19

13 13Ethernet trafficprovisioning concepts

Overview

Purpose

This chapter presents concept information related to ethernet traffic provisioning on1655 Access Multiplexer Universal network elements using OMS.

Contents

TransLAN® Ethernet over SDH implementation 13-1

Virtual concatenation 13-5

Ethernet port provisioning 13-8

TPID (Ethertype) translation 13-12

Auto negotiation and flow control 13-13

Link pass through 13-15

Link aggregation 13-15

Quality of Service (QoS) overview 13-16

Ethernet performance monitoring 13-18

TransLAN® Ethernet over SDH implementation

TransLAN ® overview

TransLAN® is the collective term for the Ethernet SDH Transport Solution whichincludes the transport of Ethernet (up to 10 Mbps), Fast Ethernet (100 Mbps), andGigabit Ethernet (1 Gbps) payload data over an SDH network.

The TransLAN® Ethernet cards allow direct interconnection of data equipment over anSDH transport network. The external data equipment could be an Ethernet switch, anIP router, or a host system such as a user PC or a web server.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


13-1

The TransLAN® implementations all use standardized protocols to transport Ethernetframes over the SDH network. First, the generic framing procedure (GFP) or theproprietary Ethernet over SDH (EoS) method, a pre-standard GFP on several firstgenerationTransLAN® card types, is used to encapsulate the Ethernet frames into theSDH transmission payload. Secondly, virtual concatenation and LCAS are used toallocate a flexible amount of WAN bandwidth for the transport of Ethernet frames.

TransLAN® supports IEEE 802.3 Ethernet frames as well as “Ethernet II” frames(“DIX frames”).

Although optimized for IP,TransLAN® is an Ethernet transport technology. It istransparent to all layer 3 protocols (IP, IPX, DECnet, etc.).

TransLAN ® cards

The following figure illustrates the basic design of aTransLAN® card:

Legend:

A The external interfaces, to which the end-customer’s Ethernet LANs arephysically connected.

Cross-connection unit

PHY PHY PHY PHY

LAN ports

WAN ports


Encapsulation and mapping

Ethernet switchL2

A

B

C

D

Physical interface

Ethernet traffic provisioning concepts TransLAN® Ethernet over SDH implementation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

B The interface between the Ethernet physical interface port and the Ethernetswitch. The internal interfaces of the Ethernet switch toward the Ethernetphysical interface port are referred to as “LAN ports”. Note that two types ofLAN ports can be differentiated according to their port role: “customer LANports” and “network LAN ports”.

C The internal interface between the Ethernet switch and the encapsulation andmapping function. The internal interfaces of the Ethernet switch toward theencapsulation and mapping function are referred to as “WAN ports”. Note thattwo types of WAN ports can be differentiated according to their port role:“network WAN ports” and “customer WAN ports”.

D The interface between the encapsulation and mapping function and thecross-connect function of the network element. This is were the virtuallyconcatenated payload is cross-connected to be transported over the SDHnetwork.

The number of LAN ports and WAN ports differs for the differentTransLAN® cards,refer to the1655 Access Multiplexer Universal Application and Planning Guidefordetailed information.

The TransLAN® implementations use standardized protocols to transport Ethernetframes over the SDH network. The Ethernet over SDH (EoS) method and the genericframing procedure (GFP) are used to encapsulate the Ethernet frames into the SDHtransmission payload. Virtual concatenation and LCAS are used to allocate a flexibleamount of WAN bandwidth for the transport of Ethernet frames as needed for theend-user’s application.

Physical interfaces

The physical interface function provides the connection to the Ethernet network of theend-customer. It performs auto negotiation, and carries out flow control.

The following physical interfaces are enabled on Alcatel-LucentTransLAN® cards:

• 10BASE-T

• 100BASE-TX

• 1000BASE-T

• 1000BASE-SX

• 1000BASE-LX

• 1000BASE-ZX

The supported LAN interfaces for Ethernet and Fast Ethernet applications are10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX. The numbers “10” and “100” indicate the bit rate of theLAN, 10 Mbps (Ethernet) and 100 Mbps (Fast Ethernet) respectively. The “T” or “TX”indicates the wiring and the connector type: Twisted pair wiring with RJ-45 connectors.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


13-3

The supported LAN interfaces for Gigabit Ethernet applications are 1000BASE-T,1000BASE-SX, 1000BASE-LX and 1000BASE-ZX. Again, the number indicates thebit rate of the LAN, 1 Gbps (Gigabit Ethernet). “SX” indicates a short-haul interface,“LX” and “ZX” indicate a long-haul interface (ZX interfaces have an extended reachin comparison to LX interfaces).

Ethernet switch

The Ethernet switch connects the LAN ports with the WAN ports. It performs learning,filtering and forwarding according to the IEEE 802.1D standard.

The physical Ethernet switch can be logically split in multiple, independent switches orport groups, called “virtual switch”. In the transparent tagging modes (LANinterconnect, LAN-VPN or LAN-VPN with QoS), also the name “LAN group” is usedinstead of “virtual switch”.

The following applies to port groups or virtual switches, respectively:

• A virtual switch defines a spanning tree domain, and can be assigned a mode ofoperation (LAN interconnect, LAN-VPN or LAN-VPN with QoS).

• A virtual switch includes any number (at least 2) of external Ethernet LAN portsand/or internal WAN ports associated with a VC-n-Xv payload.

• Traffic betweenvirtual switches isnot possible.

• Each port can be a member of only one virtual switch at a time.

• A VLAN must have all its port members inside a single virtual switch.

In the following example, a virtual switch is provisioned that connects 2 LAN portswith 1 WAN port:

Supported frame sizes

The 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal supports Ethernet frames of up to 1650 bytes.The X8PL card of the 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal supports Ethernet frames ofup to 1600 bytes.

LAN

LAN

SDH transportnetwork

Virtual switch

LANports

WANports

TransLAN physicalEthernet switch


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Ethernet encapsulation with GFP

The generic framing procedure (GFP) is used to adapt the asynchronous Ethernetpayload to the synchronous SDH server layer.

A GFP-header (8 octets) is prepended to each Ethernet frame to indicate frame lengthand payload type. Gaps between Ethernet frames are filled with “IDLE” frames (4octets each).

GFP, standardized by the ITU-T in the recommendations G.7041 and Y.1303, is a veryefficient encapsulation protocol because it has a fixed and small overhead per packet.


The SDH granularity problem

The virtual containers of the SDH have fixed sizes. These virtual containers areimportant for the transport of Ethernet frames over the SDH network:

• VC-12: 2 Mbps

• VC-3: 50 Mbps

• VC-4: 150 Mbps

It is difficult to fit the Ethernet traffic into one of these virtual containers. For manyapplications the containers, or contiguously concatenated virtual containers, such asVC-4-4C (600 Mbps) for example, are either too small or too big. This is known asthe granularity problem.

Virtual concatenation is a mechanism by which a number of independent VCs can beused to carry a single payload. This way, the granularity problem is solved.

Possible payload sizes and the virtual containers that are used for the transport areshown in the following table:

Payload Virtual containers Concatenation

2 Mbps 1 × VC-12 VC-12

4 Mbps 2 × VC-12 VC-12-2v

6 Mbps 3 × VC-12 VC-12-3v

8 Mbps 4 × VC-12 VC-12-4v

10 Mbps 5 × VC-12 VC-12-5v

IDLE GFPHEADER Ethernet frame IDLE IDLE GFP

HEADER

GFPHEADER Ethernet frame IDLE IDLEEthernet frame


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


13-5

Payload Virtual containers Concatenation

50 Mbps 1 × VC-3 VC-3

100 Mbps 2 × VC-3 VC-3-2v

150 Mbps 1 × VC-4 VC-4

300 Mbps 2 × VC-4 VC-4-2v

450 Mbps 3 × VC-4 VC-4-3v

600 Mbps 4 × VC-4 VC-4-4v

750 Mbps 5 × VC-4 VC-4-5v

900 Mbps 6 × VC-4 VC-4-6v

1 Gbps 7 × VC-4 VC-4-7v


Virtual concatenation can be used for the transport of payloads that do not fitefficiently into the standard set of virtual containers (VCs).

Virtual concatenation splits the contiguous bandwidth into individual VCs, transportsthese VCs separately over the SDH network, and recombines them to a contiguoussignal at the path termination. An important aspect of virtual concatenation is that itonly needs to be supported at the end nodes(for example at theTransLAN® cards thatinterface with the end-customer’s LAN). The rest of the network simply transports theseparate channels.

Example 1

As an example, the following figure shows the virtual concatenation of 5 × VC-12:

Ethernet traffic provisioning concepts Virtual concatenation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

The 10 Mbps payload is put into a VC-12-5v, that means into a virtual concatenationgroup (VCG) consisting of 5 virtually concatenated VC-12s. These VC-12s can travelthe network independently, and do not have to follow the same route. At the endpoint,the VC-12-5v is reassembled, and the payload is extracted.

Example 2

The second example shows the principle of virtual concatenation in a Gigabit Ethernet(GbE) network application. Protection of the virtually concatenated payload is possiblevia standard SDH transmission protection schemes.

Differential delay

Due to the different propagation delay of the VCs a differential delay occurs betweenthe individual VCs. This differential delay has to be compensated and the individualVCs have to be re-aligned for access to the contiguous payload area.

The TransLAN® re-alignment process covers a differential delay of at least 32 ms.

VC-12-5v

10 MbpsEthernet payload

VC-12 VC-12 VC-12VC-12VC-12

VC-12 VC-12 VC-12VC-12VC-12

VC-12-5v

0 1 2 3 4

0 1 2 3 4

10 MbpsEthernet payload

LAN LANWAN WAN

Network element Network element

Ethernetframe

EthernetframeVC-4-7v VC-4-7v


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


13-7

Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme (LCAS)

The Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme (LCAS)is an extension of virtual concatenationthat allows dynamic changes in the number of channels in a connection. In casechannels are added or removed by management actions this will happen without losingany customer traffic.

LCAS allows a bandwidth service with scalable throughput in normal operation mode.In case of failure the connection will not be dropped completely but only the affectedchannel(s). The remaining channels will continue carrying traffic. LCAS providesautomatic decrease of bandwidth in case of link failure and re-establishment after linkrecovery.

In case only one end supports (or has turned on) the LCAS protocol, the side that doessupport LCAS adapts automatically to the restrictions that are dictated by thenon-supporting end, that means the entire link behaves as a link that does not supportin-service bandwidth adaptations.

Ethernet port provisioning

Customer-role and network-role ports

The user can assign a so-called “port role” to WAN ports as well as to LAN ports. Inthis way it is possible to forward VLAN tags, especially in double-tagging mode, alsovia LAN ports. Additionally it is possible to run the STP and GVRP protocols onphysical LAN ports, too.

Each LAN port or WAN port can have one of the following port roles:

Role Description

Customer Customer-role ports are usually located at the edge of the switchedTransLAN®

network boundary, providing the Ethernet interface to the end-customer. Ethernetframes may be but need not necessarily to be tagged.

In the majority of cases, LAN ports are customer-role ports. However, two LAN portsconnected via an Ethernet LAN link would be an example of network-role LAN ports.Another example would be a trunking LAN port connected via an Ethernet LAN linkto an ISP router (where VLAN tags are needed for further processing).

Network Network-role ports usually interconnect the nodes that make up theTransLAN®

network. Ethernet frames need to be tagged.

In the majority of cases, WAN ports are network-role ports. However, a WAN portwhich is connected to an Ethernet private line unit (EPL unit), thus extending theswitchedTransLAN® network boundary, would be an example of a customer-roleWAN port.

The following figure serves to visualize the concept of customer-role and network-roleports.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Flexible port role assignment

In most cases physical LAN ports have the customer role and physical WAN portshave the network role, but there may be exceptions in some applications. In thefollowing figure the WAN port connects an EPL link and is therefore at the edge of theTransLAN® network. Thus it has the customer role in this case.

In the example in the following figure the VLAN tags have to be forwarded to arouter. The router uses the tagging information for its switch decisions. Additionallythe LAN port must fulfil a network role. In this case it behaves like a node of theTransLAN® network. It could also participate in the STP in order to avoid loops, ifthere was another link from a Router LAN interface to a second node within theTransLAN® network.

EPL unit

Customer LAN port

Network LAN port

Customer WAN port

Network WAN port

“neutral” LAN port

“neutral” WAN port

Ethernet LAN link

SDH link (virtually concatenated VCs)

Switched TransLANnetwork boundary

LAN unit “Ethernet over SDH”

EPL link

LAN

WAN port (“customer role”)

TransLANTM networkLAN unit

Ethernet traffic provisioning concepts Ethernet port provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


13-9

A LAN port which operates in the “network role” behaves like a WAN port in terms ofVLAN tagging, STP and GVRP.

The default settings are shown in the following table:

Physical ports

Port role LAN port WAN port

Customer role default

Network role default

In the IEEE 802.1Q STP virtual switch mode and in the provider bridge mode, the portrole of each LAN and WAN port can be flexibly assigned. Each LAN or WAN portcan be configured to be either a customer-role or network-role port.

These are the characteristics of customer-role and network-role ports:

Customer-role port Network-role port

In the IEEE 802.1Q STP virtual switchmode:

In the ingress direction, untagged Ethernetframes are tagged with a default identifier,the port VLAN identifier (PVID). ThePVID is removed from each frame at eachnetwork egress port.

In the provider bridge mode:

A provider bridge tag carrying a customeridentifier (CID) is inserted into eachEthernet frame in the ingress direction,and removed from the frame in thereverse direction. Frames that are alreadytagged become double tagged.

No tagging or untagging operations areperformed.

The spanning tree protocol (STP) isnotsupported.

The spanning tree protocol (STP) can beenabled (default setting) or disabled.

LAN unitLAN unit “Ethernet over SDH”

LAN TransLANTM network

LAN port (“network role”)

Router

LAN unitLAN unit

Forbidden acc. to STP


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Customer-role port Network-role port

GVRP is not supported.

VLAN IDs or CIDs need to be configuredmanually.

GVRP can be enabled (default setting) ordisabled.

Dynamic VLAN IDs or CIDs ofintermediate and access nodes areautomatically configured if GVRP isenabled.

Ingress rate control exists at “UNI” and“E-NNI” ports only.

There is no rate control on “I-NNI” ports.

The traffic class encoded in the p1 and p2bits of the incoming frames is evaluatedand transparently passed through.

Fix port-role assignment in the VPN tagging modes

In all the operational modes relying on the VPN tagging mode the port role is fixed:

• LAN ports arealwayscustomer role ports.

• WAN ports arealwaysnetwork role ports.

This port-role assignment in the VPN tagging modes cannot be changed.Corresponding provisioning options that might be available on the graphical userinterfaces of the management systems do not apply to the VPN tagging modes and areblocked.

Repeater mode

In the repeater mode, there is no necessity to distinguish between customer-role andnetwork-role ports, because the repeater mode can only be used in point-to-pointconfigurations, and there is:

• no tagging mechanism,

• no spanning tree, and

• no GVRP or STVRP.

In the repeater mode, there is simply a LAN port and a WAN port. The LAN portprovides the connection to the end-customer LAN, and the WAN port provides theconnection to the SDH transport network.

Example

As an example, the following figure shows a possible network application:


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


13-11

Legend:

UNI port User-Network-Interface (always a customer-role port)

I-NNI port Internal Network-Network Interface (always a network-role port)

E-NNI port External Network-Network Interface (here a trunking network-role port)

TPID (Ethertype) translation

Functional principle

On specific gateway ports, it is possible to translate the value of the VLAN TPID(Ethertype) of the outermost VLAN tag (S-tag) of every outgoing IEEE 802.1ad frameinto a different provisionable TPID value. The inverse function is present in the reversedirection.

TransLAN

EPL

Trunk routerTrunk router

Tagging Area

Protocol Area

DiffServ Area

UNI

UNI

UNI

E-NNII-NNI I-NNI

I-NNI I-NNI

I-NNI

Customer-role port

Network-role port


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

This TPID (Ethertype) translation, also referred to as “Ethertype swapping” ischaracterized as follows:

• The TPID (Ethertype) translation is supported

– on network-role ports only.

– in the provider bridge mode only.

• One replacement Ethertype is supported per card.

Auto negotiation and flow control

What is auto negotiation?

Auto negotiation enables IEEE 802.3 compliant devices with different technologies tocommunicate their enhanced mode of operation to interoperate and to take maximumadvantage of their abilities.

Once each peer is aware of its link partners abilities, auto negotiation enables thedetermination of the following capabilities:

• Transmission speed.Two nodes with auto negotiation will use the highest transmission speed availableto both nodes.

• Full duplex or half duplex.Two nodes with auto negotiation will use full duplex communication if there areonly two stations in the collision domain. Otherwise, they will use half duplexcommunication.The Gigabit Ethernet interfaces always operate in full duplex mode.

• Flow control on or offIf the auto negotiation has established a full duplex connection, it is possible to useflow control, if both stations have that capability.

Auto negotiation rules

For auto negotiation, the following rules apply:

• The highest speed available to both nodes is chosen.

• Full duplex will be used, if possible.

• E/FE nodes will fall back to 10 Mbps and half duplex, if a node does notunderstand auto negotiation.

Auto negotiation illustrations

In the following network configuration, the hub, the router, PC 1 and PC 2 can handle100 Mbps. All the nodes (PCs, hub and router) are part of the same collision domain,so all the connections have to be half duplex.

Ethernet traffic provisioning concepts TPID (Ethertype) translation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


13-13

The following network configuration has a switch instead of a hub. This separates thecollision domains, and enables full duplex communication.

What is flow control?

The purpose of flow control is to prevent loss of frames. Flow control on a LAN portis the ability of this port to request its peer to temporarily stop sending traffic (pauseoperation).Pause operation is only meaningful for strict point-to-point connections(one LAN port, one WAN port), operating in full duplex mode.

The Ethernet MAC sublayer is required to perform two main functions: DataEncapsulation and Media Access Management. To perform these functions, First-in,First-out (FIFO) queues are used to store frame data. In an ideal world, there would beno data loss due to limitations in network performance or FIFO sizing. In the realworld, data is lost without a mechanism to limit frame transmission. Data is lost whenpacket data is received faster than it is transmitted, resulting in filling of the FIFOs.MAC devices either overwrite data in the FIFOs (loss of oldest data) or stop writing tothe FIFOs (loss of newest data).

To avoid this data loss, MAC devices must slow down the receive-data stream until thetransmit stream has caught up. Flow control is the methodology used to throttle thereceive data stream to keep from completely filling the FIFOs. This has created anindustry challenge to balance the amount of throughput loss due to flow control versusthe amount of data loss without flow control.

RouterHub

PC 1

PC 2Auto negotiation

100 Mbpshalf duplex

Auto negotiation100 Mbpshalf duplex

Auto negotiation100 Mbpshalf duplex

Switch Router

Auto negotiation100 Mbpsfull duplex

PC 1

PC 2



Ethernet traffic provisioning concepts Auto negotiation and flow control

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Flow control mechanism

IEEE 802.3 specifies that flow control must only be implemented for full duplexoperation.

The IEEE 802.3 flow control mechanism is accomplished within the MAC controlsublayer. The FIFO begins to fill as frames are received. Once the FIFO has reached apre-programmed threshold, the MAC Control sublayer signals an internal state machineto transmit a “PAUSE” frame. This signal informs the link partner to halt transmissionfor a specified length of time, referred to as “X off”. The MAC continues to transmit“PAUSE” frames with the programmed idle time as long as the threshold has beenexceeded. If the FIFO level falls below the threshold prior to the expiration of thistime, another “PAUSE” frame is sent with a zero time specified to re-enabletransmission, referred to as “X on”.

Link pass through

General

The Gigabit Ethernet and Fast Ethernet interfaces support the so-called Link PassThrough (LPT) mode. 1655 AMU supports two LPT modes: LPT with Restart andLPT without Restart and this behavior is valid for all PHY types: 10BASE-T,100BASE-Tx, 100BASE-Fx, 100 BASE-Bx, 1000BASE-T, 1000BASE -sx/LX or 1000BASE-BX.

The LPT mode can be used to enable or improve network protection schemes on theequipment and can be enabled or disabled per GbE/FE port. It is possible to enableLPT only on point-to-point Ethernet connections.

The LPT mode can be enabled or disabled per GbE/FE port.

Important: The LPT mode is only supported on GbE/FE ports (LAN ports) thatoperate in a strict one-to-one association with a WAN port using GFP encapsulation.

Link aggregation

General

Link aggregation allows to bundle (“aggregate”) a number of ports with theirtransmission capacity to form a link aggregation group (LAG), which can be treated asif it were a single (logical) link.

Thus, link aggregation can be used to provide link protection and also increase thetransmission capacity by transporting a higher capacity signal over a number ofbundled, lower capacity links.

Ethernet traffic provisioning concepts Auto negotiation and flow control

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


13-15

Quality of Service (QoS) overview

Introduction

Quality of Service (QoS) control allows to differentiate between Ethernet frames withdifferent priorities. If traffic with a high priority and traffic with a low priority competefor SDH capacity, the traffic with the high priority should be served first. This can berealized through quality of service control.

QoS control is supported on the E/FE and Gigabit Ethernet cards, in the IEEE 802.1QVLAN tagging mode and the IEEE 802.1ad VLAN tagging mode (provider bridgemode). QoS control is implemented as a DiffServ architecture applied to layer 2 (inaccordance with IETF recommendations on differentiated services, cf. www.ietf.org).

Quality of service configuration options

Information on theTransLAN® QoS provisioning options depending on the configuredmode of operation is provided in the following table:

Mode of operation Ethertype QoS CQS Oversubscriptionmode

Ingress rate control HoL blockingprevention

Repeater mode – [disabled] [disabled] [none] [disabled]

VPNmode

LANinterconnect

[0xFFFF] [disabled] [disabled] [none] [disabled]

LAN-VPN 1 [0xFFFF] [disabled] [enabled] strict policing [enabled]

oversubscription

LAN-VPNwith QoS

2

[0xFFFF] [enabled] [enabled] none [enabled]

strict policing

oversubscription

STP virtual switch modecompliant withIEEE 802.1Q(IEEE 802.1Q singletagging mode)

0x8100 [enabled] [disabled] none [enabled]

strict policing

STP virtual switch modecompliant withIEEE 802.1ad (Providerbridge mode)

0x06010xFFFF

(≠ 0x8100)

disabled

1

[enabled] strict policing [enabled]

oversubscription

enabled

2

[enabled] none [enabled]

strict policing

oversubscription

Notes:

1. Entries in square brackets indicate an implicit selection. If in the “QoS CQS” column for example theentry is “[disabled]”, then the preceding selection of tagging and operation mode implies thatquality ofservice – priority classification, queueing and scheduling (QoS CQS)is not available. It is implicitlydisabled, and cannot be enabled.

2. The numbers in curly braces indicate equivalent modes of operation.

Ethernet traffic provisioning concepts Quality of Service (QoS) overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

3. The Ethertype can be set per virtual switch. However, as all virtual switches of aTransLAN® card areswitched in common, it is effectively set perTransLAN® card.

4. The distinction between the STP virtual switch mode compliant with IEEE 802.1Q and the STP virtualswitch mode compliant with IEEE 802.1ad (provider bridge mode) can be realized by provisioning theEthertype. When the provider bridge mode has been selected (Ethertype provisioned in the range 0x0600 0xFFFF, but unequal to 0x8100), then a further distinction can be made by enabling or disabling qualityof service – priority classification, queueing and scheduling (QoS CQS).

5. If “HoL blocking prevention” is enabled then frames that are destined for an uncongested port will not bediscarded as a result of head-of-line blocking.

Ingress rate control provisioning method

Ingress rate control can only be provisioned per port.

Service level agreements

On the 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal the responsibility for admission control isleft to the operator. This means there is no check that the Service Level Agreements onalready existing connections can be fulfilled, when a new user starts sending data fromnode A to B.

In this respect the notion of over-subscription factor is important. This is the factor bywhich the calculated bandwidth, based on (for example) the traffic matrices of theoperators sharing a link, exceeds the physically available bandwidth. Althoughtheoretically the bandwidth can only be guaranteed for an over-subscription factor≤ 1,in practice an over-subscription factor of 5-10 can be used without giving problems.Due to the effects of statistical multiplexing it is safe to “sell the bandwidth more thanonce”. The burstiness of the traffic from individual customers that share a commonlink makes this possible. The service level agreements give a quantification for the“statistics” of the multiplexing.

Provisioning LAN and WAN ports details

The provisioning of the classifier and rate controller per flow is done only on theingress customer-role port (LAN port). On the network ports (WAN port), only thescheduler for the egress queues is provisionable.

It is important that some of the QoS settings are provisioned consistently on all portsthroughout the whole customer’s VPN domain. In the LAN-VPN (M-LAN) operationmode, the rate controller mode (none, strict policing, oversubscription) must beprovisioned consistently (per virtual switch). The latter applies to the only. For thescheduler, for each egress queue the mode = strict_priority/weighted_bandwidth andcorresponding weights (per virtual switch) must be provisioned consistently. This isensured by a background aging function of the system. The parameter will be enforcedto be set equally.

Ethernet traffic provisioning concepts Quality of Service (QoS) overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


13-17

Ethernet performance monitoring

Performance counters

On the VC-12, VC-3, or VC-4 termination points connected to a WAN port, standardSDH performance monitoring can be activated. The same counters that apply forVC-12, VC-3, or VC-4 termination points on any other port also apply to the VC-12,VC-3, or VC-4 termination points on a WAN port.

Apart from this standard SDH performance monitoring, a limited amount of countersthat are dedicated to LAN/WAN ports are defined. Activation of these counters can beestablished by setting:

• the LAN/WAN port mode to monitored

• selecting a LAN port or WAN port as active PM point

• setting the PM point type to LAN or WAN.

The supported counters are:

• CbS (total number of bytes sent)

• CbR (total number of bytes received)

• pDe (total number of errored packets dropped)

Note that CbS and CbR are rather traffic monitoring counters than performancemonitoring counters, as they give insight in the traffic load in all places in the network.pDe is a real performance monitoring counter as it gives an indication about theperformance of the network. Only unidirectional PM is supported for these parameters.

See the following figure for the location of the measurements. Note that because of thedifference in units, bytes versus packets, the counters cannot be correlated with eachother. Also the counter for dropped packets considers only packets dropped due toerrors, and does not include packets dropped due to congestion.

CBS

CBR

PDE

PDE

CBS

CBR

Layer-2switchingfunction

EthernetSDH/SONET

WANLANportport

Ethernet traffic provisioning concepts Ethernet performance monitoring

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

14 14Ethernet trafficprovisioning tasks

Provisioning ethernet over SDH

To view spanning tree parameters

When to use

Use this task to view the spanning tree parameters.

Before you begin

The management system automatically creates spanning trees when a Virtual SwitchNetwork (VSN) is added to the system or is modified.

Task

Complete the following steps to view spanning tree parameters.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


• Use the icons or the object links to follow this path:Connections → SpanningTree Parameters

• From any Left Navigation Zone, selectSpanning Tree Parameters .

• From the Go list of the Virtual Switch Network, selectSpanning Tree Parameters.

Result: The Spanning Tree Parameters page is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 In the Search by field, select either theVirtual Switch Network radio button or theVirtual Switch radio button. The default isVirtual Switch Network . If you selectVirtual Switch Network , go to step 3. If you selectVirtual Switch , go to step 5.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Enter the name of theVirtual Switch Network (VSN) field in the type-ahead list orselect a VSN from the list. This field is mandatory. The default is a blank selection.Only one entry/selection is allowed.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


14-1

Note: The Virtual Switch Network field is only displayed if you selectedVirtualSwitch Network in the Search by field.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Go to step 8.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Enter theNE name for the virtual switch. A maximum of 20 characters is allowed.This is a mandatory field.

Note: The Virtual Switch field is only displayed if you selectedVirtual Switch inthe Search by field.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Enter theSlot for the Virtual Switch. A maximum of 20 characters is allowed. This isa mandatory field.

Note: The Slot field is only displayed of you selectedVirtual Switch in theSearch by field.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Enter theVirtual Switch ID for the Virtual Switch. A maximum of 4 characters isallowed. This is a mandatory field.

Note: The Virtual Switch ID field is only displayed of you selectedVirtual Switchin the Search by field.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Click the Search button.

Result: The spanning tree parameters that meet your search criteria are displayed.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Ethernet traffic provisioning tasks Provisioning ethernet over SDHTo view spanning tree parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

To provision a virtual switch in spanning tree mode

When to use

Use this task to:

• create an Ethernet service route for round trip delay (RTD) measurements.

• provision the related parameters of the test frame that is required for RTDmeasurements.

Before you begin

Please observe the following before beginning the procedure:

• Proper LAN card is installed in order to be able to make performance LANmeasurements.

• Cross-connection should be enabled and VCG should be set to monitored.

• Provision VCG between source NE and target NE where RTD measurements isperformed. The WAN ports (source/target NE) used while creating VCG shouldmatch with WAN ports (source/target NE) used while creating virtual switch andvirtual LAN.

Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Use the object links to follow this path:Connections → Virtual Switches .

Result: The Vitual Switches page is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 In the search for virtual switches panel click the New button right to the drop downmenu.

Result: The Add Virtual Switches page is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Do the following:

1. In theNE name field, type the name of the target NE.

2. For theVirtual Switch mode , select the appropriate mode and clickSearch .

Result: A list of virtual switches for the selected NE appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Select a virtual switch from the list.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 From the drop-down list at the bottom of the page, selectSpanning Tree parametersand clickGo.

Ethernet traffic provisioning tasks Provisioning ethernet over SDHTo provision a virtual switch in spanning tree mode

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


14-3

Result: The Spanning Tree Parameters page appears. TheObject name columnof the table lists the members of the current spanning tree. Each name is ahyperlink.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


• If the Object type field shows a Node, click the hyperlink for the name of theobject in that row that you want to modify.

• If the Object type field shows a Node, click the radio button in that row for theobject you want to modify. From the Go menu, selectSpanning Tree parametersand click theGo button.

Result: The Modify Spanning Tree Node Parameters page is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 In the Priority field, enter integer from 0 to 65535 that indicates the priority to begiven to the spanning tree node.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 If the Maximum age (sec) field can be modified, enter the number to indicate thenumber of seconds in which the node is to wait until it receives ahello BridgeProtocol Data Unit (BPDU).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 If the Forward delay (sec) field can be modified, enter a number to indicate themaximum number of seconds in which a port can be in an intermediate state.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 If the Hello (sec) field can be modified, enter a number to indicate the maximumnumber of seconds in which the root can transmit ahello Bridge Protocol Data Unit(BPDU) to ensure that all nodes are still available.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 Click the Submit button.

Result: The existing spanning tree node is updated in the management systemdatabase. TheJob Updates page is updated and the activity is recorded in the UserActivity Log.

Important To view the results of the parameter changes on the spanning trees, waitseveral seconds and then click theRefresh icon in theSpanning Tree Parameterspage.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Ethernet traffic provisioning tasks Provisioning ethernet over SDHTo provision a virtual switch in spanning tree mode

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

View layer 2 access control list

When to use

Use this task to view the layer 2 access control list, which enables you to selecttunnelling and discarding of PDUs of the specified protocol types.

Task: from the NE Management Functions page

Complete the following steps to view Layer 2 Access Control List information.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................




• Use the icons or the object links to follow this path: Network Elements. TheNetwork Elements page is displayed. Click the radio button next to the NE towhich you wish to send a management function. From the Go menu, selectNEManagement Functions , and click theGo button.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:

1. In theNE type field, select the type of NE. If you selected the target NE in step 1,this field is already populated with your selection.

2. Select the name of the NE from the list or type the NE name in the text box. Tosearch for an NE name, enter a search string in the text box with a wildcard (*).Click the Find button to locate the NE names that match the search string. If youselected the target NE in step 1, this field is already populated with your selection.

3. In theCategory field, selectData services.

4. In theFunction field, selectRetrieve/Set Ethernet Portsor Retrieve/Set VirtualSwitchesor Retrieve/Set VLANS.

5. Select an ethernet port from the list, and then select theLayer 2 Access control listoption from theGo list.

6. Click theGo button.

Result: The Layer 2 Access Control List page is displayed.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Ethernet traffic provisioning tasks Provisioning ethernet over SDHView layer 2 access control list

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


14-5

To define an ethernet service route for round trip delaymeasurements

When to use

Use this task to:

• create an ethernet service route for round trip delay (RTD) measurements,

• provision the related parameters of the test frame that is required for RTDmeasurements,

Before you begin




• provision VCG between source NE and target NE where RTD measurements isperformed. The WAN ports (source/target NE) used while creating VCG shouldmatch with WAN ports (source/target NE) used while creating virtual switch andvirtual LAN.

Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Use the object links to follow this path:Connections → Vitual Switches .


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 In the search for virtual switches panel click theNew button right to the drop downmenu.

Result: The Add Virtual Switches page is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Do the following:

1. In theNE type field, select the type of the target NE.

2. In theNE name field, enter the name of the source or target NE.

3. In theSlot field, select the slot type. – Note: Changes of the “Virtual Switchmode” (item 4) can limit the value choices of this field.

4. For theVirtual Switch mode , click the radio buttonIEEE 802.1ad or IEEE 802.1Qfor the VLAN bridge, then a preselection of the slot values used with the respective“Virtual Switch mode” value occurs.

Ethernet traffic provisioning tasks Provisioning ethernet over SDHTo define an ethernet service route for round trip delay

measurements....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Note: When selecting:

• IEEE 802.1ad, then QoS oversubscription option will get disappear from virtualswitch creation form. In this case QoS oversubscription is enabled by default.

• IEEE 802.1Q, then the option for QoS oversubscription in virtual switchcreation form is displayed and it should beEnabled . If the QoSoversubscription option isDisabled , then RTD controller address cannot beretrieved from OMS which is mandatory for RTD measurement.

5. In theLabel field, type the label name (optional).

6. For theAutomatic VLAN ID registration mode , click the radio buttonEnabled .

7. For theQOS oversubscription , click the radio buttonEnabled , if the “VirtualSwitch mode” isIEEE 802.1Q (item 4).

8. For theStatic MAC address table mode , click the radio buttonEnabled orDisabled (default) and for RTD measurement.

9. For theDynamic MAC address table mode , click the radio buttonNo specificlimit .

10. ForLAN ports , move a LAN port from the available field to the selected field byusing the> button between.

11. ForWAN ports , move a WAN port from the available field to the selected field byusing the> button between.

12. Click Submit .

Result: A progress indication followed by a confirmation is issued in theMessagesection of theAdd Virtual Switches page and the newVirtual Switchis added.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Do the following:

1. From the left navigation zone, click> left to Connections and then selectVitualSwitches to open theVitual Switches page or click directly onVitual Switchesin the page title zone.

2. In theVirtual Switch mode field, selectIEEE 802.1Q for the VLAN bridge.

3. Click Search .

Result: The Virtual Switches panel is populated at the bottom containing a list ofrecords that meet your search criteria.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Mark the previously addedVirtual Switchof task 3, selectVirtual LAN list from theGo menu and clickGo.

Result: The Virtual LANs page is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 In the search for virtual LANs panel click rightmost theNew button.


measurements....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


14-7

Result: The Create Virtual LAN page is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Do the following:

1. In theVLAN ID field, select a VLAN ID.

2. For LAN ports , move a LAN port from the available field to the selected field byusing the> button between.

3. For WAN ports , move a WAN port from the available field to the selected field byusing the> button between.

4. Click Submit .

Result: A progress indication followed by a confirmation is issued in theMessagesection of theCreate Virtual LAN page and the newVirtual LAN is created.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Do the following:

1. From the left navigation zone, click> left to Connections and then selectVitualSwitches to open theVitual Switches page or click directly onVitual Switchesin the page title zone.

2. In theVirtual Switch mode field, selectIEEE 802.1Q for the VLAN bridge.

3. Click Search .


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Mark the previously addedVirtual Switchof task 3, selectGet round-trip-delaycontroller address from theGo menu and clickGo.

Result: A progress indication followed by a confirmation with (e.g.Theround-trip-delay controller address is 000f25112a83) is issued in theMessagesection of theVirtual Switches page.

Use theDetails button left to theNE name column to get more information of therespective virtual switch settings.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Mark the previously addedVirtual Switchof task 3, selectService routes from theGomenu and clickGo.

Result: The Service Routes page is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 In the search for service routes panel click rightmost theNew button.


measurements....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Result: The Create Service Route page is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12 Do the following:

1. In theLabel field, type a up to 20 character long string.

2. In theDestination MAC Address field, type the RTD controller address (task 9) ofthe target NE or fetch it from theJob updates page. Use theDetails button left tothe Response status column to receive/copy the respective data.

3. In theVLAN Id field, type the VLAN id (task 7) or fetch it from theJob updatespage. Use theDetails button left to theResponse status column to receive/copythe respective data.

4. For theFrame color , selectGreen , if not previously selected.

5. For theTraffic class , select0, if not previously selected.

6. In theFrame length field, type minimum64.

7. SelectPerform one-shot measurement , this affects that after submission aone-shot measurementwill be automatically performed. If this field is “notselected” theone-shot measurementcan be perform later, refer to taskPerforming a one-time round trip delay measurement for test purposes .

8. Click Submit .

Result: A progress indication followed by a confirmation (e.g.one-shotmeasurement time was 5309 microseconds) is issued in theMessage section of theCreate Service Route page.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13 Retry task 2 to 12 to create thevirtual settingsof the target NE and then continue withtask 14.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14 Do the following:

1. From the left navigation zone, click> left to Connections and then selectNetwork Connections to open theNetwork Connections page.

2. In theConnection name field, type * for wildcard search.

3. Click Search .

Result: The Network Connections panel is populated at the bottom containing alist of records that meet your search criteria. Use theDetails button left to theConnection name column to view the complete RTD measurement connectionsettings.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................


measurements....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


14-9

To delete an Ethernet service route

When to use

Use this task to delete an Ethernet service route for round trip delay (RTD)measurements.

Before you begin

Ensure that proper LAN card with Ethernet connections already exists, otherwise thistask cannot be performed.

Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:

1. In theNE name field, enter the name of target NE (optional).

2. In theVirtual Switch mode , selectIEEE 802.1Q for the VLAN bridge.

3. Click Search .


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Mark theVirtual Switch NEon which you wish to delete a service route, selectService routes from theGo menu and clickGo.

Result: The Service Routes page is displayed containing a list of records in thebottom panel.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Mark the service route, if previously not marked, selectDelete from theGo menu andclick Go.

Result: A confirmation window appears asking you to confirm the deletion.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click Yes.

Result: A progress indication followed by a confirmation is issued in theMessagesection of theService Routes page and the service route is deleted.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Ethernet traffic provisioning tasks Provisioning ethernet over SDHTo delete an Ethernet service route

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

View a list of Link Aggregation Groups (LAGs)

When to use

Use this task to view a list of Link Aggregation Groups (LAGs).

Task

Complete the following steps to view a list of LAGs.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Use the icons or the object links to follow this path:

Network Elements → Link Aggregation Groups

Result: The search panel of theLink Aggregation Groups page is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 In the NE type field, select a type of NE.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 In the NE name field, select the name of the NE from the drop-down menu or enter asearch string in the text box. The NE name is the same as the Target Identifier (TID)of the NE. The first item in the list that matches the search string is highlighted. If theitem that matches the search string is not displayed in the list, click theFind button totry and locate a match. If no match is found, either enter or select another NE Name.This is a mandatory field.

If Domain Partitioning is enabled, the list of NE names only contains the names of theNEs that are in your domain.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Optional: In theLink Aggregation Group label field, enter the label of group to bedisplayed. An asterisk (*) can be used as a wild card.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click the Search button.

Result: The list at the bottom of theLink Aggregation Groups page is populatedwith a list of the LAGs that meet your search criteria.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Ethernet traffic provisioning tasks Provisioning ethernet over SDHView a list of Link Aggregation Groups (LAGs)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


14-11

View the details of a Link Aggregation Group

When to use

Use this task to view the details of a Link Aggregation Group (LAG).

Task

Complete the following steps to view the details of a LAG:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Complete the steps in theView a list of Link Aggregation Groupsprocedure.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Click the details button next to theLAG label (LAG name) for which you want toview the details.

Result: The details of the LAG selected are displayed in a panel that is locatedbelow theGo button.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Ethernet traffic provisioning tasks Provisioning ethernet over SDHView the details of a Link Aggregation Group

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Add a Link Aggregation Group

When to use

Use this task to add a Link Aggregation Group (LAG).

Task

Complete the following steps to add a LAG.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Use the icons or the object links to follow this path:

Network Elements → Link Aggregation Groups

Result: The search panel of theLink Aggregation Groups page is displayed.

Note : If the equipment protection is enabled on a card, the Link AggregationGroup for that card cannot be added manually.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Click on theNew tool in the search panel.

Result: The Add Link Aggregation Group page is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 In the NE type field, select a type of NE. Only licensed Network Elements of a givenNE type are displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 In the NE name field, select the name of the NE from the drop-down menu or enter asearch string in the text box. The NE name is the same as the Target Identifier (TID)of the NE. The first item in the list that matches the search string is highlighted. If theitem that matches the search string is not displayed in the list, click theFind button totry and locate a match. If no match is found, either enter or select another NE Name.This is a mandatory field.

If Domain Partitioning is enabled, the list of NE names only contains the names of theNEs that are in your domain.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 In the Link Aggregation Group label field, enter the label of the group to be added.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 In the Member port rate field, select either theGE, FE or GE/FE radio button. Thedefault is the first item in the list of values in theRates attribute for the NE.

Note : If this control setting is changed, the following fields are cleared:LinkAggregation Group aggregator port , Other Link Aggregation Group memberports , andLink Aggregation Group member ports . Entries in these fields must thenbe re-entered.

Ethernet traffic provisioning tasks Provisioning ethernet over SDHAdd a Link Aggregation Group

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


14-13

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 In the Link Aggregation Group aggregator port field, select the port on the NE thatis capable of being in a link aggregation group.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 In the Other Link Aggregation Group member ports field, select ports on theselected NE that are on the same card as theLink Aggregation Group aggregatorport , but are not the selectedLink Aggregation Group aggregator port , and are notcurrently in a Link Aggregation Group by moving theAvailable ports to theSelectedports field.

Note: If the equipment protection is enabled, the member ports cannot be changed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Click the Submit button.

Result: The management system begins the LAG creation process.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Ethernet traffic provisioning tasks Provisioning ethernet over SDHAdd a Link Aggregation Group

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Delete a Link Aggregation Group

When to use

Use this task to delete a Link Aggregation Group (LAG).

Task

Complete the following steps to delete a LAG:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Complete the steps in theView a list of Link Aggregation Groupsprocedure to view alist of LAGs.

Result: The list at the bottom of theLink Aggregation Groups page is populatedwith a list of link aggregation groups that meet your search criteria.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 The Link aggregation group name column of the table lists the names of the LAGs.Click the radio button next to the group you wish to delete. From the Go menu, selectDelete and click theGo button.

Result: The system asks you to confirm the deletion of the specified LAG.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click Yes.

Result: If the LAG is currently in an Ethernet service, the LAG aggregator portremains in service and the other ports are removed from the Ethernet service.

A message is sent to the Job Updates page and is visible is the Background Taskssection.

Note : If the equipment protection is enabled on the card, the Link AggregationGroup cannot be deleted manually.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Ethernet traffic provisioning tasks Provisioning ethernet over SDHDelete a Link Aggregation Group

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


14-15

15 15Traffic maintenanceconcepts

Overview

Purpose

This chapter presents concept information related to traffic maintenance on 1655Access Multiplexer Universal network elements using OMS.

Contents

Port types 15-1

Trail termination points (TTP) 15-5

Port types

Definition of port

A port is a connectable point that can terminate a physical or logical networkconnection.

There are two types of ports:

• A physical portis a physical connection point. Transmission lines attach to physicalports.

• A logical port is a logical connection point within a physical connection point. Atthe logical port the overhead bytes are terminated: in the transmit directionoverhead bytes are added, in the receive direction overhead bytes are extracted.Therefore logical ports are also calledtermination points. Logical ports arecontained within physical ports. Logical ports can contain other logical ports.

An example for the principle definition of physical and logical ports is shown in thefollowing figure:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


15-1

Add and delete ports

Ports are automatically created in the management system when an NE is added to themanagement system or when a circuit pack is installed. Upon addition to themanagement system the port parameters are available for provisioning.

For logical ports, only the ones that exist on the NE and also have associated portparameters are supported in the management system. For the majority NEs, logicalports are supported only when they are involved in cross-connections.

Ports are automatically deleted from the management system when an NE is deletedfrom the management system or when a circuit pack is removed.

Supported ports

All ports that carry port parameters are supported by the management system. Theseports include physical ports or logical ports. For logical ports, typically the ports onlycarry parameters after being involved in a cross-connection. However, there are casesin which logical ports have parameters even when they are not used in across-connection.

Supported port rates

The available port rates are shown in the following table:

Port rate Description Category

STM-16 Optical interface, 2.5 Gbps SDH physical

STM-4 Optical interface, 622 Mbps SDH physical

STM-1 Optical interface, 255 Mbps SDH physical

STM-1 Electrical interface, 255 Mbps SDH physical

DS3 Electrical interface, 45 Mbps SDH physical

E3 Electrical interface, 34 Mbps SDH physical

E1 Electrical interface, 2 Mbps SDH physical

DS1 Electrical interface, 1.5 Mbps SDH physical

1 Gb Ethernet Gigabit Ethernet interface Ethernet physical

Fast Ethernet Fast Ethernet interface Ethernet physical

Fast/Gb Ethernet Fast Ethernet or Gigabit Ethernet interface Ethernet physical

VCG Virtual concatenation group VCG physical

Termination ofOverhead Bytes

TU-122 Mbps

physical logical

Traffic maintenance concepts Port types

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Port rate Description Category

VC-4-4C Virtual container concatenated VC-4-4C logical

VC-4 Virtual container VC-4 physical

VC-4 Virtual container VC-4 logical

VC-12 Virtual container VC-12 logical

LO-VC-3 Virtual container LO-VC-3 logical

Port names

The name of the physical ports consists of two parts separated by a dot. The first partis related to the slot name, the second part is the port number within that slot.

Example: LP2.1, TP1.3

The name of the logical ports consists of the physical port name followed by the AU-4number and for low order signals, the VC number (VC-12 or VC-3). The VC numberconsists of:

• The number of the TUG-3 inside the VC-4

• The number of the TUG-2 inside the TUG-3

• The TU-12 number inside the TUG-2

Port ID formats

The management system supports two port ID formats and the ability to control whichformat is used:

• Native Name: This format is the default setting.

• ITU-T G.707 Format: This format applies to certain logical ports.

TP1.1,1.112

112

TUG-3TUG-2TU-12

VC-12:

100

TUG-3

VC-3:

SlotPort

AU-4 numberVC-12 (or VC-3) number


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


15-3

The management system allows the user to select which format is used for port namesthroughout the management system. This is controlled on thePreferences page.

The management system also allows the user to select which format is used for portnames on specific pages. This is controlled by a toggle button on theAddConnection , Graphical Layout , andPorts pages.

The two states of thePort ID Format button are shown in the following table:

Button state Port ID format

Native name

ITU-T G.707

Test loops

An incoming test loop (inloop) can be set on the 1.5 Mbps, 2 Mbps, 34 Mbps, and 45Mbps ports. The input signal is directly routed back to its corresponding output withoutaltering the signal format. This loop can be used to test the connectors. Only oneinloop can be set at the same time.

An outgoing test loop (outloop) can be set on the 1.5 Mbps, 2 Mbps, 34 Mbps, and 45Mbps ports. The output signal is directly routed back to its corresponding input withoutaltering the signal format. This loop can be used to test how the signal passes throughthe system.

If a test loop is enabled, theAbnormalstate is activated. After disabling the test loopthe cross-connections that existed before setting the test loop are restored.

Test loops for physical ports of tributary port units are shown in the following figure:

Cross-Connect Physical Port

Inloop

Cross-Connect Physical Port

Outloop


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Trail termination points (TTP)

Introduction

In Trail Termination Points (TTP), the path overhead bytes of a VC-4-4C, VC-4, VC-3,or VC-12 signal are terminated (added or removed). In the AU-4, TU-3, and TU-12termination points, the path overhead is not terminated, but can be monitored.

The following information can be retrieved from the path overhead:

• Trail Trace Identifier (TTI), used for path trace

• Signal label, indicating what type of signal is carried

• Error checking information, a threshold can be set to determine in case of howmany errors a signal is declared degraded

Alarms

When a termination point is set toMonitoredalarms related to this termination pointare reported.

A termination point is set toNot monitored(alarms are not reported) when it is notused.

Path trace

To check whether a path is correctly provisioned a path trace can be set. A label (forexample a word) is sent along the path from one termination point to the other. Thislabel is calledTrail Trace Identifier(TTI). If the TTI is a specific string, this string iscalledAccess Point Identifier(API). If the expected API equals the accepted API, thetransmission path is well provisioned.

In the path overhead of a VC-4-4C/VC-4/VC-3 signal, byte J1 in the regeneratorsection is used to the TTI. For a VC-12 signal, byte J2 is used. A 16 byte frame isformed of which one byte is used for error detection. Therefore the string that can beinserted in these bytes has a maximum length of 15 characters (or 30 hexadecimaldigits).

The principle of path trace on termination points is shown in the following figure:

Traffic maintenance concepts Trail termination points (TTP)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


15-5

TIM detection

If the Trace Identifier Mismatch (TIM)detection is enabled, traffic will be lost when amistake in the trace string is detected. Upon mismatch, anAlarm Indication Signal(AIS) is inserted in the downstream signal and aRemote Defect Indicator (RDI)isinserted in the upstream signal (RDI is only inserted when thedirectionality is set tobidirectional).

Signal label

The signal label contains information about the signal that is part of the VC. Thesignal label indicates whether the VC is unequipped, whether it is a structured signal,which type of mapping is used or whether it is an Alarm Indication Signal (AIS).

Signal degrade thresholds

The signal degrade threshold can be set for the multiplex section (MS), VC-4-4C, ,VC-12, VC-3, and VC-4 levels. The signal degrade threshold determines when a signalis considered degraded. Two parameters can be set:

• Number of errored blocks per second

• Number of adjacent bad seconds

The signal is considered degraded, when during the defined number of bad seconds thesignal contains more than the defined errored blocks per second. This causes an alarmSTM-n moderate block error rate (n is 1, 4 or 16) or VC-n moderate block error rate(n is 4-4C, 12, 3, or 4).

On VC-12, VC-3, and VC-4 level the signal degrade threshold is also used as aswitching criterion for SNC/N protection switching. If the signal is determineddegraded an SNC/N protection switch is performed. SNC/N protection is described in“Subnetwork Connection Protection (SNCP)” (p. 11-9).

NE D NE B

NE A

NE C

Termination Pointin NE B

Access PointIdentifierAccepted

Access PointIdentifierTransmit

Termination Pointin NE D

Access Point Identifier Accepted = Access Point Identifier Transmit Path is correct

Traffic maintenance concepts Trail termination points (TTP)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

16 16Performance monitoring(PM) concepts

Overview

Purpose

This chapter presents concept information related to performance monitoring on 1655Access Multiplexer Universal network elements using OMS.

Contents

The performance monitoring process 16-1

Performance measurements 16-3

Available PM data 16-10

Thresholding 16-15

Ethernet performance monitoring 16-21

Configuration of the OMS 16-27

Data storage and recovery 16-28

The performance monitoring process

Process description

The performance monitoring process is a three-stage process:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


16-1

Primary processing

Fundamental parameters are derived from errors detected in the transport signal,classified into bit errors and defects, and accumulated over one-second periods.

Parameter processing

Near-end and far-end performance parameters are calculated based on the evaluationand correlation of the fundamental parameters obtained during the primary processing.

Binning and reporting

In the binning and reporting phase, the performance parameters obtained during theparameter processing are stored in accumulation registers (or “bins”) over 15-minutesand 24-hours observation periods.

For each performance monitoring point, 16 recent (or history) bins for 15-minutesmeasurements and one recent bin for 24-hours measurements are stored in the NE.

Performance monitoring (PM) concepts The performance monitoring process

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Performance measurements

Introduction

In performance monitoring, the integrity of a signal is continuously verified as it iscarried along the fiber. The results of this measurement are analyzed and comparedagainst predefined acceptable maximum values of errors, stored and displayed on theOMS as performance monitoring data. The acceptable maximum, or thresholds, mustbe defined according to your maintenance policy and then configured on the OMS.

Performance measurements on the OMS can be done on several STM-n (n=1 to 64)optical signal levels, various incoming SDH signal levels terminating in the unit, aswell as LAN interconnections.

Performance monitoring points

The quality of the transmission in the network is measured at each termination points.Within the SDH network, it is where signals are terminated.

A VC-12 is for example terminated at the PDH 2 Mbit/s physical interface. An STM-4signal is terminated at its STM-4 line port unit. At the process of termination theappropriate overhead bytes are terminated to provide information about the signalbeing terminated. Selecting the appropriate TPs to be monitored during theconfiguration step requires preparation and planning.

Prerequisite to be able to Monitor a TP

In order to monitor the performance of the network at a given termination point, twoprerequisites must be met:

1. The Counters must be enabled;

2. For more information please refer to theTraffic Maintenancechapter of this book,and specifically to thePort Provisioningsection.

Important! If a circuit pack, on which the port mode was set to Monitor isplugged-out and then again plugged-in, the normal pluggable module recognitionprocess will start again. Then, when the module state comes to allowed, the portmode is set to auto.

How to measure PM

The measurements useEven Bit Interleaved Parity (BIP)check which allows thesystem to continuously monitor performance. This method looks at the content of thesignal. When a signal is being transmitted a BIP check is performed on each STMframe.

In this check, the amounts of “1” and “0” of the payload is calculated. If the result isan even number, then a “0” is put in the B-Byte of the overhead of the next frame; ifthe result is “1”, then a “1” is put in the B-Byte of the overhead of the next frame. Atthe termination point, the BIP check is performed again on the payload of the receivedsignal and the outcome of this BIP check on the payload received is compared to the

Performance monitoring (PM) concepts Performance measurements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


16-3

value at transmission. If there is a discrepancy between the two readings, an error isconcluded, analyzed against the error threshold values, and reported for PerformanceMonitoring provided that the counter was enabled.

The B-byte is situated in the overhead section (MSOH) of the STM signal. This is notto be confused with the J0 byte of the overhead section (RSOH) used to verify thevalidity of a transmission path.

Signal Integrity

The signal transmission integrity is indicated by bit errors in the interface signal. Ateach layer, it is measured using a parity scheme built into the STM-n section overheadand VC path overhead. Proactive maintenance events are called Threshold CrossingAlerts and are typically raised when too many errored seconds are being detected.Parity violations are counted to derive performance data in 15 minutes, and 24 hoursmeasuring intervals, called bins. It can be based on Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC)errors, errors in the Frame Alignment signal (frameword) or on line code violations.

Available PM Data: Measurement Parameters

When a termination points is set to monitored, the system tracks the transmissionquality using the BIP check. The even BIP check provides the means to check forerrors that have occurred in a frame, that is within a given 125 microseconds period.Instead of the total absolute number of errors per second, the OMS uses the followingstandard digital parameters.

• Number of Errored Second (ES),

• Number of Severely Errored Second (SES),

• Number of Background Block Errors (BBE),

• Duration of unavailable second/time (UAS/UAT).

Each of these measurement parameters are described in details in the upcoming topics.

The PM data is stored in one current and sixteen recent 15 minute registers, and onecurrent, one recent 24 hour registers. These registers are called bins .

Important! In case a STM-16 or STM-4 interface is set to AU4-4c mode, and theoptical signal is not synchronized to the system, BBE and ES PerformanceMonitoring counters are incrementing even in case no errors are actually present inthe transmission path.

Near End / Far End Monitoring

The Near End is the local end to the user. The Near End performance parameter is thedata received by the network element at the incoming direction and forwarded to themanaging system. The Far End is the remote end to the user.

In certain applications, it may be desirable to provide performance monitoring datarelated to both directions of transmission (transmitted/received) from a single end. Thereceived data can be relayed back from the Far End to the Near End if there is a


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

bidirectionnal connection between the nodes. End-to-end bidirectional monitoringprocesses consist of two Termination Points (TPs): one at the local side and one at theremote side.

The table below identifies where the BIP check is performed during monitoring.

TTP Description

Near End The BIP is calculated on the received signal and compared with theB or V5 byte (VC-12).

B is illustrated in the figure of section “Example of Near End/FarEnd Forward/Backward Monitoring”

Far End The BIP is calculated on the sent signal, but at the remote end ofthe transmission, and compared with the B or V5 byte (VC12).

B is illustrated in the figure of section “Example of Near End/FarEnd Forward/Backward Monitoring”

In Near-End monitoring, the BIP check indicates the quality of the signal transmittedfrom the remote side to the local side.

In Far-End monitoring, the B (illustrated in the figure of section “Example of NearEnd/Far End Forward/Backward Monitoring”) values is compared with the BIPcalculation if an error is detected on the remote side. An REI is then transmittedupstream. The received REI at the local side indicates the quality of the signaltransmitted from the local side to the remote side.

The following table provides an overview of the performance monitoring counter typesthat can be configured for certain termination points:

Counter type MS RS SDHhigherorderpath

SDH lower order path PDH path

VC-4 VC-11 VC-12 VC-3 P12s

Near end

N_ES X X X X X X X

N_SES X X X X X X X

N_UAS X X X X X X X

N_BBE X X X X X X X

Far end

F_ES – – X X X X –

F_SES – – X X X X –

F_UAS – – X X X X –

F_BBE – – X X X X –


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


16-5

Forward and Backward Monitoring

On Connection Termination Points (CTPs), the signal is non-intrusively monitored.This kind of monitoring does not terminate the signal but only reads its REI value.

For CTP with a bidirectional path two types of measurements parameters are available:Forward and Backward.

MeasurementParameters

Description

Forward The REI is read from the incoming signal. This will indicatethe quality of the end to end (TP to TP) path in the oppositedirection.

Backward The REI is read from the incoming signal on the other sideof the NE. This will indicate the quality of the end to end(TP to TP) path in forward direction.

Example of Near End/Far End Forward/Backward Monitoring

The following graphic describes Near End/Far end Forward/Backward monitoring. TheTermination Point (TP) at network element-A is monitored on the receiving end, orNear End where the B-bytes are verified for parity. If there is an error, an REI is sentupstream. The TP at network element-B is monitored on its receiving end, and since itis distal from NE-A, it is referred to Far End.

Because the path is terminated in NE-A and NE-B these monitoring points areTermination Points (TPs). In a TP the BIP value is recalculated and compared to thevalue stored in the received B byte. If an error is detected an REI is sent to itsoriginating source and the error is declared as Near End PM data. The REI receivedwill be declared as Far End PM data.

In NE-I the REI value is read and is declared as Backward or Forward PM data of theConnection Termination Points. For example in CTP#A the Forward PM data consistsof the REI transmitted from A to B (and so indicating the quality of the path in thedirection from B to A). The Backward PM data in CTP#A consists of REI transmittedfrom B to A (and so indicating the quality of the path in the direction from A to B).


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Performance parameters

Performance parameters are identified and measured on a continuous basis. Theseparameters are listed in this section. Thresholds are maximum tolerable values forthose parameters. The operator can set those thresholds above which the systemgenerates alarms. Thresholds can be turned on or off, per termination point, perbinning period, and performance parameters. These measurement parameters have aresolution of one second.

If the system is provisioned this way, then in the event that a measurement parameterexceeds a user-set threshold, a Threshold Report (TR) is generated and the user will benotified by an alarm. When in a following bin the performance parameter is equal to orstays below the user-set threshold, aReset Threshold Report (RTR)is generated and thealarm is cleared. The latter is called the ’clear’ threshold.

Errored Block (EB)

A block is regarded asErrored Block (EB)if that block does have one or more errors.This is determined by the comparing the outcome of the BIP check done before andafter transmission. The number of blocks per second depends on the signal itself. AVC-12 does have 2000 blocks/s while an STM-N does have 8000 blocks/s.

Errored Second (ES)

A second is regarded asErrored Second (ES)if this second has one or more blocks inerror.

Severely Errored Second (SES)

A second is regarded asSeverely Errored Second (SES)if a second does have morethan x% of its blocks in error. The value of x is called the SES Declaration Threshold.An SES is also counted as an ES.

SES declaration threshold

This is an ITU-standard and is defaulted as the maximum number of admissible EBover one second. TheSES Declaration Thresholdis the cutoff for SES. If the totalnumber of EB over one second exceed this value, it is considered to be an SES. For allnetwork elements, this number of blocks defaults to 30% of the maximum number ofblocks (e.g. 2,400 for a VC-4; 600 for VC-12).

Unavailable Second (UAS)

An Unavailable Second (UAS)is part of anUnavailable Period (UAP). The UAP startsat the beginning of a 10 consecutive seconds stretch of SES. It stops at the first secondof a 10 seconds of more duration in which there is no longer any SES occurring. AnUAS is not counted as ES or SES.

Background Block Error (BBE)

A Background Block Error (BBE) is an errored block not occurring as part of anSeverely Errored Second (SES).


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


16-7

Pointer Justification Event count (pPJE+ and pPJE-)

Pointers are used to compensate frequency and phase variations. Pointer justificationcounts indicate timing differences on SDH networks.

A frame offset discontinuity is a change of the value of the pointer which defines theflexible start position of the Virtual Container within an SDH frame. Pointerjustifications (i.e. increment and decrement operations) change the value of the pointerbut they are no frame offset discontinuities in this sense.

Pointer justifications are measured at the adaptation to High Order Path.

The summation register for pointer increments are incremented by one at each pointerincrement event. The result of this summation is the positive pointer justification eventcount value (pPJE+).

The summation register for pointer decrements is incremented by one at each pointerdecrement event. The result of this summation is the negative pointer justificationevent count value (pPJE-).

Per STM-N port (with N = 1, 4, 16, 64)every AU can be selected for a monitoringpoint for generated pointer justification events (and PJE values are also derived formthis AU). Per port the maximum number of configurable PJE counters is limited toone.

Prerequisite to get an Alarm

Although several errors were to occur for several hours, no alarm will be launchedunless you previously have set the threshold values (TR and RTR) in theEditPerformance Monitoring Pointscreen. A TR raises the associated alarm and an RTRclears the associated alarm.

Note. TheTrace Identifier Mismatch (TIM)option has nothing to do with performancemonitoring. TIM is used to check the validity of the path, using the J0 byte. Thereforeyou do not need to enable TIM in order to get a Performance Alarm

Measurement Parameters Threshold Values

Each measurement parameter has a range, as well as a maximum threshold value (TR),such as defined in the below table:

Threshold Termination 15 Minutes 24 Hours

Severely ErroredSeconds

VC-n

n = 11,12, 4, 3

810 77,760

RS-n

n = 1, 4, 16 or 64

810 77,760

MS-n

n=0, 1, 4, 16, 64

810 77,760

P-12 810 77,760


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


Errored Seconds VC-n

n = 11, 12, 4

900 86,400

RS-1, 4, 16 or 64 900 86,400

MS-n

n=0, 1, 4, 16, 64

900 86,400

P-12 900 86,400

Background BlockErrors

VC-12, VC-11 1,799,100 172,713,600

VC-4 7,199,100 691,113,600

RS-1, 4, 16 or 64 7,199,100 691,113,600

MS-0 57,599,100 5,529,513,600

MS-1 172,799,100 16,588,713,600

MS-4 691,199,100 265,420,731,600

MS-16 2,764,799,100 265,420,713,600

MS-64 11,059,199,100 1,061,683,113,600

P-12 899100 899100

UnavailableSeconds

VC-n

n = 11, 12, 4

900 86,400

RS-1, 4, 16 or 64 900 86,400

MS-n

n=0, 1, 4, 16, 64

900 86,400

P-12 900 86,400

RTR threshold values

The range of the RTR threshold for the BBE, ES, SES and UAS parameters are [0 -maxcount]. Maxcount is to be taken from the table before. The rationale behind is thatthe operator is not forced to provision the RTR value below the actual TR value. So,the upper limit will be maxcount, and not something like TR minus 1. With thisfreedom the operator is able to simulate TR-only behavior: when the RTR threshold isprovisioned to the highest value, in each interval a TR (followed by an RTR) can besent.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


16-9

Available PM data

Generalities

Performance parameters are measured on a continuous basis at the termination point(s).

The performance parameters are:

• ES — Number of Errored Second

• SES — Number of Severely Errored Second

• BBE — Number of Background Block Errors

• UAS — Unavailable Second

Each of these parameters has a threshold. The threshold can be set according to yourmaintenance philosophy. If no thresholds are manually input, the network element willapply the default threshold values for each parameters. In the event that a measurementparameter exceeds this user-set threshold, the system generates an alarm.

Prerequisite to get an Alarm

Although unacceptable amount of errors were to occur at a termination point duringseveral hours, no alarm would be raised unless you previously have:

• Enabled theThresholdingfunctionality;

• Enabled the performance parameters counters;

• Set the threshold values (TR and RTR) for the counters;

• Set the termination point toMonitored, as mentioned in Prerequisite to be able toMonitor a TP.

SDH measurement parameters

Each of the measurement parameters has an associated counter. Performancemonitoring results are displayed on screen by means of these counters.

The table below describes each performance monitoring measurement parameters:

Measurement Parameters Description

ES A period of 1 second having one or moreblocks in error.

SES A period of one second having more thanx % of its blocks in error. The value of xis called the SES Declaration Threshold.This threshold is default 30 (%). An SESis also counted as an ES

BBE An errored block, that does not occur as apart of a Severely Errored Second (SES).

Performance monitoring (PM) concepts Available PM data

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

UAS One second which is contained withinaUnavailable Period (UAP). An UAS isnot counted as ES or SES.

Ethernet measurement parameters

Since SDH uses STM-n signals and that LAN uses packets, we cannot use the sameparameters to monitor performance in both cases. Therefore, LAN monitoring uses thefollowing parameters:

The parameters and associated link are the following:

LAN MeasurementParameters

Link

CbR Kilobytes Received from Ethernet to LAN port orfrom SDH to WAN port

CbS Kilobytes Sent from LAN port to Ethernet or fromWAN port to SDH

pDe Packets dropped. These packets are received fromEthernet to LAN port and dropped by LAN port orrecieved from SDH to WAN port and dropped byWAN port.

Other related parameters

There are other related performance parameters which, although not directly measurednor displayed on the ITM-CIT, are taken into consideration during processing ofperformance data.

The below table lists other parameters

Parameters Description

Errored Block (EB) A block having one or more errors. Thisis determined by the comparing theoutcome of the BIP check done before andafter transmission. (see note below thistable)

SES declaration threshold This is the maximum of ES, beyond whichit is declared a SES. This is anITU-standard and is defaulted as themaximum number of admissible EB overone second. For all network elements, EBdefaults to 30% of the maximum numberof blocks.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


16-11

Parameters Description

Unavailable Period (UAP) Interval of at least 10 seconds where theerror rate is above the SES threshold. TheUAP starts at the first second of a 10seconds (or more) stretch SES. It stops atthe first second of a 10 seconds (or more)duration in which there is no longer anySES occurring.

Important! The number of blocks per second depends on the signal itself. A VC-12has 2000 blocks/s while an STM-N does have 8000 blocks/s. The SES threshold(30%) is calculated from these figures.

SDH parameters thresholds

Thresholds can be described as maximum acceptable number of errors, as provisionedby the user and in accordance with maintenance philosophy. The values allocated forthose various thresholds are kept on the ITM-CIT.

The thresholding functionality is applicable for unidirectional monitoring only. Aprerequisite for the system to apply those thresholds and alert maintenance personalthat they have been crossed, is to enable the thresholding functionality. Once thethresholding functionality is enabled, the specific values for the thresholds can be inputon the ITM-CIT. If no specific values are entered, the system reverts to using defaultvalues.

The ITM-CIT defaults to disabled and can be turned on or off. The thresholdingmethod is an explicit reset method, that is the threshold values must be input in thesystem.

Threshold types

There are two types of thresholds:

• Threshold Report (TR): This value causes a threshold crossing event. When thismaximum is reached, the system raises the associated alarm if the prerequisite havebeen applied (see Prerequisite to get an Alarm). The minimum value for TR is 1(one).

• Reset Threshold Report (RTR): This value causes a resetting of the event. Whenthis threshold is reached, RTR clears the associated alarm. The RTR value isusually lower than the RT value. The minimum value for RTR is 0 (zero).

Both thresholds are independently provisionable per termination point andaccumulation period for a given performance monitoring parameter.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Where X = TR and Y = RTR

If Then

Nb BBE > or equal to X System launches the associated alarm

X > or equal to Nb BBE > or equal to Y System stops the associated alarm

Threshold Range and Maximum

Each measurement parameter has a range for the acceptable values for TR. The lowerlimit for this threshold can never be zero to avoid an alarm storm from the NE to theITM-CIT.

The maximum allowable TR is dependant on:

• the parameter being measured;

• where performance is measured (meaning the TP);

• and the binning period.

The maximum threshold values for each parameters is listed in below:


SES VC-4 810 77760

VC-12 810 77760

MS-1 810 77760

P12 810 77760

ES VC-4 900 86400

VC-12 900 86400

MS-1 900 900

P12 900 900

BBE VC-12, VC-11 1,799,100 172713600

VC-4 7,199,100 691113600

MS-1 172,799,100 16588713600

P12 899100 86313600

UAS VC-12 900 86400

VC-4 900 86400

MS-1 900 86400

P12 900 86400


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


16-13

Plotted performance diagram

In the figure below an example is given how ES, SES, UAS and BBE are computed.The number of errored blocks are plotted against time.

In the following figure, three different regions are noticeable. The grey shaded indicatethe BBE.

The SES Declaration Threshold is set to 30%, which result in 600 errored blocks, asthe maximum tolerable level of BBE for that type of signal. Since a VC–4 signal has8000 frames per second and a VC-12 has 2000 frames per second, the 30% thresholdfor a VC-12 signal is lower than for a VC-4 and corresponds to 30%X2000 or 600BBE.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

In the following figure, three different regions are noticeable.

• REGION I: In the first (I) region the SES Declaration Threshold is not reached andtherefore only ESs are detected. Since there is no SES in this region, there is noAUS either.

• REGION II: In the second (II) region the SES Declaration Threshold is exceededand several SESs are detected. An SES is also counted as an ES so the total periodis also counted as ES. The SES is declared at the beginning of the stretch wherethe threshold is passed for longer than 10 seconds in a row.

• In the third (III) region the amount of SES lasts for more than 10 consecutiveseconds, so UAS is detected. However an UAS is not detected as ES or SES.

Measurement periods

Measurement Parameters data is accumulated over a period of time which is referred toas the measurement period. There are two possible measurement periods:

• 15 minutes

• 24 hours

Thresholding

Threshold Crossing Alerts (TCAs)

“1655 AMU” systems support threshold crossing alerts (TCAs) on a per performanceparameter basis by using TCA profiles. The TCA profiles are used to store thethreshold values of the performance parameters related to a specific parameter group(for example parameters related to the SONET Section or Line, or parameters relatedto Ethernet ports).

When thresholding is activated for a performance parameter, the value of the parameteris compared against the threshold value on a second by second basis. When the currentcounter value equals or exceeds the threshold value, then a threshold crossing alert willbe reported as an event notification with a resolution of one second.

Types of TCA profiles

TCA profiles exist for these groups of performance parameters:

• Parameters related to the SDH Regenerator Section and Multiplex Section

• Parameters related to SDH tributaries

• Parameters related to Ethernet

A default profile is predefined for each of these TCA profile types. Furthermore, youcan create, modify or delete TCA profiles of these types.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


16-15

TCA mode

Two different TCA modes (or thresholding methods) can be distinguished:

1. Implicit TCA mode (“TR only mode”, also known as transient condition method)

2. Explicit TCA mode (“TR/RTR mode”, also known as standing condition method)

Implicit TCA mode

Only one threshold, the so-called Threshold Report (TR) threshold, is defined.

When the counter value of a performance parameter equals or exceeds this threshold,then a threshold report (TR, synonymous to threshold crossing alert) is generated andstored in the network element alarm log.

No more than one threshold crossing alert will be generated per performance parameterduring a measurement interval unless the threshold value has been changed, or theperformance parameter has been reset (to zero). When the counter value again reachesor exceeds the threshold, another threshold crossing alert will be reported.

The following figure illustrates the implicit TCA mode:

Legend:

1 Threshold for generating a Threshold Report (TR).

Explicit TCA mode

Two thresholds are defined, a Threshold Report (TR) threshold and a Reset ThresholdReport (RTR) threshold.

Important! The explicit TCA mode is only supported for SDH ports.

When the counter value of a performance parameter equals or exceeds the TRthreshold, then a threshold report (TR, synonymous to threshold crossing alert) isgenerated.

Only the first threshold crossing in a sequence of measurement intervals is reported. Atthe end of the first interval in which the counter value did not exceed the RTRthreshold, a reset threshold report (RTR) is generated.

The following figure illustrates the explicit TCA mode:

t

➀

TR TR TR

Performance monitoring (PM) concepts Thresholding

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Legend:

1 Threshold for generating a Threshold Report (TR).

2 Threshold for generating a Reset Threshold Report (RTR).

Enabling/disabling thresholding

Thresholding can be enabled or disabled for each performance parameter individually.

Thresholding is enabled for a specific performance parameter, when the followingapplies:

• The associated port or tributary has a corresponding TCA profile assigned.

• The threshold value of the performance parameter is unequal to zero.

Thresholding can be disabled for each performance parameter individually viaITM-CIT.

Assigning a TCA profile with all parameter thresholds set to zero can be used todisable thresholding for all performance parameters associated to a particular port ortributary.

Default values of the performance parameter thresholds

In the following tables, the default threshold values for 15-minutes and 24-hoursmeasurement intervals are listed for performance parameters.

The threshold values for the 15-minutes measurement intervals indicate anunacceptable performance level.

The threshold values for the 24-hours measurement intervals indicate a degradedperformance level.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


16-17

SDH Regenerator Section

These are the default parameter thresholds related to the SDH Regenerator Section:

Performance parameter Default threshold value for STM-N (N=1, 4,16, 64)1

Default threshold value for STM-N (N=1, 4,16, 64)1

15-minutes measurements 24-hours measurements

TR threshold RTR threshold 2 TR threshold RTR threshold 2

BBE 9000 200 48000 4800

ES 180 20 1500 150

SES 15 0 20 0

UAS 15 0 20 0

Notes:

1. The RTR threshold is only relevant in the explicit TCA mode.

SDH Multiplex Section

These are the default parameter thresholds related to the SDH Multiplex Section:

Performance parameter Default threshold value 1



BBE STM-1 228000 2400 432000 43200

STM-4 1152000 9600 1728000 172800

STM-16 4608000 38400 6912000 691200

STM-64 18432000 153600 27648000 2764800

ES STM-1 50 5 150 15

STM-4 50 5 150 15

STM-16 50 5 150 15

STM-64 50 5 150 15

SES STM-1 10 0 15 0

STM-4 10 0 15 0

STM-16 10 0 15 0

STM-64 10 0 15 0

UAS STM-1 15 0 20 0

STM-4 15 0 20 0

STM-16 15 0 20 0

STM-64 15 0 20 0

Notes:



....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

SDH path

These are the default parameter thresholds related to the SDH path:

Performance parameter Default threshold value 1



BBE VC-3 36000 200 48000 4800

VC-4 36000 200 48000 4800

VC-4-XC

(X=4, 16, 64)

36000 200 48000 4800

VC-11, VC-12 9000 50 12000 1200

P-12 4500 25 6000 600

ES VC-3 150 10 600 60

VC-4 180 20 1500 150

VC-4-XC

(X=4, 16)

180 20 1500 150

VC-11, VC-12 120 5 400 40

P-12 120 4 350 35

SES VC-3 15 0 20 0

VC-4 15 0 20 0

VC-4-XC

(X=4, 16)

15 0 20 0

VC-11, VC-12 15 0 20 0

P-12 15 0 20 0

UAS VC-3 15 0 20 0

VC-4 15 0 20 0

VC-4-XC

(X=4, 16)

15 0 20 0

VC-11, VC-12 15 0 20 0

P-12 15 0 20 0

Notes:


Example of ES, SES, UAS and BBE

In the next figure an example is given how ES, SES, UAS and BBE are computed.The number of errored blocks are plotted against time.

In the following figure, three different regions are noticeable. The grey shadedindicates the BBE.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


16-19

The SES Declaration Threshold is set to 30%, which results in 600 errored blocks, asthe maximum tolerable level of BBE for that type of signal. Since a VC–4 signal has8000 frames per second and a VC-12 has 2000 frames per second, the 30% thresholdfor a VC-12 signal is lower than for a VC-4 and corresponds to 30% x 2000 = 600BBE.

In the previous figure, three different regions are noticeable.

• REGION I: In the first (I) region the SES Declaration Threshold is not reached andtherefore only ESs are detected. Since there is no SES in this region, there is noUAS either.

• REGION II: In the second (II) region the SES Declaration Threshold is exceededand several SESs are detected. An SES is also counted as an ES so the total periodis also counted as ES. The SES is declared at the beginning of the stretch wherethe threshold is passed for not longer than 10 seconds in a row.

• In the third (III) region the amount of SES lasts for more than 10 consecutiveseconds, so UAS is detected. However an UAS is not detected as ES or SES.

The table below indicates the amount of ES, SES, BBE and UAS for each region.

Measurement Parameter Region I Region II Region III

ES 20 21 7 + 7


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Measurement Parameter Region I Region II Region III

SES - 8 -

BBE 2116 1200 + 1280 1276 + 1270

UAS - - 29

Ethernet performance monitoring

Purpose

The Ethernet performance monitoring counters can be categorized according to thedifferent purposes they are serving.

Types of Ethernet performance monitoring counters

The following types of counters can be distinguished as:

• Counters for basic Ethernet performance monitoring

• Service monitoring:

– Counters for Ethernet service flow performance monitoring

• Traffic management:

– High quality traffic counters for Ethernet network load performance monitoring

– Low quality traffic counters for Ethernet network load performance monitoring

– Counters for Ethernet congestion monitoring

• Counters for Ethernet service route round trip delay measurements

Binning and reporting

The following bins exist for Ethernet performance monitoring parameters:

• 1 current 15-minutes bin

• 16 history 15-minutes bins

• 1 current 24-hours bin

• 1 history 24-hours bin

General Purpose Ethernet Port Monitor

The basic Ethernet Performance Monitoring counters that are supported are as follows:

eINB Number of octets in non-errored incoming frames

eINF Number of non-errored incoming frames

eONB Number of octets in outgoing frames

eONF Number of outgoing frames

eINCP Number of octets in non-errored incoming frames trapped to CPU


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


16-21

eONCP Number of octets in outgoing frames sourced by CPU

eDFE Number incoming frames dropped due to frame format errors

eCIF Number incoming frames dropped due to capacity limits in switchinput stage

pUPR Number of non-errored incoming unicast frames

pMPR Number of non-errored incoming multicast frames

pBPR Number of non-errored incoming broadcast frames

pPPR Number of non-errored incoming PAUSE frames

pUPS Number of outgoing unicast frames

pMPS Number of outgoing multicast frames

pBPS Number of outgoing broadcast frames

pPPS Number of outgoing PAUSE frames

Threshold Crossing Notifications for General Purpose Ethernet Port Monitor

The user can individually enable/disable threshold crossing notifications (TR/RTR type)for each active General Purpose Ethernet Port Monitor on each of the followingparameters:

• eDFE (15 minute bin)

• eCIF (15 minute bin)

• eDFE (24 hour bin)

• eCIF (24 hour bin)

Each General Purpose Ethernet Port Monitor has its own set of thresholds. In case oneof the thresholds is crossed while the threshold crossing is enabled, a correspondingalarm will be raised or cleared for the General Purpose Ethernet Port Monitor. The usercan provision both Set and Clear thresholds for each of these counters.

Ethernet Service Monitor

Ethernet services are monitored at DiffServEdge ingress ports (UNI ports). Serviceflows can be identified by a Flow Descriptor (FD), based on C-tag (C-VID, C-UP),destination MAC address (DA), or IP-TOS byte, and at the E-NNI ports also by avirtual port descriptor (VPD), based on an S-tag (S-VID, S-UP). Please note that, ifenumerations or value ranges are used, a VPD describes multiple virtual ports.

The following counters are supported:

gQIB Number of frames marked″green″ (i.e. low dropping precedence)

yQIB Number of frames marked″yellow″ (i.e. high dropping precedence)

rQIB Number of frames marked″red″ (i.e. dropped immediately)

Performance monitoring (PM) concepts Ethernet performance monitoring

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Ethernet High Priority Traffic Monitor

The Ethernet high quality traffic counters provide link load monitoring per traffic classand color (dropping precedence) for high-priority Ethernet traffic (traffic class 2 or 3,mapped into the egress queues 2 or 3 respectively).

The following counters are supported for Ethernet high quality traffic:

g3EINB Number of octets in non-errored incoming green frames with trafficclass 3

g3EINF Number of non-errored incoming green frames with traffic class 3

c3EIN Number of octets in non-errored green frames with traffic class 3and internal protocol traffic, including encapsulation overhead

i3gEILS Number of seconds marked″loaded″ in C3EIN count

i3gEISLS Number of seconds marked″severely loaded″ in C3EIN count

y3EINB Number of octets in non-errored incoming yellow frames withtraffic class 3

y3EINF Number of non-errored incoming yellow frames with traffic class 3



c2EIN Number of octets in non-errored green frames with traffic class 2,3 and internal protocol traffic, including encapsulation overhead

i32gEILS Number of seconds marked″loaded″ in C2EIN count

i32gEISLS Number of seconds marked″severely loaded″ in C2EIN count



Threshold Crossing Notifications for Ethernet High Priority Traffic Monitor

The user can individually enable/disable threshold crossing notifications (TR/RTR type)for each active Ethernet High Priority Traffic Monitor on each of the followingparameters:

• i3gEILS (15 minute bin)

• i3gEISLS (15 minute bin)

• i32gEILS (15 minute bin)

• i32gEISLS (15 minute bin)

• i3gEILS (24 hour bin)

• i3gEISLS (24 hour bin)

• i32gEILS (24 hour bin)

• i32gEISLS (24 hour bin)


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


16-23

Each Ethernet High Priority Traffic Monitor has its own set of thresholds. In case oneof the thresholds is crossed while the threshold crossing is enabled, a correspondingalarm will be raised or cleared for the Ethernet High Priority Traffic Monitor. The usercan provision both Set and Clear thresholds for each of these counters.

Ethernet Low Priority Traffic Monitor

The Ethernet low quality traffic counters provide link load monitoring per traffic classand color (dropping precedence) for low-priority Ethernet traffic (traffic class 0 and 1,mapped into the egress queue 1).

The following counters are supported for Ethernet low quality traffic:









There isno thresholdingfor Ethernet low quality traffic.

Ethernet Congestion Monitor

The Ethernet congestion monitoring counters provide performance monitoring based ontraffic class and color (dropping precedence).

The following counters are supported for Ethernet congestion monitoring:

g0EDBC Number of octets in dropped green frames with traffic class 0

y0EDBC Number of octets in dropped yellow frames with traffic class 0


y1EDBC Number of octets in dropped green frames with traffic class 1


g2EOCS Number of seconds with at least one dropped green frame of trafficclass 2



....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

y2EOCS Number of seconds with at least one dropped yellow frame oftraffic class 2


g3EOCS Number of seconds with at least one dropped green frame of trafficclass 3


y3EOCS Number of seconds with at least one dropped yellow frame oftraffic class 3

Congested seconds: A “congested second” is a second during which one or moreframes have been dropped due to congestion. Congested seconds are counted forhigh-priority Ethernet traffic (traffic class 2 or 3) per traffic class, color (droppingprecedence) and egress port.

Threshold Crossing Notifications for Ethernet Congestion Monitor

The user can individually enable/disable threshold crossing notifications (TR/RTR type)for each active Ethernet Congestion Monitor on each of the following parameters:

• g2EOCS (15 minute bin)

• y2EOCS (15 minute bin)

• g3EOCS (15 minute bin)

• y3EOCS (15 minute bin)

• g2EOCS (24 hour bin)

• y2EOCS (24 hour bin)

• g3EOCS (24 hour bin)

• y3EOCS (24 hour bin)

Each Ethernet Congestion Monitor has its own set of thresholds. In case one of thethresholds is crossed while the threshold crossing is enabled, a corresponding alarmwill be raised or cleared for the Ethernet Congestion Monitor. The user can provisionboth Set and Clear thresholds for each of these counters.

Ethernet service route round trip delay measurements

The round trip delay is measured between two virtual switches within an Ethernetnetwork by means of a dedicated configurable test frame that determines the “Ethernetservice route”. To enable either a cyclic or a one-time latency measurement to a remoteNE in the TransLAN network, whereby the remote NE can be identified by insertingits MAC address in the destination MAC address (DA) field of the test frame.Furthermore, the traffic class, the color (dropping precedence), the VLAN identifierand the length of the test frames can be specified, because these parameters may haveinfluence on the delay. The RTD measurement path follows the currently validSTP-topology. The accuracy of the RTD measurement is 4 ms.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


16-25

Functional principle of RTD measurements

A test frame is sent out from the FROM node. The test frame has the MAC address ofthe TO node as its destination MAC address (DA) all these influencing characteristics.

Configuration rules

Ethernet service route RTD measurements are only supported for virtual switchesoperating in one of the following modes:

• IEEE 802.1Q VLAN tagging mode with oversubscription (that is, with encoding ofthe dropping precedence)

• Provider bridge mode

The total number of Ethernet service routes per LAN unit is limited to 1024. If theoperational mode of the virtual switch is changed to repeater mode, then the Ethernetservice route will be deleted. If an Ethernet service route is deleted, then also theattached PM points (current and historic bins) will be deleted.

Ethernet Frame Delay Monitor

The following counters are supported for Ethernet service route round trip delaymeasurements:

mRTD Minimum round-trip delay recorded in the binning period(milliseconds)

aRTD Average round-trip delay over the binning period (milliseconds)

xRTD Maximum round-trip delay recorded in the binning period(milliseconds)

p900RTD Upper 90-percentile of round-trip delay over the binning period(milliseconds)

p990RTD Upper 99-percentage of round-trip delay over the binning period(milliseconds)

p999RTD Upper 99.9-percentage of round-trip delay over the binning period(milliseconds)

sRTDM Number of successful RTD measurement frames transmitted

uRTDM Number of unsuccessful RTD measurement frames transmitted

Threshold Crossing Notifications for Ethernet Frame Delay Monitor

The user can individually enable/disable threshold crossing notifications (TR/RTR type)on each of the following two groups of three parameters:

• aRTD (15 minute bin)

• xRTD (15 minute bin)

• uRTDM (15 minute bin)


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

and/or:

• aRTD (24 hour bin)

• xRTD (24 hour bin)

• uRTDM (24 hour bin)

Each RTD has its own set of thresholds. In case one of the thresholds is crossed whilethe threshold crossing is enabled, a corresponding alarm will be raised or cleared forthe RTD. The user can provision both Set and Clear thresholds for each of thesecounters.

Configuration of the OMS

High-level view

The following diagram represents three activities that are available on the OMSregarding performance monitoring:

• Configuration of the OMS, binning period, termination points and thresholds

• Parameters Measurements and Data Display

• Archiving and Data Recovery.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


16-27

Data storage and recovery

Measurement periods

Measurement parameters data is accumulated over a so called measurement period.Three measurement periods are available:

• 15 minutes unidirectional

• 24 hours unidirectional

• 24 hours bidirectional

Configuration of termination pointsand measurement period

OMS Configuration

PERFORMANCE MONITORING

Configuration of threshold values

Parameter measurements

Data display

Data archiving

Viewing data andprovisioned parameters

Reports(created, displayed, printed) Log

Data recovery and storage(network element bins)

Performance monitoring (PM) concepts Configuration of the OMS

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Bins

The PM data for each TP is stored in a bin, located in the network element itself. Twotypes of bins are available:

• 15 minutes unidirectional, with a total of 16 bins

• 24 hours unidirectional and 24 hours bidirectional, both have 1 bin.

A bin contains performance data information for each termination point such as:

• Timestamp;

• Elapsed time;

• Suspect indication which is a data flag to indicate that the data stored in the bin isincomplete or invalid.

For every TP, there is a limited set of bins. The number of bins depends on thenetwork element. The number of bins per network element is detailed in the tablebelow.

Network Element Number of 15 minutesunidirectional bins

Number of 24 hoursunidirectional bins

Number of 24hours

bidirectional bins

ADM 16/1 family 16a 1b 1

1655 AccessMultiplexer Universal

16a 1 1

AM 1 Plus 16a 1 1

a. The OMS has 16 bins.

b. The ADM 16/1 family has 1 uni-directional bin and 1 bi-directional bin.

Data Recovery Following Loss of Association

If the association between OMS and the NE fails, the OMS regains information aboutthe lost time by reading the NE bins for the relevant interval. If the association failsfor a longer period of time the NE may not be able to store sufficient information for afull recovery.

Example of Loss of Association

In the example below the association with the management system has been lost for 6hours. Because this NE does have sixteen 15 minutes unidirectional bins only 4 hoursof data can be recovered.

Performance monitoring (PM) concepts Data storage and recovery

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


16-29

On connection

While performance monitoring is active the network element will store its most recentdata in its bins. On connection the management system will retrieve all data present inthe bins.

Performance monitoring (PM) concepts Data storage and recovery

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

17 17Performance monitoring(PM) tasks

Overview

Purpose

This chapter informs how to perform the most common tasks related to performancemonitoring (PM).

Contents

To enable/disable performance monitoring and history binning 17-2

To set PM counter thresholds 17-4

To view PM data 17-8

To define filter criteria for the presentation of PM information 17-10

To modify traffic classes 17-12

To perform a one-time round trip delay measurement for test purposes 17-14

To start a cyclic round trip delay measurement 17-16

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


17-1

To enable/disable performance monitoring and history binning

When to Use

Use the following task to:

• Enable or disable performance monitoring on a termination point

• Enable or disable the storage of performance monitoring history data

Task

Follow this to task to enable or disable the performance monitoring and storage ofhistory data:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Use the object links to follow this path:Performance Measurements→ Performance Measurement Points .

Result: The Performance Measurement Points page is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:

1. For theFilter method field, click on the radio buttonPort/NE resources based .

2. In theNE type field, select the type of NE (if not already present).


4. In theMonitoring rate field, select a certain rate orAll .

5. In theGranularity field, click on one radio button to which limit the data typeinterval (optional).

6. In thePort field, type the port name (optional).

7. In theVLAN Id field, type the VLAN id name (optional).Note: This field omits depending on the selection of the “Monitoring rate” field.

8. In theDestination address field, type the destination address (optional).Note: This field omits depending on the selection of the “Monitoring rate” field.

9. In theShow only active ports field, click the radio buttonYes (default) to searchonly for physical ports and logical ports in a connection orNo for non.

10. In theOnly ports with data collected field, click the radio buttonYes to searchfor PM-capable ports that have PM data collection enabled orNo to search for allPM-capable ports.Note: This field is only visible if bulk mode applies.

11. In theData collection fields, click the calender button right

• to the from field and the calender page is populated. Select the date and timefrom the drop-down menus and clickOK, the start time is set.

• to the to field and the calender page is populated. Select the date and time fromthe drop-down menus and clickOK, the end time is set.

Performance monitoring (PM) tasks To enable/disable performance monitoring and historybinning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Note: This field omits, if the field “Only ports with data collected” is selectedto No.

12. Click Search .

Result: The Performance Measurement Points panel is populated at the bottomcontaining a list of records that meet your search criteria.

Note: If no records are displayed change your search criteria of task 2 and tryagain.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Mark one or more of the performance measurements points left to theNE namecolumn you wish to switch the performance monitoring and select from the Go menu:

• eitherEnable monitoring without collection , if not already set as monitored

• or Enable monitoring and collection , if not already set as monitored for historybinning,

• or Disable monitoring and collection , if already set as a monitored performancemeasurements point displayed in the “PM TP Status” column of the above recordlist,

• or Disable collection , if a monitoring and collectionperformance measurementspoint shall continuously be monitored but only the collection shall be deleted,

• Click Go.

Result: A progress indication followed by a confirmation is issued in theMessagesection of thePerformance Measurement Points page. Click on theRefreshbutton in the performance measurements points panel and in the columnPM TPStatus the new PM status is displayed. For completely disabled the status isNone .

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Performance monitoring (PM) tasks To enable/disable performance monitoring and historybinning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


17-3

To set PM counter thresholds

When to Use

Use this task to set the performance monitoring threshold values.

Task

Follow this task in order to modify the values of the counter thresholds:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:













• to the to field and the calender page is populated. Select the date and time fromthe drop-down menus and clickOK, the end time is set.Note: This field omits, if the field “Only ports with data collected” is selectedto No.

12. Click Search .

Performance monitoring (PM) tasks To set PM counter thresholds

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Mark the performance measurements points left to theNE name column you wish tomodify, selectAssign threshold from the Go menu, and clickGo.

Result: The PM threshold details page is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Use one of the following steps depending on the selection of the “Monitoring rate”field of task 2:

• For VC- thresholds skip toStep 5

• For Ethernet thresholds skip toStep 6

• For Ethernet service route thresholds skip toStep 7

• For LAN Ethernet HQ traffic thresholds skip toStep 8

• For LAN Ethernet congestions thresholds skip toStep 9

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Change the thresholds that are modifiable for VirtualContainer (VC-):

• Under theNear end ES panel, change the values toraise or clear the threshold forthe number of near end error seconds.

• Under theNear end SES panel, change the valuesraise or clear the threshold forthe number of near end several error seconds.

• Under theNear end UAS panel, change the values toraise or clear the thresholdfor the duration of near end unavailable second / time.

• Under theNear end BBE panel, change the values toraise or clear the thresholdfor the number of near end background block errors.

• Under theNear end FSC panel, change the values toraise or clear the thresholdfor the number of near end exceeded information.Note: This field is only visible if the “Monitoring rate” is selected toE1.

• At least set theThreshold crossing alert status by clicking the radio buttonEnabled or Disabled .

• Click Submit .

Result: A progress indication followed by a confirmation is issued in theMessagesection of thePM threshold details page and a new PM counter threshold is set.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Change the thresholds that are modifiable forEthernet:

• Under theNear end BSYE panel, change the values toraise or clear the thresholdfor the number of near end error symbols.

• Under theNear end ES panel, change the values toraise or clear the threshold forthe number of near end error seconds.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


17-5

• Under theNear end SES panel, change the valuesraise or clear the threshold forthe number of near end several error seconds.

• Under theNear end UAS panel, change the values toraise or clear the thresholdfor the duration of near end unavailable second / time.

• Under theFar end BSYE panel, change the values toraise or clear the thresholdfor the number of far end error symbols.

• Under theFar end ES panel, change the values toraise or clear the threshold forthe number of far end error seconds.

• Under theFar end SES panel, change the valuesraise or clear the threshold forthe number of far end several error seconds.

• Under theFar end UAS panel, change the values toraise or clear the threshold forthe duration of far end unavailable second / time.


• Click Submit .


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Change the thresholds that are modifiable forEthernet service route:

• Change the values toraise or clear the threshold in theAverage round trip delay(usecs) panel.

• Change the values toraise or clear the threshold in theMaximum round tripdelay (usecs) panel.

• Change the values toraise or clear the threshold in theUnsuccessful round tripdelay measurements panel.


• Click Submit .


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Change the thresholds that are modifiable forLAN Ethernet HQ traffic:

• Change the values toraise or clear the threshold in theLoaded Seconds forincoming traffic with traffic class 3 or internal traffic panel.

• Change the values toraise or clear the threshold in theLoaded Seconds forincoming traffic with traffic class 3 or traffic class 2 or internal traffic panel.

• Change the values toraise or clear the threshold in theSeverely Loaded Secondsfor incoming traffic with traffic class 3 or internal traffic panel.

• Change the values toraise or clear the threshold in theSeverely Loaded Secondsfor incoming traffic with traffic class 3 or traffic class 2 or internal trafficpanel.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

• Change the value toraise or clear the threshold in theNominal data rate (kb/sec)panel.


• Click Submit .


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Change the thresholds that are modifiable forLAN Ethernet congestions:

• Change the values toraise or clear the threshold in theGreen traffic class 2Ethernet Output Congested Seconds panel.

• Change the values toraise or clear the threshold in theYellow traffic class 2Ethernet Output Congested Seconds panel.

• Change the values toraise or clear the threshold in theGreen traffic class 3Ethernet Output Congested Seconds panel.

• Change the values toraise or clear the threshold in theYellow traffic class 3Ethernet Output Congested Seconds panel.


• Click Submit .


E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


17-7

To view PM data

When to use

Use this task to display details of any termination point settings.

Task

Complete the following steps to view details of any termination points:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:













• to the to field and the calender page is populated. Select the date and time fromthe drop-down menus and clickOK, the end time is set.Note: This field omits, if the field “Only ports with data collected” is selectedto No.

12. Click Search .

Performance monitoring (PM) tasks To view PM data

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Left to theNE name column click on thedisplay detailsbutton to show the details ofthe each record displaying in a separate frame at the bottom.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Performance monitoring (PM) tasks To view PM data

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


17-9

To define filter criteria for the presentation of PM information

When to Use

In order to limit the amount of displayed performance monitoring information, you candefine two filter criteria for the presentation of performance monitoring information:

• Monitor the current performance measurements, currently available and compliantwith the filter settings.

• Monitor the history performance measurements, available and stored and compliantwith the filter settings.

Task

Complete the following steps to define the two filter criteria:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:













• to the to field and the calender page is populated. Select the date and time fromthe drop-down menus and clickOK, the end time is set.

Performance monitoring (PM) tasks To define filter criteria for the presentation of PMinformation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Note: This field omits, if the field “Only ports with data collected” is selectedto No.

12. Click Search .



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 This step can only be achieved, if a performance measurements point is set tominimum monitored, displayed in thePM TP status column of the record list in the inthe search panel. Refer to the task “To enable/disable performance monitoring andhistory binning”

Mark the performance measurements points left to theNE name column you wish tomonitor and select from the Go menu:

• eitherNE History Measurements for history monitoring,

• or NE Current Measurements for current monitoring,

• Click Go.

Result: Analogue to the above selections:

• For the history measurements theNE History Measurements page is displayedwith a list of the historical measurements of the previously selectedperformance measurements point.

• For the current measurements theNE Current Measurements page is displayedwith a list of the current measurements of the previously selected performancemeasurements point.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Performance monitoring (PM) tasks To define filter criteria for the presentation of PMinformation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


17-11

To modify traffic classes

When to use

Use this task to modify traffic classes .

Before you begin

Be sure that proper LAN card with Ethernet connections already exists, otherwise thistask cannot be performed.

Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:



3. Click Search .


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Mark theVirtual Switch NEon which you wish to modify the traffic classes, selectModify from theGo menu and clickGo.

Result: The Modify Virtual Switches page is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 For LAN ports , move a LAN port from the available field to the selected field byusing the> button between, click right to the selected field onPort details .

Result: The Port details page appear.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Change the selection that are modifiable in theQuality of Service (QoS) panel andclick Submit .

Result: The Port details page close.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 On theModify Virtual Switches page click againSubmit .

Performance monitoring (PM) tasks To modify traffic classes

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Result: A progress indication followed by a confirmation is issued in theMessagesection of theModify Virtual Switches page and the traffic classes has beenmodified.

Note: Use theJob updates to display the complete response status.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Performance monitoring (PM) tasks To modify traffic classes

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


17-13

To perform a one-time round trip delay measurement for testpurposes

When to use

Use this task to perform a one-time round trip delay measurement to a remote NE inthe TransLAN network.

Before you begin




• The taskTo define an Ethernet service route for round trip delay measurements

is already done.

Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:



3. Click Search .


Note: If no records are displayed virtual settings have to be created, refer to taskTo define an Ethernet service route for round trip delaymeasurements .

Performance monitoring (PM) tasks To perform a one-time round trip delay measurement fortest purposes

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Do the following:

1. Use theDetails button left to theNE name column to receive the information ifthe respective virtual switch (settings) you wish to perform an one-timeround-trip-delay measurement is completely prepared.Note: If the respective virtual switch (settings) are not completely prepared, refer totaskTo define an Ethernet service route for round trip delay measurements

to solve the missing entries.

2. Mark theVirtual Switch NEon which you wish to perform an one-timeround-trip-delay measurement and selectService routes from theGo menu.

3. Click Go.

Result: The Service Routes page is displayed containing a list of records in thebottom panel.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Mark the service route, if previously not marked, selectPerform one-shotmeasurement from theGo menu and clickGo.

Result: A progress indication followed by a confirmation (e.g.one-shotmeasurement time was 5309 microseconds) is issued in theMessage section of theService Routes page.

Click the Refreshing button above the records list and in the columnLastmeasurement the last performed time measurement is displayed.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Performance monitoring (PM) tasks To perform a one-time round trip delay measurement fortest purposes

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


17-15

To start a cyclic round trip delay measurement

When to use

Use this task to start a cyclic round trip delay (RTD) measurement.

Before you begin




• The taskTo define an Ethernet service route for round trip delay measurements

is already done.

Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Use the object links to follow this path:Connections → Network Connections .

Result: The Network Connections page is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do the following:

1. In theConnection name field, type * for wildcard search.

2. Click Search .

Result: The Network Connections panel is populated at the bottom containing alist of records that meet your search criteria. Use theDetails button left to theConnection name column to view information about the complete RTDmeasurement connection settings.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Do the following:

1. Mark theNetwork Connectionon which you wish to set a cyclic round trip delaymeasurement and selectModify parameters from theGo menu.

2. Click Go.

Result: The Modify Connection Parameters page is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Do the following:

1. Click the+ to open theAssurance parameters panel and selectUpdateassurance parameters to set/change the cyclic round trip delay measurements.Note: Change theBI Directional entries only for RTD measurements

2. For theBI Directional 24-hour collection type field, selectCollect for collecting,or Monitor for bi-directional monitoring the current RTD measurement.

Performance monitoring (PM) tasks To start a cyclic round trip delay measurement

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

3. In theBI Directional 24-hour monitoring field, select eitherNone for nonbi-directional monitoring, orEnd ports for monitoring only the bi-directional endports, orAll for monitoring all RTD measurements.

4. In theBI Directional 24-hour intervals (days) field, select eitherInfinite , or avalue between07 days per week for the cyclic RTD measurement intervals.

5. Click Submit .

Result: A progress indication followed by a confirmation is issued in theMessagesection of theModify Connection Parameters page and the newcyclic of roundtrip delay measurementsis started (or changed).

To view performance monitoring information use the taskTo define filter criteria for the presentation of PM information .

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Performance monitoring (PM) tasks To start a cyclic round trip delay measurement

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


17-17

18 18Software and NEdatabase managementconcepts

Overview

Purpose

This chapter presents concept information related to software update on 1655 AccessMultiplexer Universal network elements using OMS.

Contents

Functionality description 18-1

Software upgrade 18-4

Functionality description

Types of NE software

The management system manages the software of NEs in the network.

There are two types of NE software:

• Applications, such as NE generics

• Data files, such as NE database versions. These contain the configuration data ofthe NE. It is commonly known asManagement Information Base (MIB)or as aBackup.

To manage NE software

The management system allows you to manage software in the following ways:

• Manage NE generics on the management system

• Manage NE generics on the NE

• Manage NE database on the management system

• Manage NE database on the NE

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


18-1

In addition, the management system is able to perform tasks associated with softwaremanagement on a scheduled basis. The tasks can be scheduled to run as a one-timeactivity to be started on a specific day and time or as a periodic activity to be startedon a recurring day and time.

Manage NE generics on the management system

Software management for software generics on the management system includes theability to add a software generic to the management system from a local removablemedia, delete a software generic from the management system, transfer a softwaregeneric from the management system to an NE, support file management capabilitiesfor the software generic files from the management system, view in-progress softwaregeneric transfers, and abort in-progress software generic transfers.

Manage NE generics on NEs

The management system displays the software generics and the attributes that arepresent on the NEs. Additionally, the user can transfer a software generic from themanagement system to an NE, transfer a software generic from NE to NE, activate asoftware generic on an NE, abort an in-progress software transfer, commit a softwaregeneric and revert to the inactive NE generic.

An upgrade of an NE generic occurs in three steps:

1. “To add an NE generic to the management system” (p. 19-3)

2. “To transfer an NE generic from the management system to an NE” (p. 19-5)

3. “To activate an NE generic on an NE” (p. 19-15)

A software NE generic can be added to the management system file system fromCD-ROM. For file transfer from CD-ROM, the user simply physically loads theCD-ROM because the management system can automatically mount the CD-ROM filesystem. It is also possible to use other commonly available tools and applications toget software files into the management system file system (for example, use filetransfer software, such as FTP, to transfer software to the management system over anetwork).

Activate NE generics

This feature allows the user to retrieve the release number of the software generic thatis active on the NE , retrieve the release number of the software generic that is thestandby (that is, the software generic that resides in the inactive partition of the NE),and activate the standby software generic.

Available functions are:

• Activate: MIB Clear – a new MIB is downloaded from the management system tothe NE as a part of the activate process.

• Activate: No MIB Clear – a new MIB is not downloaded from the managementsystem to the NE as part of the activate process.

Software and NE database management concepts Functionality description

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Manage NE database on the management system

An NE database file is a binary image of the complete memory of the NE. Copies ofthe NE database file can be backed up onto the management system and used toperform NE restoration.

NE database backup can be performed on-demand or per a schedule. TheScheduledTasks page is used to schedule backups. A default of up to three backup files can besaved on the management system per NE. When this limit is reached, the oldest file isoverwritten. For smaller networks, it is possible to have more than three backup files.See your Alcatel-Lucent representative for more information.

The management system displays the view of NE database stored on the managementsystem. The user can view the software memory files and their attributes. The user canalso perform other software management tasks such as create an NE database backupon the management system, and restore NE database from a management systembackup.

Manage NE database on the NE

The management system displays the view of NE database stored on an NE. It allowsthe user to view the NE software memory files and their attributes. It also allows theuser to perform other software management tasks, such as create an NE databasebackup on the management system, abort in progress NE database transfer, activate NEdatabase and restore NE database from a management system backup.

Scheduling software management tasks

The management system allows searching for and scheduling the following softwaremanagement tasks:

• NE database backup

• Transfer software generic from management system to NE

• Transfer software generic from NE to NE

• Activate software generic

• Activate NE database

• Activate NE generic and memory

Software and NE database management concepts Functionality description

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


18-3

Software upgrade

Introduction

The NE software is stored on the controller unit of the NE. To upgrade this softwarethe new software must be downloaded on the NE. This can be done from themanagement system.

System controller software

The main unit 1 contains the software to control and support the NE. TheManufacturers Executable Code (MEC)file contains the complete software package forone NE. The software in the main unit 1 is also used to provide a basic configurationto the units connected to the main unit 1. These other assigned units obtain theappropriate part of the software package from the main unit 1 during the systemstart-up or when a unit is inserted.

The main unit 2 (if present) is synchronized (image database only) to main unit 1. If aprovisioning database is present on the main unit 1 card this database will be droppedimmediate after insertion/recovery.

Two memory stores

On the main unit 1, there are two memory stores each of which can contain a differentMEC. The store with the software that is executed is called the active store and theother store is called the backup store. In case of a software upgrade, the managementsystem downloads a complete software package to the backup store of the main unit 1.

Switch stores

With a switch command from the management system, the software in the backupstore can be made active. The switch command switches between the two stores, thusthe active store becomes the backup store and vice versa.

Diagram

The use of software stores is shown in the following figure:

Software and NE database management concepts Software upgrade

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Commit the software

After confirmation of a switch command between the active and backup store, themanagement system loses its association with the NE for approximately 10 minutes. Ifthe management system can renew the association with the NE, the active store iscommitted. If the active store is not committed within two hours after the switch, theNE will switch back to the old software load.

Store 1

Store 2Processor

Main unit

ProgramStoreProcessor

Units

Network element

Management system

Software and NE database management concepts Software upgrade

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


18-5

19 19Software and NEdatabase managementtasks

Overview

Purpose

This chapter informs how to perform the most common tasks related to softwaremanagement.

Contents

Tasks related to NE generics 19-2

To view a list of NE generics stored on the management system 19-2

To add an NE generic to the management system 19-3

To delete an NE generic from the management system 19-4

To transfer an NE generic from the management system to an NE 19-5

To schedule the transfer of an NE generic from the management systemto an NE

19-7

To view a list of in-progress transfers of NE generics 19-9

To abort an in-progress NE generic transfer 19-10

To view a list of NE generics stored on an NE 19-13

To activate an NE generic on an NE 19-15

To schedule NE generic activation 19-18

Tasks related to NE databases 19-21

To view a list of NE database versions stored on the management system 19-21

To view a list of NE database versions stored on an NE 19-23

To back up NE database versions onto the management system 19-24

To schedule the backup of an NE database version onto the managementsystem

19-29

To restore an NE database version from the management system to anNE

19-31

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


19-1

Tasks related to NE generics

To view a list of NE generics stored on the managementsystem

When to use

Use this task to view a list of NE generics stored on the management system.

Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Use the object links to follow this path:

• Network Elements → Software

Result: The Search section of theSoftware page is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 In the Software type field, selectNE generic .

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 In the Software stored on field, selectManagement system .

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 In the NE type field, select a type of NE or selectAll .

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click Search .

Result: The list at the bottom of theSoftware page is populated with a list of theNE generics stored on the management system that meet your search criteria.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Software and NE database management tasks Tasks related to NE genericsTo view a list of NE generics stored on the management

system....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

To add an NE generic to the management system

When to use

Use this task to add an NE generic to the management system.

Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Insert the CD-ROM that contains the NE generic into the CD-ROM drive of the server.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Use the object links to follow this path:Network Elements → Software .


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 In the Software operation field, selectAdd NE generic to management systemandclick Go.

Result: The Add NE Generic to Management System page is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 In the Software load file field, select the software load file on the storage devicewhich is to be added to the management system. This field is displayed for the NEtypes that support multiple software load files per external media.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click Submit .

Result: A progress indication followed by a confirmation is issued in theMessagesection of theAdd NE Generic to Management System page, and the NE genericis added to the management system. The management system logs this activity inthe User Activity Log . The CD-ROM is unmounted automatically, and the user canpush the “Eject” button to retrieve the CD-ROM from the drive.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Software and NE database management tasks Tasks related to NE genericsTo add an NE generic to the management system

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


19-3

To delete an NE generic from the management system

When to use

Use this task to delete an NE generic from the management system.

Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click Search .


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click the radio button next to the NE generic that you wish to delete.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 From theGo menu, selectDelete NE generic from management system and clickGo.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Confirm that you want to proceed with the deletion.

Result: A progress indication followed by a confirmation is issued in theMessagesection of theSoftware page, and the software is deleted from the managementsystem. The management system logs this activity in theUser Activity Log .

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Software and NE database management tasks Tasks related to NE genericsTo delete an NE generic from the management system

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

To transfer an NE generic from the management system to anNE

When to use

Use this task to transfer an NE generic from the management system to an NE.

Important! The transfer of an NE generic from the management system to an NEis a time consuming process that may take up to a few hours to complete.

Before you begin

Because each type of NE has individual requirements (hardware and software) and theorder in which certain steps must be performed is particular to the NE, thedocumentation for the NEs should be consulted for software installation and upgradeprocedures.

Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 In the top navigation bar, selectMy network → Job updates .

Result: The Job Updates page is displayed. TheBackground Task Statussection of this page allows you to monitor the status of the task.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................




...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click Search .

Result: The list at the bottom of theSoftware page is populated with a list of theNE generics and the remote device generics stored on the management system thatmeet your search criteria.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Click the radio button next to the NE generic that you wish to transfer.

Software and NE database management tasks Tasks related to NE genericsTo transfer an NE generic from the management system

to an NE....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


19-5

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 From theGo menu, selectDownload from management system to NE and clickGo.

Result: The Download from management system to NE page is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Select the NE to which the NE generic will be transferred.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Click Submit .

Result: A confirmation window is displayed asking you to confirm the transfer ofthe NE generic.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 Click Yes.

Result: The system initiates the software transfer from the management system tothe NE. The management system notes the progress of the operation in theBackground Task Status section of theJob Updates page, and logs this activityin the User Activity Log .

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Software and NE database management tasks Tasks related to NE genericsTo transfer an NE generic from the management system

to an NE....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

To schedule the transfer of an NE generic from themanagement system to an NE

When to use

Use this task to schedule the transfer of an NE generic from the management system toan NE.

Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................




...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click Search .


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click the radio button next to the NE generic to which you want to schedule thesoftware transfer. From theGo menu, selectSchedule download from managementsystem to NE and clickGo.

Result: The Schedule download from management system to NE page isdisplayed. It is prepopulated with read-only information about the selected NEgeneric and, depending on the NE type. Additional fields may be displayed toprovide further selections.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 To schedule the frequency, click the calendar icon after theScheduled Date field.

Software and NE database management tasks Tasks related to NE genericsTo schedule the transfer of an NE generic from the

management system to an NE....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


19-7

Result: A Date/Time Chooser window is displayed. Select the scheduled startdate.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 In the Schedule options panel change the entries or selections for any modifiablefields that you wish to update:

• In the Scheduled time field, enter the time in the format “hh:mm:ss”. The timeentered applies for both the start and end date

• In the Scheduled task name field, enter a user defined name for the scheduledtask or allow the system to generate a default value. Note: The scheduled taskname cannot be modified once the task is created.

• In the Number of retries field, select the number of times (1 to 4) the scheduledtask will be retried in case of error orno retries.

• In the Execution Interval field, select the number of hours this task should beperformed from the drop down list. Possible values are 1 hour to 12 hours andContinuous.

• In the Retry interval field, select the interval of time that will pass between retries.Possible values are 1 min. to 60 min.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Click Submit .

Result: The scheduled task is added.

Reference

For detailed information about how to view a list of scheduled tasks, how to modifyscheduled tasks, and how to delete scheduled tasks, refer toOMS Network ElementManagement Guide – Tools – Scheduled Tasks.

Software and NE database management tasks Tasks related to NE genericsTo schedule the transfer of an NE generic from the

management system to an NE....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To view a list of in-progress transfers of NE generics

When to use

Use this task to view a list of in-progress transfers of NE generics.

Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................




...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click Search .


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click the radio button next to any entry in the list. From theGo menu, selectView inprogress NE generic transfers and clickGo.

Result: The Software page is displayed, and includes a list of NE generic transfersthat are in-progress and met the search criteria in the previous step.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Software and NE database management tasks Tasks related to NE genericsTo view a list of in-progress transfers of NE generics

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


19-9

To abort an in-progress NE generic transfer

When to use

Use this task to abort an in progress NE generic transfer. Both management system toNE and NE to NE transfers can be aborted.

There are three methods for this task.

Task, method 1: from the In-Progress NE Generic Transfers page

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 In the top navigation bar selectMy network → Job updates .

Result: The Job Updates page is displayed. This page allows you to monitor thestatus of the task.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click Search .


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Click the radio button next to any entry in the list.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 From theGo menu, selectView in progress NE generic transfers and clickGo.

Result: The Software page is displayed, and includes a list of NE generic transfersthat are in-progress and met the search criteria in the previous step.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Click the radio button next to the transfer you wish to halt.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 From theGo menu, selectAbort NE generic transfer and clickGo.

Software and NE database management tasks Tasks related to NE genericsTo abort an in-progress NE generic transfer

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Result: The Abort NE generic transfer window opens.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 Click Submit .

Result: A confirmation window is displayed asking you to confirm the halt of theNE generic transfer.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12 Click OK.

Result: The selected NE generic transfer is halted.

The management system notes the progress of two tasks in theJob Updates page.The original transfer task is marked asfailed, and the abort task is marked assuccess. The management system logs these activities in theUser Activity Log .

Task, method 2: from the list of NE generics stored on an NE

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Use the object links to follow this path:Network Elements → Software


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 In the Software stored on field, selectNE.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


• In the NE Name field, select the name of NE in question.

• In the NE Name field, selectAll and populate the fieldNE Generic with therespective version number.

Click Search .


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


19-11

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The list at the bottom of theSoftware page is populated with a list of theNE generics stored on the NE.

The following applies to the search results:

• If the search criteria is for a specific NE, the search results table includesmatches in both the active and inactive NE partitions.

• If the search criteria is for a specific NE generic, the list of entries in the searchresults table include all NEs that contain an active release matching the searchcriteria.Additionally, the list includes all software generics on any NE that has amatching software generic in the active release. For example, if the softwaregeneric in the active version of the NE matches the search criteria but thegeneric in the inactive partition does not, both still appear in the search resultstable. This means that some rows of the table may have a different release thanthe selected search criteria.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Click the radio button next to the transfer you wish to halt.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 From theGo menu, selectAbort NE generic transfer and clickGo.

Result: The Abort NE generic transfer window opens.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Click Submit .

Result: A confirmation window appears asking you to confirm the halt of the NEgeneric transfer.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Click OK.

Result: The selected NE generic transfer is halted.

The management system notes the progress of two tasks in theJob Updates page.The original transfer task is marked asfailed, and the abort task is marked assuccess. The management system logs these activities in theUser Activity Log .

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

To view a list of NE generics stored on an NE

When to use

Use this task to view a list of NE generics stored on an NE.

Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................




...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................



•In the NE Name field, selectAll .

– In the fieldNE generic partition , select eitherActive or Inactive .

– In the fieldNE generic type , selectRelease number , if you want to specifythe release number (for example “5.0.1”) orItem code , if you want to specifythe item code (for example “SCA358”) of the NE generic in question.

– Populate the fieldNE Generic with the respective version number. TheNEgeneric label is a hyperlink to theNE Generic Selection page from which toselect the NE generic to include in the search criteria. As an alternative, type inan NE generic name in the text box.

Click Search .

Software and NE database management tasks Tasks related to NE genericsTo view a list of NE generics stored on an NE

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


19-13





E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Software and NE database management tasks Tasks related to NE genericsTo view a list of NE generics stored on an NE

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

To activate an NE generic on an NE

When to use

Use this task to activate an NE generic on an NE.

Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................




...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................



• In the NE Name and theNE generic partition fields, selectAll .If you want to specify, select:

– In the fieldNE generic partition eitherActive or Inactive .

– In the fieldNE generic type the Release number (for example “5.0.1”) or theItem code (for example “SCA358”) of the NE generic in question.

Populate the fieldNE Generic with the respective version number. TheNEGeneric label is a hyperlink to theNE Generic Selection page from which toselect the NE generic to include in the search criteria. As an alternative, type in anNE generic name in the text box.

Click Search .

Software and NE database management tasks Tasks related to NE genericsTo activate an NE generic on an NE

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


19-15





...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Click the radio button next to the NE for which you wish to activate the inactive NEgeneric.

From theGo menu, selectActivate and clickGo.

Result: The Activate NE generic page is displayed. In that page, most of thefields are pre-populated according to your previous selections.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


• Activation type – selectMIB Clear if you want the management information base(MIB) to be cleared with the activation of the NE generic, orNo MIB Clear if not.

• Activation order – selectSystem default to use the default rules for establishingthe order of NEs within the grouping, or selectUser defined to place the NE inthe queue using the order defined in theSelected NE list.

• Continue if the inactive NE generic is the same as the current active NEgeneric – specify whether or not the activation process should continue if theinactive NE generic is the same as the current active NE generic. If you selectno,when the management system is executing the download request, it does notattempt to activate software for any NE where the inactive release of the NE is thesame as the active release of the NE.

• Continue if the inactive NE generic is the older than the current active NEgeneric – specify whether or not the activation process should continue if theinactive NE generic is the older than the current active NE generic. If you selectno, when the management system is executing the download request, it does notattempt to activate software for any NE where the inactive release of the NE isolder than the active release of the NE.

Click Submit .


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Result: The NE generic in the inactive partition is installed in the active partitionand the NE reboots to update the current running version of the software.

The management system notes the progress of the operation in theJob Updatespage, and logs this activity in theUser Activity Log .

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


19-17

To schedule NE generic activation

When to use

Use this task to schedule an NE generic activation.

Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................




...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................



• In the NE Name field, selectAll and populate the fieldNE Generic with therespective version number.

Click Search .





...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click the radio button next to the NE for which you wish to schedule activation of theinactive NE generic.

Software and NE database management tasks Tasks related to NE genericsTo schedule NE generic activation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

From theGo menu, selectSchedule activate and clickGo.

Result: The Activate NE generic page is displayed. In that page, most of thefields are prepopulated according to your previous selections.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


• Activation type – selectMIB Clear if you want the management information base(MIB) to be cleared with the activation of the NE generic, orNo MIB Clear if not.

• Activation order – selectSystem default to use the default rules for establishingthe order of NEs within the grouping, or selectUser defined to place the NE inthe queue using the order defined in theSelected NE list.

• Continue if the inactive NE generic is the same as the current active NEgeneric – specify whether or not the activation process should continue if theinactive NE generic is the same as the current active NE generic. If you selectNo,when the management system is executing the download request, it does notattempt to activate software for any NE where the inactive release of the NE is thesame as the active release of the NE.

• Continue if the inactive NE generic is the older than the current active NEgeneric – specify whether or not the activation process should continue if theinactive NE generic is the older than the current active NE generic. If you selectNo, when the management system is executing the download request, it does notattempt to activate software for any NE where the inactive release of the NE isolder than the active release of the NE.

Click Schedule .

Result: The Schedule activate NE generic page is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


• Scheduled Date – select the date from which the scheduled task should beginfrom the pop-up calendar.

• Scheduled time – enter the scheduled time for the task to begin. Enter a valueusing the formathh:mm:ss([0 to 23]:[0 to 59]:[0 to 59]).

• Scheduled task name enter an optional name for the scheduled task or allow thesystem to generate a default value. Once created, the scheduled task name cannotbe modified.

• Number of retries – select the number of times (1 to 4) the scheduled task will beretried in case of error orno retries.

• Execution interval – specify the interval at which the scheduled task should begin.Possible values are 1 hour to 12 hours in 1 hour increments and the value“Continuous”.

• Retry interval – select the interval of time that will pass between retries. Possiblevalues are 1 min. to 60 min.

Click Submit .


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


19-19

Result: A progress indication followed by a confirmation is issued in theMessagesection of theSchedule activate NE generic page, and the scheduled task isadded.

Reference



....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Tasks related to NE databases

To view a list of NE database versions stored on themanagement system

When to use

Use this task to view a list of NE database versions (that means backups of the MIBs)stored on the management system.

Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 In the Software operation field, selectSearch .

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 In the Software type field, selectNE database .

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 In the NE name field, select the name of an NE or selectAll .

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 In the NE generic partition field, select the type of partition (optional):

• Active – the software currently running on the NE.

• Inactive – the software is stored in the inactive or backup partition of the NE.

• All

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 In the NE generic type field, select either theRelease numberor Item codeformat forthe NE generic (optional).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 In the NE generic field, the NE generic label is a hyperlink to theNE GenericSelection page from which to select the NE generic to include in the search criteria,or type in an NE generic name in the text box. (optional).

Software and NE database management tasks Tasks related to NE databasesTo view a list of NE database versions stored on the

management system....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


19-21

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Populate theNE group search field, select the radio button to perform a search byone of the following options below (optional).

When searching for an NE generic on NE, the available radio buttons are:Ring andAggregate .

When searching for an NE database on the management system, the available radiobuttons are:Ring , Aggregate , andNCG.

Meaning of the options:

• Aggregate – the aggregate label is a hyperlink to theAggregate Selection pagefrom which to select aggregates to include in the search criteria, or type in anaggregate name in the text box.

• Ring – the ring label is a hyperlink to theRing Selection page from which toselect rings to include in the search criteria, or type in a ring name in the text box.

• NCG – the NCG label is a hyperlink to theNCG Selection page from which toselect NCGs to include in the search criteria, or type in an NCG name in the textbox.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 In the Backup Status field, select the backup status. Valid for the backup NE databaseon the management system operation only (optional).

• If the selectedNE type or NE name is All , the possible values in the drop downlist are:Last backups , Last successful backups , Failed backups , In progressbackups , or No successful backups .

• If the selectedNE name is any value exceptAll , the possible values in the dropdown list are:All backups , Last backup , or All successful backups .

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12 In the Date and time: from field, enter the date and time. Click on the calendar iconto display theDate/Time Chooser from which to select the date and time (optional).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13 In the Date and time: to field, enter the date and time. Click on the calendar icon todisplay theDate/Time Chooser from which to select the date and time (optional).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14 Click Search .

Result: The list at the bottom of theSoftware page is populated with a list of theNE database versions stored on the management system that meet your searchcriteria.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Software and NE database management tasks Tasks related to NE databasesTo view a list of NE database versions stored on the

management system....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

To view a list of NE database versions stored on an NE

When to use

Use this task to view a list of NE database versions stored on an NE.

Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................




...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 In the NE name field, select the name of an NE.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Click Search .

Result: The list at the bottom of theSoftware page is populated with a list of theNE database versions stored on an NE that meet your search criteria.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Software and NE database management tasks Tasks related to NE databasesTo view a list of NE database versions stored on an NE

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


19-23

To back up NE database versions onto the managementsystem

When to use

Use this task to back up NE database versions, that means to back up the MIB ontothe management system.


Task, method 1: from the list of NE database versions on the management system

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................




...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 In the NE name field, select the name of an NE or selectAll .

...................................................................................................................................................................................................




• All

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 In the NE generic type field, select either the Release number or Item code format forthe NE generic (optional).

Software and NE database management tasks Tasks related to NE databasesTo back up NE database versions onto the management

system....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 In the NE generic field, the NE generic label is a hyperlink to theNE GenericSelection page from which to select the NE generic to include in the search criteria,or type in an NE generic name in the text box. (optional).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 Populate theNE group search field, select the radio button to perform a search byone of the following options below (optional).

When searching for an NE generic on NE, the available radio buttons are:Ring andAggregate .

When searching for an NE database on the management system, the available radiobuttons are:Ring , Aggregate , andNCG.


• Aggregate – the aggregate label is a hyperlink to theAggregate Selection pagefrom which to select aggregates to include in the search criteria, or type in anaggregate name in the text box.

• Ring – the ring label is a hyperlink to theRing Selection page from which toselect rings to include in the search criteria, or type in a ring name in the text box.

• NCG – the NCG label is a hyperlink to theNCG Selection page from which toselect NCGs to include in the search criteria, or type in an NCG name in the textbox.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


• If the selectedNE type or NE name is All , the possible values in the drop downlist are:Last backups , Last successful backups , Failed backups , In progressbackups , or No successful backups .

• If the selectedNE name is any value exceptAll , the possible values in the dropdown list are:All backups , Last backup , or All successful backups .

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14 Click Search .


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

15 Click the New tool in the toolbar.


system....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


19-25

Result: A confirmation window is displayed asking you to confirm the backup.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

16 Click Backup to management system .

Result: The Backup to management system window opens.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

17 To specify the NEs from which you want to start a backup, choose on of the followingin the Selected NEs section:

• All NEs in the network

• All NEs of type – select a type of NE from the list.

• All NEs in Aggregate – type the name of the aggregate in the text field, or clickon the hyperlink to display theAggregate Selection window. Select the radiobutton next to the ring you would like to include in your search criteria, and clickOK.

• All NEs in NCG – type the name of the network communications group (NCG) inthe text field, or click on the hyperlink to display theNCG Selection window.Select the radio button next to the NCG you would like to include in your searchcriteria, and clickOK.

• NE list for NE type – select a type of NE from the list, then use the arrow keys tomove NEs between theAvailable NEs list and theSelected NEs list.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

18 Use theBackup if status for NE has not changed since the last backup? to specifywhether or not the backup process should continue if the status for NE has notchanged since the last backup.

If you specifyNo, the management system determines whether an NE configurationhas potentially changed since the last memory backup was made to the system. TheNE configuration is considered to have potentially changed if either the system hasreceived an autonomous message from the NE reporting a database change or if thesystem has lost communication with the NE at any time since the last memory backupof that type. If the NE has not changed since the last backup, the NE is excluded fromthe backup request.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

19 Click Submit .


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

20 Click Yes.

Result: The selected NE database versions are transferred to the managementsystem. As the files are transferring, the management system notes the percentageof the transfer that has completed in theJob Updates page, and logs this activityin the User Activity Log .


system....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Task, method 2: from the list of NE database versions on the NE

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................




...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Click Search .


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Click the radio button next to the NE that you wish to backup to the managementsystem.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 From theGo menu, selectBackup to management system and clickGo.

Result: The Backup to management system page opens populated withappropriate values.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 Verify the settings, then clickSubmit .


system....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


19-27

Result: The selected NE database versions are transferred to the managementsystem. As the files are transferring, the management system notes the percentageof the transfer that has completed in theJob Updates page, and logs this activityin the User Activity Log .

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................


system....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

To schedule the backup of an NE database version onto themanagement system

When to use

Use this task to schedule the backup of an NE database version onto the managementsystem.

Task

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


• View a list of NE database versions stored on the management system, using thetask“To view a list of NE database versions stored on the management system”(p. 19-21). The list at the bottom of theSoftware page is populated with a list ofNE database versions that meet your search criteria. From theGo menu, selectSchedule Backup to Management System and clickGo.

• View a list of NE database versions stored on an NE, using the task“To view a listof NE database versions stored on an NE” (p. 19-23). The list at the bottom of theSoftware page is populated with a list of NE database versions that meet yoursearch criteria. Click the radio button next to any NE database version. The NEwill always back up the active version. From theGo menu, selectSchedulebackup to management system and clickGo.

Result: The first section of theSchedule backup to management system page isdisplayed. This page contains pre-populated information about the backup.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Verify the information presented and clickSchedule .

Result: The second section of theSchedule Backup to Management Systempage is displayed. It allows you to precisely schedule the backup.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 To schedule the backup frequency, select one of the following:

• Daily starting on – complete this section if the task is to be scheduled daily. Selectthe date and time for which the scheduled task should begin and end from thepop-up calendars.

• Weekly starting on – complete this section if the task is to be scheduled weekly.Select the date and time for which the scheduled task should begin and end fromthe pop-up calendars.

• Once every month starting on – complete this section if the task is to bescheduled once a month. Select the date and time for which the scheduled taskshould begin and end from the pop-up calendars.

• Every N days starting on – complete this section if the task is to be scheduledeveryN days whereN is a variable number. Select the date and time for which thescheduled task should begin and end from the pop-up calendars. SpecifyN, whichmay be a period of every two to six days, in the fieldEvery .

Software and NE database management tasks Tasks related to NE databasesTo schedule the backup of an NE database version onto

the management system....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


19-29

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Provide additional details for the backup to be scheduled:

• Scheduled time – enter the scheduled time for the task to begin. Enter a valueusing the formathh:mm:ss([0 to 23]:[0 to 59]:[0 to 59]).

• Scheduled task name enter an optional name for the scheduled task or allow thesystem to generate a default value. Once created, the scheduled task name cannotbe modified.

• Number of retries – select the number of times (1 to 4) the scheduled task will beretried in case of error orno retries.

• Execution interval – specify the interval at which the scheduled task should begin.Possible values are 1 to 12 hours in 1 hour increments and the value “Continuous”.

• Retry interval – select the interval of time that will pass between retries. Possiblevalues are 1 to 60 minutes.

Click Submit .

Result: A progress indication followed by a confirmation is issued in theMessagesection of theSchedule Backup to Management System page, and the scheduledtask is added.

Reference


Software and NE database management tasks Tasks related to NE databasesTo schedule the backup of an NE database version onto

the management system....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To restore an NE database version from the managementsystem to an NE

When to use

Use this task to restore an NE database (MIB) version on the management system (alsoknown as a backup file) to an NE.

CAUTION


Restoring an NE database (MIB) from the management system to the network elementwill cause a disruption in communication and may be traffic affecting.

Ensure that the NE database restoration is really necessary. It is a good idea to createa backup of the current NE database before initiating the restoration.

Task, method 1: from the list of NE database versions on the management system

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Use the object links to follow this path:Network Elements → Software


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 In the NE name field, select the name of an NE, or selectAll .

Software and NE database management tasks Tasks related to NE databasesTo restore an NE database version from the management

system to an NE....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


19-31

...................................................................................................................................................................................................




• All

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 In the NE generic type field, select either the release number or item code format forthe NE generic (optional).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 In the NE generic field, the NE generic label is a hyperlink to theNE GenericSelection page from which to select the NE generic to include in the search criteria.Alternatively, type in an NE generic name in the text field. (optional).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 In the NE group search field, select the option to perform a search by one of thefollowing options below (optional).

When searching for an NE generic on NE the available options are:Ring andAggregate .

When searching for an NE database on the management system, the available optionsare:Ring , Aggregate , andNCG.


• Aggregate – the aggregate label is a hyperlink to theAggregate Selection pagefrom which to select aggregates to include in the search criteria. Alternatively, typein an aggregate name in the text field.

• Ring – the ring label is a hyperlink to theRing Selection page from which toselect rings to include in the search criteria. Alternatively, type in a ring name inthe text field.

• NCG – the NCG label is a hyperlink to theNCG Selection page from which toselect NCGs to include in the search criteria. Alternatively, type in an NCG namein the text field.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


• If the selectedNE type or NE name is All , possible values are:Last backups ,Last successful backups , Failed backups , In progress backups , or Nosuccessful backups .

• If the selectedNE name is any value exceptAll , possible values are:All backups ,Last backup , or All successful backups .

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



system to an NE....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14 Click Search .


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

15 Click the radio button next to the NE database version that you wish to restore to anNE. From theGo menu, selectRestore to NE and clickGo.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

16 Click Yes.

Result: The restoration is initiated. The management system notes the progress ofthe operation in theJob Updates page, and logs this activity in theUser ActivityLog . A reboot and a service interruption will occur on the NE.

Task, method 2: from the list of NE database versions on the NE

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................




...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................



system to an NE....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


19-33

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Click Search .


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Click the radio button next to the NE to be restored. From theGo menu, selectRestore from management system and clickGo.

Result: The Restore NE database from management system page is displayed.This page shows a list of all memory versions (backup files) stored on themanagement system for the selected NE.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Select the memory version (backup file) to be restored and clickSubmit .

Result: The restoration is initiated. The management system notes the progress ofthe operation in theJob Updates page, and logs this activity in theUser ActivityLog . A reboot and a service interruption will occur on the NE.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................


system to an NE....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

A Access Point Identifier (API)To check whether a path is correctly provisioned a path trace can be set. A label (forexample a word) is sent along the path from one termination point to the other. Thislabel is calledTrail Trace Identifier (TTI). If the TTI is a specific string, this string iscalled Access Point Identifier (API). If the expected API equals the accepted API, thetransmission path is well provisioned.

Acknowledged Information Transfer Service (AITS)A LAPD mode.In the Acknowledged Information Transfer Service (AITS), PDUs are numbered andtransmitted sequentially, and acknowledgment PDUs are sent back from the receiver tothe sender. If a PDU is lost, that is, if the sender gets no acknowledgment, the PDU isretransmitted.

AFISee“Authority and Format Identifier” (p. GL-1).

AISSee“Alarm Indication Signal” (p. GL-1).

AITSSee“Acknowledged Information Transfer Service” (p. GL-1).

Alarm Indication Signal (AIS)A code transmitted downstream in a digital network that indicates that an upstreamfailure has been detected and alarmed if the upstream alarm has not been suppressed.

APISee“Access Point Identifier” (p. GL-1).

AreaSee“Area Identifier” (p. GL-1).

Area Identifier (Area)Part of the NSAP address indicating the routing area to which a node belongs.

Authority and Format Identifier (AFI)Part of the NSAP address specifying the NSAP address format.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


GL-1

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

D Data Communication Channels (DCC)The Data Communication Channels (DCC)are part of the data communication network(DCN). The channels are used to exchange management data between the managementsystem and the network elements. The channels are also used for communicationbetween the different network elements (for example remote logins).

Data Communication Network (DCN)A Data Communication Network (DCN)is used for the exchange of management data. Itis an overlay of the transmission network. The management system (for example OMS)and the network elements (NEs) together are the nodes of this network.

DCCSee“Data Communication Channels” (p. GL-2).

DCNSee“Data Communication Network” (p. GL-2).

DFISee“DSP Format Identifier” (p. GL-2).

DNUSee“Do Not Use” (p. GL-2).

Do Not Use (DNU)A synchronization quality level;Do Not Useindicates that the timing signal should notbe used, since it may cause timing loops.

Domain Specific Part (DSP)Part of the NSAP address.

DSPSee“Domain Specific Part” (p. GL-2).

DSP Format Identifier (DFI)Part of the NSAP address specifying the DSP format.

DSwTSee“Dual Stack with Tunneling” (p. GL-2).

Dual Stack with Tunneling (DSwT)The Dual Stack with Tunneling (DSwT)feature provides a way to manage IP devicesthrough the DCN network.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

E Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)The transfer of an electrostatic charge between bodies at different electrostatic potentials.Electrostatic Discharge (ESD), caused by touching with the hand for example, candestroy semiconductor components. The correct operation of the complete system is thenno longer assured.

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

GL-2 Alcatel-Lucent - ProprietarySee notice on first page

365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Electrostatic Protection (ESP)Measures taken to reduce or avert the threat of electrostatic discharge (ESD) andelectrostatic fields.

End System (ES)In the ISO-OSI network protocol, nodes behaving asEnd Systems (ES)perform noforwarding of data packets. They communicate with each other on an end-to-end basisvia intermediate systems.

Engineering Order Wire (EOW)An external orderwire system can be connected which uses an orderwire channel fortransparent data transmission via the SDH transmission network. For this functionality,the E1 byte is used as orderwire channel. The RSOH byte E1 is accessible in all networkelement types.

EoSSee“Ethernet over SDH” (p. GL-3).

EOWSee“Engineering Order Wire” (p. GL-3).

ESSee“End System” (p. GL-3).

ESDSee“Electrostatic Discharge” (p. GL-2).

ESPSee“Electrostatic Protection” (p. GL-2).

Ethernet over SDH (EoS)A method to encapsulate the Ethernet frames into the SDH transmission payload.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

G Gateway Network Element (GNE)An NE that provides gateway functionality between external interfaces to OSs (forexample, LAN ports) using one protocol stack (for example TCP/IP) and internal DCCinterfaces using a different protocol stack (for example, OSI).

Generic Framing Procedure (GFP)A method used to encapsulate the Ethernet frames into the SDH transmission payload. Ithas been standardized by ITU-T.

GFPSee“Generic Framing Procedure” (p. GL-3).

GNESee“Gateway Network Element” (p. GL-3).

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


GL-3

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

I IDISee“Initial Domain Identifier” (p. GL-4).

IDPSee“Initial Domain Part” (p. GL-4).

Initial Domain Identifier (IDI)Part of the NSAP address specifying the country code.

Initial Domain Part (IDP)Part of the NSAP address.

Intermediate System (IS)In the ISO-OSI network protocol,Intermediate Systems (IS)are used for routing databetween nodes and (sub) networks. A network element can act both as an end system aswell as an intermediate system.

Intermediate System to Intermediate System (IS-IS)The Intermediate System to Intermediate System (IS-IS) protocolis used betweenintermediate systems in the DCN.

ISSee“Intermediate System” (p. GL-4).

IS Routing Information Base (RIB)The IS-IS protocol maintains theIS Routing Information Base (RIB). The information inthis information base is used for the routing of management data packets in the DCN bythe intermediate systems.

IS-ISSee“Intermediate System to Intermediate System” (p. GL-4).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

L LCASSee“Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme” (p. GL-4).

LCNSee“Local Communications Network” (p. GL-4).

Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme (LCAS)The Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme (LCAS)is an extension of virtual concatenationthat allows dynamic changes in the number of channels in a connection. In case channelsare added or removed by management actions this will happen without losing anycustomer traffic.

Link State Protocol Data Unit (LSP)Intermediate systems exchange routing information regularly with one another as part ofthe IS-IS protocol by the use ofLink State Protocol Data Units (LSP).The LSPs contain the information on the NSAP addresses of nodes used in the tables ofthe RIBs.

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Local Communications Network (LCN)In the case where there is no DCC connectivity between nodes, aLocal CommunicationsNetwork (LCN)can be used to connect the nodes to each other.

LSPSee“Link State Protocol Data Unit” (p. GL-4).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

M Management Information Base (MIB)The Management Information Base (MIB)is the provisioning information stored in thedatabase of the NE. This includes the configuration of the units within the NE, the nameand type of the NE, as well as addressing information and network informationnecessary for management.In OMS context, the MIB is referred to asNE database.

Manufacturers Executable Code (MEC)The Manufacturers Executable Code (MEC)file contains the complete software packagefor one NE.

MDISee“Miscellaneous Discrete Input” (p. GL-5).

MDOSee“Miscellaneous Discrete Output” (p. GL-5).

MECSee“Manufacturers Executable Code” (p. GL-5).

MIBSee“Management Information Base” (p. GL-5).

Miscellaneous Discrete Input (MDI)A Miscellaneous Discrete Input (MDI)is an input to a network element for externalequipment. MDIs can be monitored by the management system. An MDI can beconnected to monitor a temperature sensor or a door contact, for example.

Miscellaneous Discrete Output (MDO)A Miscellaneous Discrete Output (MDO)is an output from a network element used todrive external equipment. MDOs can be activated or deactivated by the managementsystem. An MDO can be connected to control a fan or a generator, for example.

MSPSee“Multiplex Section Protection” (p. GL-5).

Multiplex Section Protection (MSP)Multiplex Section Protection (MSP)is used to protect the traffic in a point-to-pointconnection against transmission failures (MS-AIS, LOF, LOS, MS-DEG) and portequipment failures. A requirement for this kind of protection is that the transmissionlines are doubled (one working line, one protection line).A trail continues to use the working route until a fault condition occurs or an externalswitch request is issued to switch to the protection route.

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


GL-5

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

N NBMASee“Non-Broadcast Multiple Access” (p. GL-6).

Network Service Access Point (NSAP)A Network Service Access Point (NSAP)is the address of a node (for example a networkelement). Each node has exactly one NSAP that is unique in the entire network (usuallythe NSAP is even globally unique). Routing and forwarding in each node of a network isdone using the target NSAP.

Network Service Provider (NSP)A Network Service Provider (NSP)offers services that are delivered over a network,externally managed, based on a one-to-many business model, and service-fee based.

Non-Broadcast Multiple Access (NBMA)Non-Broadcast Multiple Access (NBMA)is a network type that support multiple accesspoints but does not support broadcasting or in which broadcasting is not possible.

NSAPSee“Network Service Access Point” (p. GL-6).

NSPSee“Network Service Provider” (p. GL-6).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

P PDUSee“Protocol Data Unit” (p. GL-6).

PRCSee“Primary Reference Clock” (p. GL-6).

Primary Reference Clock (PRC)A synchronization quality level;Primary Reference Clockindicates that the timing signalis provided by a primary reference clock.

Protocol Data Unit (PDU)According to ITU-T recommendation Q.921 (1997), a unit of data specified in a protocoland consisting of protocol-control-information and possibly user-data.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Q QoSSee“Quality of Service” (p. GL-6).

Quality of Service (QoS)According to ITU-T recommendation Q.1703 (2004), the collective effect of serviceperformance which determine the degree of satisfaction of a user of a service. It ischaracterized by the combined aspects of performance factors applicable to all services,such as bandwidth, latency, jitter, traffic loss, and so on

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

R RDSee“Routing Domain” (p. GL-7).

RDISee“Remote Defect Indicator” (p. GL-7).

Remote Defect Indicator (RDI)An indication returned to a transmitting terminal about the fact that the receivingterminal has detected an incoming section failure.

RIBSee“IS Routing Information Base” (p. GL-4).

Routing Domain (RD)Part of the NSAP address.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

S SCOSee“Station Clock Output” (p. GL-8).

SDH Equipment Clock (SEC)A synchronization quality level;SDH Equipment Clockindicates that the timing signal isprovided by the NE’s own internal oscillator.

SECSee“SDH Equipment Clock” (p. GL-7).

SELSee“Selector Field” (p. GL-7).

Selector Field (SEL)Part of the NSAP address used to direct the protocol data units (PDU) to the correctdestination.

SFPSee“Small Form-factor Pluggable optic” (p. GL-7).

Small Form-factor Pluggable optic (SFP)Small Form-factor Pluggable optic (SFP)is a specification for a new generation ofoptical modular transceivers. The devices are designed for use with small form factor(SFF) connectors, and offer high speed and physical compactness. They arehot-swappable.

SNCPSee“Subnetwork Connection Protection” (p. GL-8).

SNPASee“Subnetwork Point of Attachment” (p. GL-8).

SSMSee“Synchronization Status Message” (p. GL-8).

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


GL-7

SSUSee“Synchronization Supply Unit” (p. GL-8).

SSU-LSee“Synchronization Supply Unit Local” (p. GL-8).

SSU-TSee“Synchronization Supply Unit Transit” (p. GL-8).

Station Clock Output (SCO)

Subnetwork Connection Protection (SNCP)Subnetwork Connection Protection (SNCP)is a type of path protection that is used toprotect the traffic for a pre-selected path. A working path is replaced by a protectionpath if the working path fails, or if its performance falls below a required level.

Subnetwork Point of Attachment (SNPA)According to ITU-T recommendation X.213 (2001), a point at which a real end system,interworking unit, or real subnetwork is attached to a real subnetwork, and a conceptualpoint at which a subnetwork service is offered within an end or intermediate system.

Synchronization Status Message (SSM)A Synchronization Status Message (SSM)is defined for SDH/SONET transport signals,for framed 2-Mbps signals, and for DS1 ESF external timing input signals. The purposeof the SSM is to signal the reference clock quality level from NE to NE in order to:

• Enable the timing generator to extract the timing reference signal with the best quality.

• Make it possible to autonomously enter the holdover mode in case there is no suitabletiming reference signal.

• Prevent timing loops.

Synchronization Supply Unit (SSU)According to ITU-T recommendation G.810 (1996), a logical function for frequencyreference selection, processing and distribution, having specific frequency characteristics.

Synchronization Supply Unit Local (SSU-L)A synchronization quality level;Synchronization Supply Unit Localindicates that thetiming signal was derived from a local SSU.

Synchronization Supply Unit Transit (SSU-T)A synchronization quality level;Synchronization Supply Unit Transitindicates that thetiming signal is derived from a transit SSU.

SystemSee“System Identifier” (p. GL-8).

System Identifier (System)Part of the NSAP address representing the node. The IEEE 802.3 MAC address isreserved and physically stored on every NE.

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

T TAPSee“Tunnel Auto Provisioning” (p. GL-9).

Target Identifier (TID)A parameter that is used to identify a particular network element within a network. It isa character string of up 20 characters where the characters are letters, digits, or hyphens(-).

TIDSee“Target Identifier” (p. GL-9).

TIMSee“Trace Identifier Mismatch” (p. GL-9).

Trace Identifier Mismatch (TIM)If the Trace Identifier Mismatch (TIM)detection is enabled, traffic will be lost when amistake in the trace string is detected.

Trail Termination Point (TTP)In a Trail Termination Point (TTP)the path overhead bytes of a signal are terminated.

Trail Trace Identifier (TTI)To check whether a path is correctly provisioned a path trace can be set. A label (forexample a word) is sent along the path from one termination point to the other. Thislabel is calledtrail trace identifier (TTI). If the TTI is a specific string, this string iscalled access point identifier (API). If the expected API equals the accepted API, thetransmission path is well provisioned.

TTISee“Trail Trace Identifier” (p. GL-9).

TTPSee“Trail Termination Point” (p. GL-9).

Tunnel Auto Provisioning (TAP)A method developed by Alcatel-Lucent to simplify the provisioning of nodes in a routingtable. The principle behind TAP is that IP routes known by dual stack with tunnelingnodes (DSwT nodes) at the edge of the OSI network are advertised across the OSInetwork to the other DSwT nodes which can then insert these routes into their ownrouting tables.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

U UITSSee“Unacknowledged Information Transfer Service” (p. GL-9).

Unacknowledged Information Transfer Service (UITS)A LAPD mode.In the Unacknowledged Information Transfer Service (UITS), corrupted PDUs areignored and no further actions taken. Upper layers of the OSI stack are responsible forrecovery actions.

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


GL-9

Index

Numerics

1+1 equipment protection

protection switch requests,5-10

protection switch states,5-10

15 minutes,16-15

15 minutes unidirectional,16-28

24 hours,16-15

24 hours unidirectional,16-28

24 hours bidirectional,16-28

.............................................................

A abort in-progress NE generictransfer,19-10

Acceptable frame type,6-36,6-40

acceptance QL,9-17, 9-21

Acceptance QL

for SCO timing status,10-14

Acceptance quality level,6-32

Accepted trace display mode,6-31, 6-42

access point identifierSee: API

acknowledged informationtransfer service

See: AITS

activate

NE generic,19-15

NE generics,18-2

OMS-to-NE connections,4-12

remote device generics,18-2

active timing source,9-17

add

equipment protectiongroups,6-74

MSP protection group,12-11

NE generic to themanagement system,19-3


transparent DCCcross-connections,4-28

uncorrelatedcross-connection,12-5

Add LAG, 14-13

Additional Manual AreaAddress 1

for DCN, 4-21

Additional Manual AreaAddress 2

for DCN, 4-21

AFI, 3-8

for OMS-to-NE connections,4-4, 4-7

AFI (address field),3-9, 3-10

AIS, 11-10, 15-6

AITS, 3-12

alarm indication signalSee: AIS

Alarm Severity AssignmentProfile (ASAP)

ASAP name,7-18

ASAP types,7-2

dcn, 7-3

DEFAULT ASAP, 7-3

equipment,7-3

ethPath,7-5

ethPS,7-8

Maximum number ofASAPs, 7-19

MiscDiscreteIn,7-4

pdhPath,7-8

pdhPS,7-7

sdhHOPath,7-13, 7-15

sdhMS,7-11

sdhMSP,7-13

sdhPRS,7-9

sdhVCG,7-17

timing, 7-9

alarms

blocking, 6-61

lining-up, 6-61

AMU AC-1, 5-3

AMU BlankFace32,5-3

AMU BlankFace40,5-3

AMU DI-EPL_E13_75,5-3

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


IN-1

AMU DI-EPL_E14, 5-3

AMU DI-ESW4_E14,5-3

AMU Fan, 5-3

AMU Fan Kit, 5-3

AMU MI-14/4, 5-3

AMU MountKit19B, 5-3

AMU MountKit19B2, 5-3

AMU MountKit19H, 5-3

AMU MountKitETSIB, 5-3

AMU MountKitETSIH, 5-3

AMU PI-E1/63, 5-3

AMU PI-E1/63-75,5-3

AMU SI-14/8, 5-3

AMU Subrack 2V (1m/1o),5-3,5-3

AMU Subrack 6V (2m/4o),5-3

API, 15-5

area,3-8

Area


Area (address field),3-9

area identifierSee: Area

ASC101B,5-3, 6-6

ASC102,5-3, 6-6

ASC103,5-3, 6-6

ASC104,5-3, 6-6

ASC105,5-3, 6-6, 6-26

ASC107,5-3, 6-6

ASC108,5-3, 6-6, 6-26

ASC109,5-3, 6-6

ASH101, 5-3

ASH102, 5-3

ASH102B, 5-3

ASH104, 5-3, 6-6

ASX001B, 5-3

ASX002B, 5-3

ASX003, 5-3

ASX004, 5-3

ASX005B, 5-3

ASX006B, 5-3

ASX007B, 5-3

ASX008, 5-3

authority and format identifierSee: AFI

Auto mode hold time (min),6-28, 6-34

Auto mode time (min)

for NE timing ports,10-3

auto negotiation,13-13

Auto negotiation for pausemode,6-35

Auto negotiation mode,6-35

Auto path cost,6-35, 6-40

auto-discovery,3-24

blocked, reasons for,3-24

CMISE NEs,3-27

inventory of NEs,3-25

of NEs, 3-24

of physical networkconnections,3-26

of rings, 3-24

of VCGs, 3-27

when it runs,3-24

auto-discovery command-linetool, 3-27

Available data,16-10

.............................................................

B Background Block Error (BBE),16-7

backup

NE database versions ontothe management system,19-24

Backward Monitoring,16-6

BBE, 16-4, 16-10

bin, 16-4

Bin, 16-29

bins, 16-4

block

alarms,6-61

broadcast,11-3

.............................................................

C Cable length (m),6-29

cascaded

SNC, 11-13

CbR, 16-11

CbS, 16-11

CIR, 6-38

CIR Egress

for VCGs, 6-50

CIR Ingress

for VCGs, 6-50

clear wait to restore state,9-9

Clear wait to restore state

for NE timing sources,10-10

CLNP, 3-15

CMC407, 5-3, 6-6

CMC408, 5-3, 6-6

CMC409, 5-3, 6-6

CMC410, 5-3, 6-6

CMC418, 5-3, 6-6

CMISE NEs

auto-discovery,3-27

cold reset,6-8

collision domains,13-13, 13-14

command-line tools

auto-discovery tool,3-27

Communication mode

for MSP protection groups,12-11

Index

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

IN-2 Alcatel-Lucent - ProprietarySee notice on first page

365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

communications interfaces

OSI, 3-23, 3-23

TCP/IP, 3-23

configuration possibilities,5-1

connection discovery

schedule,3-26

connectionless network protocol

CLNP, 3-15

Consequent action on trail tracemismatch,6-31, 6-42

convert

cross-connection,12-7

Counters,16-10

CQS, 13-16

CRC errors,16-4

Cross-connection rate

for cross-connections,12-5

cross-connections

add-drop (bi),11-3

bidirectional,11-3

broadcast,11-3

convert,12-7

delete,12-8

loopback,11-3

shape,11-3

simple (bi), 11-3

simple (uni),11-3

types,11-3

unidirectional,11-3

view, 12-2

Customer Port Flow Granularity

for Ethernet cards,6-45

customer-role port,13-9, 13-11

.............................................................

D data communication channelSee: DCC

data communication networkSee: DCN

Data Recovery

Loss of Association,16-29

DCC, 3-2, 3-10

add transparentcross-connections,4-28

channel selection,3-10

cross-connections,3-11,4-27, 4-28, 4-30

delete transparentcross-connections,4-30

disable for a port,4-20,6-26

enable for a port,4-20, 6-26

for DCCs, 4-20

transparent cross-connections,3-11, 4-27,4-28, 4-30

view list transparentcross-connections,4-27

DCC in MSP mode,3-12

set to independent,4-24

set to slave,4-24

view, 4-23

DCC/EOW status

modify, 4-20

DCC/EOW status for the portoverheads

view list, 4-19

DCN, 3-2, 3-10

addresses,3-7

area-divisioning,3-4

communication protocols,3-3

modify parameters,4-21

deactivate


DEFAULT ASAP, 7-3

Default user priority,6-35,6-40

Degraded value selection,6-33

delete

cross-connections,12-8



NE, 4-17

NE generic from themanagement system,19-4



Delete LAG,14-15

deprovision

loopback on a port,6-24

Designated router priority

for DCN, 4-21

DFI, 3-8

DI-EPL_E1/4+32-75,6-6

DI-EPL_E1/4+4,6-6, 6-26

DI-ESW4_E14,6-6, 6-26

differential delay,13-7

Directionality


disable

association with NE,6-59

DCC for a port,4-20, 6-26

DIX frames, 13-1

DNU, 9-4, 9-6

do not useSee: DNU

domain specific partSee: DSP

download

MIB to NE, 6-56

Index

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


IN-3

Dropped packets,16-11Also see: pDe

DSP, 3-8

DSP format identifierSee: DFI

DSwT, 3-13

connecting areas withmanual TAP tunnels,3-18

routing table,3-15

tunnel auto provisioning,3-17

dual stack with tunnelingSee: DSwT

.............................................................

E EB, 16-11

Egress bandwidth shaper,6-35,6-40

Egress PDH monitoring,6-29

electrostatic dischargeSee: ESD

electrostatic protectionSee: ESP

enable

association with NE,6-58

DCC for a port,4-20, 6-26

Encapsulation mode,6-38

for VCGs, 6-50

Encapsulation modedetermination,6-38

Encapsulation state

for VCGs, 6-50

end systemSee: ES

EoS, 13-4

equipment protection,5-9

1+1 protection switchrequests,5-10

1+1 protection switch states,5-10

wait to restore timer,5-10

equipment protection groups,5-9

add, 6-74

delete,6-78

execute an equipmentprotection switch,6-79

modify, 6-76

view, 6-73

equipment protection switch

execute,6-79

Errored Block (EB),16-7

Errored Second (ES),16-7

Errored Seconds,16-4

ES, 3-2, 16-4, 16-10

ESD

instructions,1-11

symbol, 1-11

ESP

bonding point,1-11

Ethernet,13-1Also see:TransLAN®

hubs,13-13

performance monitoring,13-18

routers,13-13

switches,13-14

Ethernet address,3-7

Ethernet card information

modify, 6-45

view, 6-44

Ethernet frame size,13-4

Ethernet II,13-1

Ethernet interface,5-2

Ethernet over SDHSee: EoS

Ethernet performancemonitoring, 16-21

Ethernet port provisioning,13-8

Ethernet switch,13-4

Ethertype,13-16

ethLAG, 7-18

event

probable cause,6-63, 6-64

execute

equipment protection switch,6-79

Expected trace display mode,6-31, 6-41

Expected trail trace format,6-31, 6-41

Expected trail trace value,6-31,6-41

Explicit TCA mode,16-16

.............................................................

F Fallback mode,6-32

fallback mode,9-21

Far End,16-4

Far End Monitoring,16-5

FEcPLCF,7-18

FEcPLL, 7-18

FEcTLL, 7-18

final destination,3-16

fixed 10-byte NSAP addressstructure,3-9

fixed 20-byte NSAP addressstructure,3-8

flexible NSAP addressstructure,3-9

Flexible part


flow control, 13-13, 13-14

Force DNU,9-21


forced DNU, 9-22

ForceDNU,6-32

Index

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Forward Monitoring,16-6

Frame Alignment signal,16-4

free running,9-3

full duplex, 13-13

.............................................................

G gateway NESee: GNE

gateway network elementSee: GNE

GEcPLCF,7-18

GEcPLL, 7-18

GEcTLL, 7-18

generic framing procedureSee: GFP

GFP, 13-1, 13-4

global wait to restore time,9-9

Global wait to restore time


GNE, 3-2, 3-23

GVRP, 13-11

.............................................................

H half duplex,13-13

hazard statements

symbols,1-4

hold-off timer, 11-12

holdover,9-3

.............................................................

I IDI, 3-8

IDP, 3-8

IEEE 802.3 MAC address,3-8,3-9

Implicit TCA mode, 16-16

in-progress transfers of NEgenerics

view list, 19-9

Ingress Ethertype overwritevalue


Ingress filtering mode,6-35,6-40

Ingress PDH degraded valueselection,6-33

Ingress PDH monitoring,6-29

initial domain identifierSee: IDI

initial domain partSee: IDP

inloop, 15-4

Inloop/Facility loopback,6-28

insertion and removal facilities,1-11

interfaces

Ethernet,5-2

LAN, 5-1

PDH, 5-1

SDH, 5-1

intermediate systemSee: IS

intermediate system tointermediate system

See: IS-IS

IP prefix, 3-16

IS, 3-2

IS routing information baseSee: RIB

IS-IS, 3-2

IS-IS on LAN

for DCN, 4-21

IS-IS on NE

for DCN, 4-21

ISDN mode,6-29

ISO DCC NSAP addressformat, 3-8

isolated state,5-7

ITM-CIT access controlprofiles

modify, 2-5

ITM-CIT accesses

view list of, 2-2

ITM-CIT users

log out, 2-3

............................................................

L LAN group, 13-4

LAN interfaces,5-1

LAN parameters,16-11

LAN ports, 13-3

port roles,13-8

LAPD

network_side mode,3-11

user_side mode,3-11

LAPD Mode

for DCCs, 4-20

LAPD Side

for DCCs, 4-20

laser safety

guidelines,1-8

laser safety precautions

for enclosed systems,1-10

for unenclosed systems,1-10

LCAS, 13-7

LCAS hold-off time

for VCGs, 6-50

LCAS hold-off time (ms),6-37

LCAS mode,6-37

for VCGs, 6-50

LCAS state sink,6-37

LCAS wait to restore time

for VCGs, 6-50

LCAS wait to restore time(min), 6-38

Index

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


IN-5

LCN, 3-2

Line coding,6-29

lining-up mode,6-61

link aggregation,13-15

link capacity adjustmentscheme

See: LCAS

Link pass through,13-15

Link pass through consequentaction mode,6-35

link state protocol data unitSee: LSP

list of ITM-CIT access controlprofiles

view list of, 2-4

local Alcatel-Lucent NSAPaddress format,3-9

local communications networkSee: LCN

Local NUT, 6-33

lock out request,9-17

locked, 9-3

lockout, 9-14, 9-18

lockout Request


Lockout Request

for SCO timing sources,10-13

log out

ITM-CIT users,2-3

logical ports

view a list of logical portscontained within a physicalport, 6-22

loop, 6-23

loopback ports

view a list ofloopback-enabled ports,6-23

LSP, 3-2

.............................................................

M MAC address learning mode,6-34, 6-39

manage

NE database on managementsystem,18-3

NE database on NE,18-3

NE generics on managementsystem,18-2

NE generics on NEs,18-2

remote device generics onmanagement system,18-2

remote device generics onNEs, 18-2

management information baseSee: MIB

manufacturers executable codeSee: MEC

Maximum LSP size

for DCN, 4-21

MDI, 5-8, 6-63, 6-64

modify, 6-71

view list, 6-70

MDI name, 6-71

MDO, 5-8, 6-63, 6-64

modify, 6-68

view associated alarms,6-67

view list, 6-66

MDO name,6-68

MDO status,6-68

Measurement

Termination Point,16-3

Measurement parameters,16-10

Measurement Parameters

Alarm, 16-8

TR values,16-8

measurement periods,16-15

Measurement periods,16-28

Measuring Method

BIP, 16-3

MEC, 18-4

memory stores,18-4

MIB, 5-6, 18-1

clear, 18-2

download to NE,6-56

update image,6-57

upload into managementsystem,6-55

view list of backups storedon the management system,19-21

miscellaneous discrete inputSee: MDI

Miscellaneous Discrete Input 1 Miscellaneous DiscreteInput 8, 7-4

miscellaneous discrete outputSee: MDO

MISC_1 MISC_8See: Miscellaneous Discrete

Input 1 MiscellaneousDiscrete Input 8

Mismatched MAC address list,6-35, 6-39

modify

DCC/EOW status,4-20

DCN parameters,4-21


Ethernet card information,6-45

ITM-CIT access controlprofiles, 2-5

MDI, 6-71

MDO, 6-68


NE event controls,6-61

Index

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

NE event parameter settings,6-64

NE system timing source,10-6

NE timing port, 10-3

NE timing source,10-10


P12sDCC Inband E1Management Channelparameters,4-33

port parameters,6-26

Protection group,12-18

SCO timing source,10-13

SCO timing status,10-14

slots, 6-5

system timing status,10-7

VCG, 6-50

Monitored


Monitoring a point

Prerequisite,16-3

MS DCC, 6-28

MS LAPD mode,6-29

MS LAPD role, 6-28

MS MSP DCC,6-29

MS MSP DCC mode,6-29

MS MSP LAPD mode,6-29

MS MSP LAPD role,6-29

MSP, 11-11

bidirectional mode,11-11

non-revertive mode,11-11

protected,12-11

revertive mode,11-11

unidirectional mode,11-11

MSP mode


MSP protection groups

add, 12-11

delete,12-14

fail condition, 11-12

hold-off timer, 11-12

modify, 12-13

operate an MSP protectionswitch, 12-15


view list, 12-9

wait to restore timer,11-12

multiplex section protectionSee: MSP

.............................................................

N NBMA, 3-14, 3-16

NE

auto-discovery of,3-24

DCC channel selection,3-10

delete,4-17

inventory of, 3-25

name,4-4


timing, 9-1

type, 4-4

view Ethernet cardinformation, 6-44

NE database,5-6, 18-1Also see: MIB

backup onto themanagement system,19-29

manage on managementsystem,18-3

manage on NE,18-3

restore from managementsystem to an NE,19-31

view list of versions storedon the management system,19-21

NE database versions

view list of versions storedon an NE,19-23

NE database versions stored onthe management system

view list, 19-21

NE event controls

modify, 6-61

NE event parameter settings

modify, 6-64

view, 6-63

NE generics

abort in progress transfer,19-10

activate,18-2, 19-15

add to the managementsystem,19-3

delete from themanagement system,19-4


manage on NE,18-2

schedule activation,19-18

schedule transfer frommanagement system toNE, 19-7

transfer from themanagement system to anNE, 19-5

view list of in-progresstransfers,19-9

NE generics stored on an NE

view list, 19-13

NE generics stored on themanagement system

view list, 19-2

NE location

for DCN, 4-21

Index

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


IN-7

NE name

for OMS-to-NE connections,4-4

NE software

generics,18-1

management,18-1

upgrade,18-4

NE system timing source

modify, 10-6

NE system timing sources

view list, 10-5

NE timing port

modify, 10-3

NE timing ports

view list, 10-2

NE timing source

modify, 10-10

NE timing sources

view list, 10-9

NE type

for OMS-to-NE connections,4-4

Near End

Bidirectional, 16-4

Near End Monitoring,16-5

NEs

disable association,6-59

enable association,6-58

Net Comm Grp


network service access pointSee: NSAP

network service providerSee: NSP

network-role port,13-9, 13-11

node creation,5-6

non-broadcast multiple accessSee: NBMA

NSAP, 3-2, 3-3, 3-7, 4-4

address structures,3-8

fixed 10-byte addressstructure,3-9

fixed 20-byte addressstructure,3-8

flexible address structure,3-9

formats,3-8, 3-9

NSAP address,3-7


NSP, 3-8

.............................................................

O OM155T101,5-3

OM155T102,5-3

OM155T103,5-3

OM155T104,5-3

OM155T105,5-3

OM155T106,5-3

OM622T101,5-3

OM622T102,5-3

OM622T103,5-3

OMGBET101,5-3

OMGBET102,5-3

OMGBET103,5-3


activate,4-12

add, 4-4

deactivate,4-10

definition, 3-22

delete,4-15

modify, 4-7

view list, 4-3

On Connection,16-30

operate an MSP protectionswitch, 12-15

Operator ID,3-8

OSI-DCN network,3-5

outloop, 15-4

Outloop/Terminal loopback,6-28

output port timing,9-20

overhead access ports

view list, 4-26

.............................................................

P Parity Check,16-4

partition repair,3-19

path overhead,16-4

path protection,11-9

path trace,15-5

pause operation,13-14

PDH interfaces,5-1

PDU, 3-8

performance counters,13-18

Performance Monitoring,16-4

performance monitoring

Ethernet,13-18

Performance monitoring points,16-3

Performance MonitoringPrerequisites,16-3

physical network connections


physical ports


PI-E1/63,6-6

PI-E1/63-75,6-6

port address/port alias tool,15-3

Port impedance,6-29

Index

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Port label,6-35

Port mode,6-28, 6-33, 6-37


Port path cost,6-36, 6-42

port translation,15-3

ports

add, 15-2

definition, 15-1

delete,15-2

deprovision loopback,6-24

ID format, 15-3

LAN, 13-3

logical, 15-1

modify parameters,6-26

names,15-3

physical,15-1

port address/port alias tool,15-3

provision loopback,6-24

rates,15-2

role assignment,13-9

roles, 13-9

supported rates,15-2

supported types,15-2

types,15-2

view a list of logical ports,6-21


view a list ofloopback-enabled ports,6-23

view a list of physical ports,6-20

WAN, 13-3

PRC, 9-4, 9-6

primary reference clockSee: PRC

priority, 9-14, 9-18


Priority

for SCO timing sources,10-13

priority classification, queueing,and scheduling

See: CQS

probable cause,6-63, 6-64

propagation delay,13-7

protection

MSP, 11-11

SNCP,11-9

Protection reference


Protection Section



Protection type


Protection: High order TP


Protection: Low order TP


protocol data unitsSee: PDU

provider bridge mode,13-16

provision

loopback on a port,6-24

Provisioned bit rate (Mb/s),6-35

Provisioned duplex mode,6-35

Provisioned interface type,6-35

Provisioned pause mode,6-35

provisioning

LAN and WAN portsdetails,13-17

............................................................

Q QL, 9-15

QL provisioned


QL-in, 9-10

QL-out, 9-10

QL-provisioned,9-11

QoS, 13-16

configuration options,13-16

quality of serviceSee: QoS

............................................................

R RD, 3-8

RDI, 15-6

RDI/REI insertion,6-30

Regenerator loop


REI, 16-4, 16-6

remote defect indicatorSee: RDI

remote device generics

activate,18-2


manage on NE,18-2

remote NESee: RNE

reset

wait to restore timer forVC TTPs, 6-53

Reset a slot

warm reset,6-8

Reset Threshold Report (RTR),16-6

Index

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


IN-9

restore

NE database version fromthe management system toan NE, 19-31

retiming, 9-8

RIB, 3-2

rings


RNE, 3-23

routing domainSee: RD

RS DCC,6-28

RS LAPD mode,6-29

RS LAPD role,6-29

RS MSP DCC,6-29

RS MSP DCC mode,6-29

RS MSP LAPD mode,6-29

RS MSP LAPD role,6-29

RTR, 16-12

.............................................................

S Sa Bit


schedule

backup NE databaseversions onto themanagement system,19-29

NE generic activation,19-18

transfer of an NE genericfrom management systemto an NE,19-7

scheduled tasks

connection discovery,3-26

software management,18-3

SCO, 9-2, 9-17

SCO timing source

modify, 10-13

SCO timing sources

view list, 10-12

SCO timing status

modify, 10-14

SDH equipment clockSee: SEC

SDH interfaces,5-1

SEC, 9-1, 9-4, 9-5, 9-6

section overhead,16-4

SEL, 3-8

SEL (address field),3-9, 3-9

Select Sa bit


selector fieldSee: SEL

self-timed mode,9-9

service level agreements,13-17

SES,16-4, 16-10

SES Declaration Threshold,16-7, 16-11

set

DCC in MSP mode toindependent,4-24

DCC in MSP mode to slave,4-24

SFP module assignmentstate,6-15

Set unit type

for slots, 6-5, 6-8

Severely Errored Second (SES),16-7

SFP,5-1, 5-2

SFP 155E,5-3

SFP GE LX,5-3

SFP GE SX,5-3

SFP GE ZX,5-3

SFP L1.1,5-3

SFP L1.2,5-3

SFP L4.1,5-3

SFP L4.2,5-3

SFP module assignment state

set, 6-15

SFP module information

view, 6-12

SFP modules

view list, 6-10

SFP S1.1,5-3

SFP S4.1,5-3

SFP SWF1-1,5-3

SFP SWF1-2,5-3

SI-14/8, 6-6

signal degrade thresholds,15-6

signal label,15-5

signal status,9-11

signal type,9-18

Signal type



Sink CIR, 6-38

Slot state

for slots, 6-5, 6-8

slots

modify, 6-5

view list, 6-3

small form-factor pluggableoptics

See: SFP

SNC/I protection,11-10

SNC/N protection,11-10

SNCP,11-9

SNPA, 3-16

software management,18-1

software management tasks

schedule,18-3

SONET

interworking, 11-12

Index

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

Source CIR,6-38

Source selection


Squelch method



SSM, 9-4

SSM out,9-22

SSU, 9-4

SSU-L, 9-4, 9-6

SSU-T, 9-4, 9-6

station clock input,9-2

Station clock output


station clock outputSee: SCO

STP port priority,6-36, 6-42

STVRP, 13-11

subnetwork connectionprotection

See: SNCP

subnetwork point of attachmentSee: SNPA

supported ports,15-2

Switch mode



switch request,9-11, 9-15, 9-19

Switch Request

for NE system timing,10-7



switch status,9-12, 9-15, 9-19

symbols

in hazard statements,1-4

synchronization status messageSee: SSM

synchronization supply unitSee: SSU

localSee: SSU-L

transitSee: SSU-T

System & output timing QLmode



system ID,3-8

System ID


System ID (address field),3-9,3-10

system identifierSee: system IDSee: System ID

system QL,9-16

system timing,9-13

system timing status

modify, 10-7

.............................................................

T Tagging mode


TAP, 3-17

target identifier

for OMS-to-NE connectionsSee: TID

TCA mode,16-15

test loops,15-4

test the communication with anNE, 4-14

Threshold Crossing Alert,16-4

Threshold crossing alert (TCA)

TCA mode,16-15

Threshold Report (TR),16-6

Thresholds,16-6, 16-12

thresholds,16-13

Thresholds

Alarms, 16-10

TID

for OMS-to-NEconnections,4-4

TIM, 11-10, 15-6

timing

mode,9-3

network synchronization,9-4

output, 9-2

priorities, 9-7

quality levels,9-6

reference,9-2

retiming, 9-8

sources,9-9

Timing alarm reporting,6-32

Timing mode,6-32

timing mode,9-16, 9-22

Timing mode


Timing source to switch to



TP, 11-7

TP 1: High order TP


TP 1: Low order TP


TP 2: High order TP


Index

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


IN-11

TP 2: Low order TP


TR, 16-12

Trace Identifier Mismatch,16-8

trace identifier mismatchSee: TIM

trail termination pointSee: TTP

trail trace identifierSee: TTI

Trail trace mismatch detectionmode,6-31, 6-42

transfer an NE generic from themanagement system to an NE,19-5

TransLAN®

cards,13-2

TransLAN®

overview, 13-1

transmission architecture,5-1

1m/1o, 11-5

2m/4o, 11-5

transmission plan,11-2

transmission speed,13-13

Transmitted trace display mode,6-30, 6-41

Transmitted trail trace format,6-30, 6-40

Transmitted trail trace value,6-30, 6-41


TTI, 15-5

TTP, 15-5

TU-AIS, 11-10

TU-LOP, 11-10

tunnel auto provisioningSee: TAP

.............................................................

U UAP, 16-7, 16-11, 16-12

UAS, 16-7, 16-11

UAS/UAT, 16-4

UITS, 3-12

unacknowledged informationtransfer service

See: UITS

uncorrelated cross-connections

add, 12-5

UNEQ, 11-10

update

MIB image, 6-57

upgrade

NE software,18-4

upload

MIB into managementsystem,6-55

.............................................................

V VC TTP view

for VCGs, 6-50

VC TTPs

view, 6-52

VC-n concatenation,11-8

VCG


modify, 6-50

view, 6-48

VCG capacity

for VCGs, 6-50

VCG TTP mode

for VCGs, 6-50

VCG type

for VCGs, 6-50

view

access control list,14-5

alarms associated with anMDO, 6-67

cross-connections,12-2

DCC in MSP mode,4-23


Ethernet card information,6-44

list of DCC/EOW status forthe port overheads,4-19

list of in-progress transfersof NE generics,19-9

list of ITM-CIT accesscontrol profiles,2-4

list of ITM-CIT accesses,2-2

list of MDIs, 6-70

list of MDOs, 6-66

list of MIB backups storedon the management system,19-21

list of MSP protectiongroups,12-9

list of NE database versionsstored on an NE,19-23

list of NE database versionsstored on the managementsystem,19-21

list of NE generics stored onan NE, 19-13

list of NE generics stored onthe management system,19-2

list of NE system timingsources,10-5

list of NE timing ports,10-2

list of NE timing sources,10-9

list of OMS-to-NEconnections,4-3

list of overhead accessports, 4-26

list of SCO timing sources,10-12

list of SFP modules,6-10

list of slots, 6-3

Index

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................


365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008

list of transparent DCCcross-connections,4-27

NE event parameter settings,6-63

P12sDCC Inband E1Management Channels,4-32

SFP module information,6-12

SNC/Cascading/DNIprotection groups,12-16

spanning tree parameters,14-1

USB interface information,6-17

VC TTPs, 6-52

VCG, 6-48

virtual concatenation,11-8,13-5, 13-6

virtual switch, 13-4

virtual switch, provision

spanning tree mode,14-3

VLAN tagging, 13-9, 13-16

VLAN tags, 13-8

.............................................................

W Wait to restore time (minutes),6-76

for MSP protection groups,12-11, 12-13

wait to restore timer,5-10,11-12

wait to restore timer for VCTTPs

reset,6-53

WAN ports, 13-3

port roles,13-8

worker reference,9-13

Working reference


Working Section


WTR, 6-53

.............................................................

X X16DS1, 5-3, 6-6

X2DS3-V2, 5-3, 6-6

X2E3-V2, 5-3, 6-6

X4IP-V2, 5-3, 6-6

X8PL, 5-3, 6-6

Index

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-312-854R5.0Issue 1 March 2008


IN-13

OPTICAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (OMS) | … MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (OMS) | RELEASE 6.3.2 PROVISIONING GUIDE FOR...

Documents

Transcript of OPTICAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (OMS) | … MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (OMS) | RELEASE 6.3.2 PROVISIONING GUIDE FOR...